Nokia ESERIES E66 User Manual
Nokia E66 User Guide Issue 5
DECLARATIO N OF CONFORMI TY Hereby, NOKIA CORPORATION decl ares that this RM-343 product is in co mpliance with the essential req uirements and other relev ant provisions of Directive 1999/ 5/EC. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be found at http://www.nokia.com/phones/ declaration_of_conformity/. é 2010 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, Eseries, E66, Ovi, and Vi sual Ra dio are trademarks or regist ered trademarks of Nokia C orporatio n. Nokia tune is a sound mark of Nok ia Corporation. Other product and company names mentioned herein ma y be trademarks or tradena mes of their respective owners. Reproduction, transfer, di stribution , or storage of par t or all of the contents in this document in any form without t he prior written permission of Nokia is prohib ited. Nokia operates a policy of continuo us development. Nok ia reserves the right to make chang es and improvements to any of the prod ucts descri bed in th is document without prior notice. This product inclu des software licensed fro m Symbian Software Ltd é1998-2009. Sy mbian and Sy mbian OS are tradema rks of Symbian Ltd. Java and all Java-based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. This product is licensed under the MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio License (i) for personal and noncommercial use in conne ction with information wh ich has been encoded in compli ance with the MPEG-4 Visual Standard by a cons umer engaged in a personal and no ncommercial activity and (ii) f or use in connection with MPEG-4 video provided by a licensed video provider. No l icense is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional informatio n, including that related to promotional , internal, and commercial uses, ma y be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC. See http: //www.mpegla.com. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERM ITTED BY APPL ICABLE LAW, UNDER NO CI RCUMSTANCES SHALL NOK IA OR ANY OF ITS LICENSOR S BE RESPONSIBLE FO R ANY LOSS OF D ATA OR INCOME OR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUE NTIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES HOWSOEVER CAUSED. THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT AR E PROVIDED "AS IS". EXCEPT AS RE Q U I RE D B Y A P PL I C A B L E L A W , N O W A RR A N T I E S OF A N Y K I N D, E I T H E R E X P RESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITE D TO, THE IMP LIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT ABILITY AND FITNE SS FOR A PARTICULA R PURPOSE, A RE MADE IN RELATI ON TO THE ACCURACY, RELIABILITY OR CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT . NOKIA RE SERVES THE RIGHT TO REVISE THIS DOCU MENT OR WITHDRA W IT AT ANY TI ME WITHOUT PR IOR NOTICE. Reverse engineering of software in the de vice is prohibited to the extent permitted by a pplicable law. Insofa r as this user gu i de contains any limitati ons on Nokia's representations, wa rranties, damages a nd liabilities, such limi tations shall l ikewise limit any represe ntations, warra nties, da mages and liabilities of Nokia's l icensors. The third-party applications provided wit h your device may have been created and may be owned by persons or entities n ot affili ated with or related to Nok ia. Nokia does not own the copyrights or intellectual property rights to the third-party a pplications. As such, No kia does not take a ny r esponsibility for en d-user support, functionality of the applications, or the information in the applications or these materia ls. Nokia does not provide a ny warran ty for th e third-party applications. BY USING THE APPL ICATIONS YOU ACKNOW LEDGE THAT THE A PPLICATIONS ARE PROV IDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY K IND, EXPRES S OR IMPLIE D, TO THE MAXIMUM
EXTENT PERMITTED B Y APPLICABLE LAW. YOU FU RTHER ACKNOWLEDGE THAT NEITHER NOKIA NO R ITS AFFILIATES MAKE AN Y REPRESENTAT IONS OR W ARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, IN CLUDING B UT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF TITLE, MERC HANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPO SE, OR THAT THE APP LICATIONS WILL NOT INFRING E ANY THIRD-PARTY PATENTS, COPYRIGH TS, TRADEMARKS, OR OTHER RIGHTS. The availability of p articular products an d ap plications and services for these prod ucts may vary by region. Please check with your Nokia dealer for details and availabili ty of language options . This device may con t ain commodities, technology or softwa re subject to export laws and regul ations from th e US and other co untries. Diversion contrary to law is prohibited . FCC/INDUSTRY CA NADA NOTICE Your device may cause TV or radio interferen ce (for example, when usin g a telephone in clos e proximity to receiving equipment). The FCC or Indu stry Canada can require you to stop using your telephone if such inter ference cannot be elimina ted. If you require assistance, contact yo ur local service facility. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the follo wing two conditions: (1) This dev ice may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, includi ng interference that may cause und esired operation. Any changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by Nokia co uld vo id the user's authority to operate this equipment. /Issue 5 EN
Contents Safety................. ................... .............. ............... ..7 About your device......................... ................................ .............7 Network services................................. .................... ..................8 Battery removing........ ....................................... ........................8 Find help......... ............ ............... .............. .............9 Support.......................................................................................9 Remote configuration...............................................................9 Update software using your PC..............................................10 Further information................................. .................... ...........10 E66 in brief................................ ........................ .11 Key features....................................... ......................... .............11 Keys and parts........ ......................... ............................. ............12 Key moves............................................ ................................ ....13 Set up your device..............................................15 Insert the SIM card and battery... ................................... ........15 Charge the battery..... .............................. ........................... .....16 Insert the memory card....................................................... ...16 Eject the memory card............................................................17 Connect the headset....... .......................... ........................ .......17 Attach the wrist strap..................... ..................... ................ ...17 Antennas......... .................... .................... ..................... .............18 Get started............. ............ ................. ................ 19 First start-up..... ................... .................. .................. ............... ..19 Welcome.......... .................................... ................................. ....19 Settings wizard.................... ....................................................19 Home screen......................... ............................. ......................2 0 Menu.........................................................................................20 Transfer content from other dev ices ........................ ............21 Common actions in several a pplications........... ....................22 Display indicators.............................................................. ......23 Volume control........................... .............................. ...............25 Memory.............................. ...................................... .................25 Write text............................................ .................................... .26 Nokia Ovi Suite......... ................................... .............................27 New from Eseries........ ......... ........ ........... .......... .28 Access tasks quickly................. ......................................... .......28 Home screen......................... ............................. ......................2 8 One-touch keys............................................................. ...........29 Nokia Calendar for Eseries................................................. .....30 Nokia Contacts for Eseries.. ................... .................... ..............32 Multitasking........................................................ .....................33 Open Ovi............................................................. ......................33 About Ovi Store........................................................................ 33 Personalisation.............................. ....................35 Profiles............................ .................................... ......................35 Select ringing tones.. ................... .................... .................. ......35 Customise profiles...................................................................35 Personalise the home screen..................... ............. ...............3 6 Change the display theme......................................................36 Download a theme..................................................................37
3-D ringing tones............. ..................................... ...................37 Media.......... ......................... .................. .............38 Camera....................... ..................................... ..........................38 Nokia Podcasting......... ................................................... .........40 Music player......... .................. .................. ................... ..............42 Share online.............................................................................43 Recorder................................................ ...................................44 Gallery................................................ .......................................44 RealPlayer............... .................................. ................................45 Flash player..............................................................................46 Radio................................. ............................................. ...........47 Internet radio............ ..................... ..................... .....................48 Internet..............................................................50 Web..................... ..................................................... .................50 Browse the intranet ........................................... ....................52 Internet access points..................... ........................................52 Connect PC to web...................................................................54 Messaging................... ............... ............. ...........55 Messaging folders............. ....................................... ................55 Organise messages... .................................. .............................56 Message reader........................ ................................................56 Speech............. .................... ...................... ..................... ...........56 E-mail messages......................................................................56 Text messages. .................. ................... ............... ................... ..60 Multimedia messages ............. ................. .............. .............. ...62 Instant messaging. ................................................. .................65 Special message types............................... ...................... .......67 Cell broadcast..................... .................................... ..................68 Messaging settings. .................................................................68 Phone............................................ .....................73 Voice calls...................................................... ...........................73 Video calls............. .................... ...................... .................... ......74 Net calls....................................................................................75 Speed dialling................................................... .......................77 Call divert.............. ........................... ......................... ................77 Call barring............................................................................... 78 Bar net calls................... ............................................... ............78 Send DTMF tones........... .............................. ............................. 78 Voice mail............................. ....................................................79 Voice aid...................................................................................79 Voice commands....... ........................ ....................... ................79 Push to talk............................................ ..................................81 Log................................................. ...........................................82 Travelling.............................................. .............84 About GPS and satellite signals..............................................84 Positioning settings ......................... ....................... ................85 Maps............................. ........................................... ..................85 GPS data.......... ......................... ............................ .....................93 Landmarks................ .................................... ............................93 Noki a Of fic e Too ls... ........... ........... ........... ........ ..95 Active notes.................... ................................. ......................... 95 Calculator..... .......................... ........................... ........................95 File manager.................................................................... ........96 Quickoffice....................... ............................. ........................... .96 Converter..................................................................................97 Zip manager.............................................................................97 PDF reader................................................................................97 Printing................ .................................. ...................................98 Clock............................................. .............................................99
Notes............... ............................... .................................. .........99 Nokia Wireless Keyboard......................................................100 Connectivity............. ............. ......... .......... ........101 Fast downloading........... ...................... .............................. ...101 PC connections........ ................................... ............................101 Data cable............... .................. ......................... .....................101 Infrared................. ..................... ...................... ..................... ..102 Bluetooth...... .................... .................. ................... .................102 SIM access profile..................... ................. ..................... .......105 Wireless LAN........... ................... ............... ................... ...........105 Modem.......................... ................................... .......................107 Connection manager.......... ...................................................108 Security and data management.. ................. ....109 Lock the device......................................................................109 Memory card security.................... ........................................109 Encryption..............................................................................110 Fixed dialling......... .................. .................. ................... ..........110 Certificate manager... ........................... .............................. ...111 Security modules...................................................................112 Back up data................................................. .........................112 Application manager... ...................... ....................... .............112 Activation keys......... ........................ ................... ...................115 Data synchronisation........................................................ ....116 Mobile VPN........................................................... ..................117 Barcode reader...................................... ................................118 Settings.............................. ......................... .....119 General settings........ ......................... ............................ ........119 Telephone settings........ ....................... .............................. ...122 Connection settings.... ..................... .................... ..................123 Application settin gs........................ ....................... ...............129 Shortcuts................................................ ..........130 General shortcuts................................. ................. ................130 Glossary................................. ...........................131 Troubleshooting.............. .......... ........ ......... .....134 Product and safety informatio n.......................136 Index............................................ ....................143
Safety Read these simple guidelines . Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete user guide for further information. SWITCH ON SAF ELY Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COM ES FIRST Obey all local laws. Always keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safe ty. INTERFERENCE All wireless devices may be suscepti ble to interference, which coul d affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN RESTRICTED ARE AS Follow any restrictions. Switch the device off in aircraft, near medical eq uipment, fuel, chemicals, or blasting areas. QUALIFIED SERVI CE Only qualified personnel ma y install or repair this product. ACCESSORIES AN D BATTERIES Use only approved accessories and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. WATER-RESIST ANCE Your device is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. About your device The wireless device described in this guide is approved for use on the (E)GSM 850, 900, 1800, and 1900 networks, and UMTS 900/2100 HSDPA networks. Contact your service provider for more info rmation about networks. Your devic e supports s everal connectivi ty methods and like computers may be expose d to viruses and other harmful content. Exercise caution with messages, connect ivity requests, browsing, and downloads. Only install and use services and software from trustworthy sources that offer adequate security and prot ection, such as applica tions that are Symbian Sign ed or have pass ed the Java Verified⢠testing. Consider installing antivirus and other security software on your device and any connected computer. Your device ma y have preins talled bookmar ks and links for third-party internet s ites and may allow you to a ccess third- party sites. These are not affi liated with Nokia, and Nokia does not endorse or assume liability for them. If you access such sites, take pr ecautions for security or content. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 7
Warning: To use any features in this device, other than the alarm clock, the device mu st be switched on. Do not switch the device on when wireless device use may cause interference or danger. When using this device, obey all laws and respect local customs, privacy and legitimate rights of others, including copyrights. Copyright protect ion may prevent some images, music, and other co ntent from being copied, modified, or transferred. Make back-up copies or keep a written record of all important information stored in your device. When connecting to any other de vice, read its user guide for detailed safety in structions. Do not connect incompatible products . The images in this guide may di ffer from your device display. Refer to the user guide for ot her important information about your devi ce. Network services To use the device you must have service from a wireless service provider. Some features are not available on all networks; other features may require that you make specific arrangements with your serv ice provider to use them. Network services involve tran smission of data. Check with your service provider for detai ls about fees in your home network and when roaming on other networks. Your service provider can explain wha t charges will a pply. Some networks may have limitations tha t affect how you can use some features of this device requ iring netwo rk su pport such as support for specific technologies like WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/ IP protocols and language- dependent charact ers. Your service provider may ha ve requested that certain features be disabled or not ac tivated in your device. If so, these features will not appear on your devi ce menu. Your device may also h ave customized it ems such as menu names, menu order, and icons. Battery removing Switch the device off and di sconnect the charger before removing the battery. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 8
Find help Support When you want to learn more about how t o use your product or you are unsure how your device should funct ion, go to www.nokia.com/support , or using a mobile device, nokia.mobi/s upport. You can als o select Menu > Help > Help in your device. If this does not resolve your issue, do one of the following: ⢠Switch off the device, and remove the battery. After about a minute, replace the battery, an d switch on the device. ⢠Restore the original factory settings. ⢠Update your device software. If your issue remains unsolv ed, contact Nokia for repair options. Go to www.nokia.com/repair. Before sending your device for repair, always back up the data in your device. Remote configuration Select Menu > Tools > Device mgr. . With Device manager, you can manage settings , data, and software on your device remotely. You can conn ect to a server, and receive config uration settings for your device. You may receive server profiles and different configuration set tings from your service providers or company information management department. Configuration settings may in clude connection and other setting s used by differe nt a pplications in your device. The available options may vary. The remote configuration con nection is usually started by the server when the device sett ings need to be updated. To create a new server profile, select Options > New server profile . You may receive these settings from your service provider in a configuration message. If not, define the following: ⢠Server name â Enter a name for the configuration server. ⢠Server ID â Enter the unique ID to identify the configuration server. ⢠Server password â Enter a passwor d to identify your device to the server. ⢠Session m ode â Select the preferred connection type. ⢠Access point â Select the a ccess point to use for the connection, or create a new access point. Yo u can also choose to be asked for the access point every time you start a connecti on. This settin g is available only if you have selected Internet as the bearer type. ⢠Host address â Enter the web address of the configuration server. ⢠Port â Enter the port number of the server. ⢠User name â Enter your user ID for the configuration server. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 9
⢠Password â Enter your password for the configuration server. ⢠Allow configuratio n â Select Yes to allow the server to initiate a configuration session. ⢠Auto-accept all requests â Select Yes if you do not want the server to ask for your conf irmation when it initiates a configuration session. ⢠Network auth entication â Select whether to use http authentication. ⢠Network us er name â Enter your user ID for the http authentication. This setting is available only if you have selected Network au thenticatio n to be used. ⢠Network passw ord â Enter your password for the http authentication. This setting is available only if you have selected Network au thenticatio n to be used. To connect to the server and receive configuration settings for your device, select Optio ns > Start configuration . To view the configuration log of the selected profile, select Options > View log . Update software using your PC Nokia Software Updater is a PC application that enables you to update your device software. To update your device software, you need a compatible PC, broadband internet access, and a compatible USB data cab le to conn ect your device to the P C. To get more information and to download the Nokia Software Updat er application, go to www. nokia.com/ softwareupdate. Further information Instructions in yo ur device To read instructions for th e current view o f the open application, select Options > Help . To browse the help topics and conduct searches, select Menu > Help > Help . You can select categories for which you want to see instructions. Select a category, such as Messaging, to see wha t instructions (help topics) are available. While you are reading the topic, scroll left or right to see the other topics in that category. To switch between the applic ation and help, pr ess and hold the home key. Tutorial The tutorial provides you info rmation about your device and shows you how to use it. Select Menu > Help > Tutorial . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 10
E66 in brief Model number: Nokia E66-1 (RM-343). Hereinafter referred to as Nokia E66. Key features Your new E series device helps you manage your busin ess and personal information in and ou t of office. Some of the key features are highlighted here: Switch from business to personal mode. Browse the internet, find blogs and receive news feeds with Web . Listen to mus ic with Music player . Get podcasts to your device with Podcasting . Find points of int erest with Maps . Access your e-mail while on the move. Stay up-to-date and plan y our meetings with Calendar . Manage your business partners a nd free time friends with the new Contacts application. Make calls using voice ov er IP services with Internet tel. . Connect to WLAN with WLAN wiz. . View documents , spreadsh eets, and presentations with Quickoffice . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 11
Keys and parts 1 â Power key 2 â Earpiece 3 â Light s ensor 4 â Selection key. Press the selection key to perform the function shown above it on the display. 5 â Call key 6 â Press the key for a few seconds to switch on Bluetooth connectivity. When writing te xt, press the key and select More symbols to access speci al characters. 7 â Microphone 8 â Camera (video calls only) 9 â Scroll key. Press the scroll key to enter a selection, to scroll left, right, up, and down on the display. A long press left, right, up, or down accelerates the scrolling. 10 â End key. Press the end key to reject a call, end acti ve calls and held calls, and with a long keypress, end data connections. 11 â Backspace key. Press the key to delete items. 12 â Shift key. When writing text, pres s and hold the key and select the text with the scroll key. Press this key for a few seconds to toggle between the Silent and General profiles. 13 â Charger connector 1 â Volume up key é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 12
2 â Voice key. Press the voice key to mute and unmute the active call. This key is also used in the Voice commands and Push to talk applications . 3 â Volume down key 4 â Capture key 5 â Release button 6 â Headset connector 7 â Micro-USB port 8 â Infrared port 1 â Home key 2 â Contacts key 3 â Calendar key 4 â E-mail key Key moves Your device rotates the display automati cally when you move it and responds to tapping an d turning. Scroll key lights notify you of events, and the slide enables answering and ending calls and locking the keypad. Automatic display rotation In all applications, the scr een rotates automatically from portrait to landscape when you tu rn the device to the left. For example, if you are browsing the web and turn the device to the left, the image rot ates accordingly an d changes to full screen. To display the cont rol and status pan es, press either selection key. The image changes to full screen in RealPlayer, browser, and image viewer. To turn off the automatic disp lay rotation or changin g to full screen, select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > General > Personalisation > Display > Display rotation or Turn to full view . Silence the device To set calendar and clock alarms t o snooze and to silence incoming calls, turn th e device face down. You can also silence the device by tapping it twice. To turn on silencing by tapping , select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Tones > Tap to silence > On . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 13
To turn off silencing by tapping or turning, select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Tones > Tap to silence or Turn to silence . Scroll key lights When you receive a message or miss a call, the scroll key starts blinking to indicate the event. When t he display light turns off, the scroll key starts blinking slowly. To set the length of time for bl inking for missed events or to select of which events you wa nt to be notified, select Menu > Tools > Settings > Gen eral > Perso nalisation > Notification light . To turn off slow blinking, select Menu > Tools > Profiles and a profile. Select Pe rsonalise > Breathing light . Slide function When the device or keypad is locked, calls may be poss ible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. To open or close the full-siz e keypad, push the slide up or down. To lock the keypad, close the slide. To unloc k the keypad, open the slide. Tip: To unlock the keypad without opening the slide, press the le ft and then the right selection key. To answer a call, open th e slide. To end the call, close the slide, unless you have a headset connected to the device, or you select Options before closing the keypad. To change the slide sett ings, select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Slide handling . The keypad of your device locks automati cally to prevent the keys from being accidentally pressed. To change the period after which the keypad is locked, select Menu > Tool s > Settings > Genera l > Security > Phone and SIM card > Keypad autolock period . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 14
Set up your device Set up your E66 followi ng these instructions. Insert the SIM card and battery 1. With the back of the device facing you, press the release buttons (1) and slide the back cover off (2). 2. If the battery is inserted, li ft the battery in the direction of the arrow to remove it. 3. Insert the SIM card. Make sure that the contact area on the card is facing the connectors on the device and that the bevelled corner is facing the top of the device. 4. Insert th e battery. Align th e contacts of the battery with the corresponding connectors on the battery compartment and insert in the direction of the arrow. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 15
5. Slide the back cover back to place. Charge the battery 1. Connect a compatible charger to a wall outlet. 2. Connect the power cord to the device. If the battery is completely discharged, it may take a while befo re the charging indicator starts scrolling. 3. When the battery is fully charged, disconnect the charger from the device, then from the wall outlet. Your battery has been precha rged at the factory, but the charging levels may vary. To reach the full operation time, charge the battery until it ha s been fully charged according to the battery level indicator. Tip: If you have old compatible Nokia chargers, you can use them with the Nokia E66 by atta ching the CA-44 charger adapter to the old charger. The ad apter is available as a separate enhancem ent. Insert the memory card Use a memory card to save the memory on your device. You c a n a l s o b a c k u p i n f o r m a t i o n f r o m y o u r d e v i c e t o t h e m e m o r y card. Memory card may already be in serted in your device. Memory cards are also availa ble as separate enhancements. 1. With the back of the device facing you, press t he release buttons (1) and slide the back cover off (2). é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 16
2. Insert the memory card in the slot with the conta ct area first. Make sure that the contact area is fa cing the connectors on the device. 3. Push the card in until it locks into place. 4. Close the back cover. Eject the memory card Important: Do not remove the memory card during an operation when the card is being accessed. Doing so may damage the memory card and the device, and corrupt data stored on the card. 1. Press the power key brie fly, and select Remove memory card . 2. Press the release buttons and slide off the back cover. 3. Press the end of the memory card to release it from the memory card slot. 4. Close the back cover. Connect the headset Warning: When you use the headset, your abilit y to hear outside sounds may be affected. D o not use the headset where it can endanger your safety. Connect the compatible headse t to the headset conn ector of your device. Attach the wrist strap Thread the wrist strap as sh own, and tighten it. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 17
Antennas Your device may have internal and external antennas. Avoid touching the antenna a rea unnecessarily while the antenna is transmitting or receiving. Co ntact wi th antennas affects the communication quality and may cause a higher power level during operation and may reduce the battery life. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 18
Get started Learn how to get sta rted with your device. First start-up 1. Press and h old the power key. 2. If the device asks for a PIN code or lock code, enter the code, and select OK . 3. When prompted, enter the country in which you are located and the current date and time. To find your country, enter the first letters of the country name. It is important to select the correct country, because scheduled calendar entries may change if you change the country la ter and the new coun try is located o n a different time zone. The Welcome application opens. 4. Select from the various options, or Exit to close the application. To configure the various settings in your device, use the wizards available on the home screen and in the Settings wizard ap plication. When you switch the device on, it may recognise the SIM card provider and configure some settings automa tically. You can al so contact your service provider for the correct settings. You can switch the device on without inserting the SIM c ard. The device starts up in the offline mode, and you cannot use the network-dependen t phone functions. To switch the device off, press and hold the powe r key. Welcome When you switch on your de vice for the first time, the Welcome application opens. Select from the following: ⢠Tutorial provides information about your device and shows you ho w to use it. ⢠Switch enables you to transfer content, such as contacts and calendar ent ries, from a compatible No kia device. See "Transfer content between devices" , p. 22 . ⢠E-mail se ttings h elps you configur e e-mail settings. ⢠Sett. wizard help s you configure various settings. See "Settings wizard" , p. 19 . To open the Welcome application later, select Menu > Help > Welcome . The available options ma y vary. Settings wizard Select Menu > Tools > Sett. wizard . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 19
Settings wizard configures your device for settings based on your network operator information. To use these se rvices, you may have to contact your service provider to activate a data connection or other services. The availability of the differe nt settings items in Set tings wizard depends on the feature s of the devi ce, SIM ca rd, wireless service provider, and th e availabi lity of the data in the Settings wizard da tabase. If Settings wizard is not available from your service provider, it may not appear in th e menu of your device. To start the wizard, select Start . When you use the wizard for the first time, you are gu ided through the set tings configuration. If there is no SIM card inserte d, you need to select the home country of your service provider, and your service provider. If the country or service pr ovider suggested by the wizard is not correct, se lect the correct one from the list. If the settings configu ration is interrupted, the settings are not defined. To access the main view of the Se ttings wizard aft er the wizard has finished the settings configuration, select OK . In the main view, select from the following: ⢠Operato r â Configure operator-s pecific settings such as MMS, internet, WAP, and streaming settings. ⢠E-mail setup â Configure e-ma il settings. ⢠Push to talk â Configure push -to-talk settings. ⢠Video sharing â Configure video sharing settings. If you are not able to use Settings wizard, vis it the Nokia phone settin gs web site. Home screen From the home screen you can qu ickly access features t hat you use the most, and see at a glance any missed calls or new messages. You can define two separate home screens for different purposes, such as one screen to show your business e-mail and notifications, and a nother to s h o w y o u r p e r s o n a l e- m a i l . This way, you do not h ave to see business-related messages outside office hours. Menu Select Menu . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 20
The menu is a starting point from which you can open all applications in the device or on a memory card. The menu contains appl ications and folders, which are groups of similar applications. All applications you install in the device yourself are by default saved in the Installations folder. To open an application, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To view the applications in a list, select Options > Change Menu view > List . To return to the grid vi ew, select Options > Change Menu view > Grid . To view the memory consumpt ion of different applications and data stored on the device or memory card and to check the amount of free memory, select Optio ns > Memory details . To create a new folder, select Options > New folder . To rename a new folder, select Options > Rename . To rearrange the folder, scroll to the applica tion you want to move, and select Options > Move . A check mark is placed beside the application. Scroll to a new location, and select OK . To move an application to a different folder, scroll to the application you want to move, and select Options > Move to folder , the new folder, and OK . To download applications from the web, select Options > Download applications . To switch between several open applications, press and hold the home key. Select an ap plication, and pres s the scroll key to switch to it. Leaving applications running i n the background increases the de mand on battery power and reduces the battery life. Transfer content from other devices Select Menu > Tools > Switch . You can transfer content, such as contac ts, from a compatible Nokia device to your new Eseries device using different connectivity methods . The type of content that can be transferred depends on the devi ce model. If the other device supports synchronisation, you can also synchronise data between the two devices or send data from this device to the other device. When you transfer data from your previous device, it may require you to insert the SIM card. Your new Eseries device does not need a SIM card when transferring data. Content is copied from the memo ry of the other device to the corresponding location in your device. Copying time depends on the amount of data to be transferred. You can al so cancel and continue later. The necessary steps for data transfer may var y depending on your device, and whether you have interrupted data transfer earlier. The items that you ca n transfer vary depending on the other device. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 21
Transfer content between devices To connect the two devices, follow t he instructions on the display. For some device models, the Switch application is sent to the o ther device as a message. To install Switch on the other device, open th e message, and follow the instructions on the display. On your new Eseries device, select the content you want to copy from th e other device. After the data transfer, you ca n save the shortcut with the transfer settings to the main view to repe at the same transfer later. To edit the shortcut, select Op tions > Shortcut settings . View transfer lo g A transfer log is shown after every transfer. To view the transfer details, scroll t o the transferred item in the log, and select Options > Details . To view the log of a previous transfer, scroll to a transfer shortcut, if available, in the main view, and select Options > View log . Any unresolved transfer conflicts are also displayed in the log view. To start solving conflicts, select Options > Solve conflicts . Synchronise, retrieve, and send data If you have previously transferred da ta to your device with the Switch application, select fr om the following icons in the Switch main view: Synchronise data with a compatible device if the other device supports synchronisation. With synchronisation, you can keep the data up-to- date in both devices. Retrieve data from the other device to your new Eseries device. Send data from your new Eseries device to your other device. Common actions in several applications You can find the following ac tions in severa l applications: To change the profile, or switch off or lock the device, press the power key briefly. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 22
If an applicati on consists of several tabs (see figure), open a tab by scrolling right or left. To save the settings th at you have configured in an applicati on, select Back . To save a file, select Options > Save . There are different saving options depending on the application you use. To send a file, select Options > Send . You can send a file in an e- mail or multim edia message, or using different connectivity methods. To copy, press and hold th e shift key, and select the text with the scroll key. Press and hold the shift key, and select Copy . To paste, scroll to where you want to paste the text, press and hold the shift key, and select Paste . This met hod may not work in applications that ha ve th eir own copy and paste commands. To select different items, s uch as messages, files, or contacts, scroll to the item you want to select. Select Op tions > Mark/ Unmark > Mark to select one item or Options > Mark/ Unmark > Mark all to select all items. Tip: To select almost all items, first select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark all , then select the items you do not want, and Options > Mark/Unmark > Unmark . To select an object (for ex ample, an attachment in a document) scroll to the object so that square ma rkers appear on each side of the object. Display indicators The device is being used i n a UMTS network (network service). The battery charge level. The higher the bar, the stronger the charge in the battery. You have one or more unread messages in the Inbox folder in Messaging. You have received new e-mail in th e remote mailbox. There are messages waiting to be sent in the Outbox folder in Messaging. You have one or more missed phone calls. The keys of the device are locked. An alarm is active. You have selected the Silent profile, and the device does not ring for an incoming call or message. Bluetooth is active. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 23
Data is being transm itted using Bluetooth connectivity. When the indica tor is blinking, your device is tryi ng to conn ect with another dev ice. An infrared connection is activ e. If the indi cator blinks, your device is trying to connect to t he other device, or the connection has been lost. A GPRS packet data connec tion is available (network service). If the icon is , the connection is active. If the icon is , the connection is on hold. An EGPRS packet data connection is available (network service). If the icon is , the connection is active. If the icon is , the connection is on hold. A UMTS packet data connect ion is available (network service). If the icon is , the connection is active. If the icon is , the connection is on hold. High-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) is supported and available (network service). T he icon may vary between region s. If the icon is , the connection is active. If the icon is , the connection is on hold. You have set the device to scan for WLANs, a nd a WLAN is availa ble. A WLAN connection is active in a network that does not have encryption. A WLAN connection is active in a network that has encryption. Your device is connected to a computer with a USB data cable. The second phone line is being used (network service). All calls are forwarded to another number. If you have two phone lines, a number indicates the active line. A headset is connected to the devi ce. The connection to a headset with Bluetooth connectivity has been lost. A hands-free car kit is connected to the devi ce. A loopset is connected to the device. A text phone is connected to the device. Your device is synchronising. You have an ongoing pu sh-t o-talk connection. Your push-to-talk connection is in the do not disturb mode, because the ringing ty pe setting of your device is set to Beep once or Si lent , or you have an incoming or ongoing phone call. In this mode, you cannot make PTT calls. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 24
Volume control To adjust the earpiece volume during a phone call or the volume of the media applica t ions, use the volume keys. Memory There are two types of memory into which you can save data or install applications: devi ce memory and memory card. Free memory To see how much memory is currently in use, how much free memory remains, and how much memory is cons umed by each data type, select Menu > Options > Memory details > Phone memo ry or Memory card . Tip: To ensure that y ou have adequate memory, transfer data regularly to a memory card or computer, or use File manager to delete files you no longer need. After you install applications to a compatible memory card, installation files (.si s , . s i s x ) r e m a i n i n t h e d e v i c e m e m o r y . T h e files may use large amounts of memory and prevent you from storing other files. To mainta in sufficient memory, use Nokia PC Suite to back up inst allation files to a compatible PC, then use the file manager to remove the installation files from the device memory. If the .sis file is a message attachment, delete the message from the Messaging inbo x. Memory card Select Menu > Tools > Memory . If you cannot use a memory card in your device, you may have the wrong type of memory card, the card may not be formatted for your device, or the card has a corrupted file system. Your Nokia device supports the FAT16 and FAT32 file system for memory cards. MicroSDHC This device uses microSD and microSDHC me mory cards. To ensure interoperabili ty, use only compatible memory cards with this device. Check the compatibility of a memory card wi th its manufacturer or provider. Other memory cards than microSD and microSDHC cards are not compatible with thi s device. Using an incompatible memory card may dama ge the memory card as well as the device, and data stored on the incompatible card may be corrupted. Use a memory ca rd To format a memory card for your device, select Op tions > Format memory card . When a memory card is formatted, all data on th e card is lost per manently. Consu lt your retailer to find out if you must format the memory card before you can use it. To change the name of the memory card, select Options > Memory card name . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 25
Write text The input methods provided in the device m ay vary according to different sales markets. Traditional text input is shown on the top right of the display when you are writing text using traditional text input. and indicate the selected case. indicates that the first letter of the sentence is writt en in uppercase and all the other letters are automati cally written in lowercase. indicates the number mode. To write text with the keypad, press a number key 2-9 repeatedly until the desired chara cter appears. There are more characters available for a n umber key than are printed on the key. If the next let ter is located on the same key as the present one, wait until the cu rsor appears, and enter the letter. To insert a number, press and hold the number key. To switch between the upper a nd lower case mode and the number mode, press # . To erase a character, press the backsp ace key. Press and hold the backspace key to erase more than one character. To access the most common punctuation marks, press the 1 key. Press 1 repeatedly to re ach the desired punctuation mark. To add special characters, press * . Scroll to the desired character and press the scroll key. To insert a space, press 0 . To move the cur sor to the next line, press 0 three times. To switch between the different character cases, press # . Predictive text input 1. To activate predict ive text input, press # twice quickly. This activates predictive text input for all editors in the device. The indicator is shown on the display. 2. To write the desired word, press 2-9 . Press each key only once for one letter. 3. When you have finished writing the word and it is correct, scroll right to confirm it, or press 0 to add a space. If the word is not correct, press * repeatedly to view the matching words the dict ionary has found. If the ? character is shown after the word, the word you intended to write is not in the dictionary. To add a word to the dictionary, select Spell , enter the word (up to 32 letters) using traditional tex t input, and select OK . The word is added to the dictio nary. When the dictionary is full, the new word replaces the oldest added word. Write the first half of a compound word; to confirm it, scroll right. Write the last part of t he compound word. To complete the compound word, press 0 to add a space. To switch predictive text input off for all editors in the device, press # twice quickly. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 26
Change the writing language When you are writing text, you can change the writing language. For example, if you p ress the 6 key repeatedly to reach a specific character, ch anging the writing langua ge gives you access to characters in a different order. If you are writing text using a non-Latin alphabet and w ant to write Latin characters, fo r example e-mail or web addresses, you may need to ch ange the writing la nguage. To change the writing lan guage, select Option s > Writing language , and a writing langu age that uses L atin characters. Nokia Ovi Suite Nokia Ovi Suite is a set of applications that you can install to a compatible PC. Ov i Suite grou ps all available applications in a launcher window from which you can open the applications. Ovi Suite may be included on a memory card, if provided with yo ur device. You can use O vi Suite to synchr onise contacts , calendar, and to-do and other notes between your device and a compatible PC application. You can also use Ovi Suite to transfer bookmarks between your device and compatible browsers, and transfer images and video clips between your device and a compatible PC. Pay attention to synchronisation settings. Data deletion as part of normal synchronisation process is determined by the settings selected. To use Ovi Suite, you need a PC that runs Microsoft Windows XP (SP2 or newer) or Windows Vista (SP1 or newe r), and is compatible with a USB data cable or with Blue tooth connectivity. Ovi Suite is not compatible with Appl e Macintosh computers. For further information on Ovi Su ite, see the built-in help, or go to www.nokia.com/support . Install Nokia Ovi Suite 1. Ensure the memory card is inserted in your Nokia E66. 2. Connect the USB cable. Your PC rec ognises the new device and installs the necessary driv ers. This can take several minutes to complete. 3. Select Mass storage a s the USB connection mode in your device. Your device is displayed in the Wind ows file browser as a Removable Disk. 4. Open the root of the memory card drive with the Windows file browser, and select the Ovi Suite installation file. 5. The installation is starte d. Follow the instructions. Tip: To update Ovi Suite, or if you have problems when installing Ovi Suite from the memory card, copy the installation file to your PC , and install from your PC. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 27
New from Eseries Your new Eseries device contains new versions of the Calendar and Contac ts applications, as well as a new h ome screen. Access tasks quickly Whenever you see the icon on the home screen, or in the Contacts or Calendar applications, scroll right to access a list of availa ble actions. To close th e list, scroll left. When you navigate in thes e applications, to go back to the previous level, scroll left. Home screen From the home screen you can quickly access feat ures that you use the most, and see at a glance any missed calls or new messages. Navigate in the home screen To access the home screen, press the home key briefly. The home screen consists of: ⢠application shortcuts (1) To access an application quickly, scroll to its shortcut and pr ess the scroll key. ⢠information area (2) To check an item displayed in the information area, scroll to th e item and press the scroll key. ⢠notifications (3) T o view the notifications, scroll to a box. Each box is only visible if there are items in it. To hide the boxes, press the backspace key. Work on the home screen 1. To search for contacts in the home screen, start entering the contact's name. When ente ring the characters, press each key once. For example, to enter "Eric", press 3742 . The device suggests matching contacts. To switch between the alph abetic and number modes , select Optio ns > Alpha mod e or Number mode . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 28
2. In the list of suggested co ntacts, scroll to the desired contact. This feat ure may not be available in all languages. To call the contact, press the ca ll key. To set off the contact search, select Option s > Contact search off . To check your received messages, scroll to the message box in the notification area. To read a message, scroll to it and press the scroll key . To access othe r tasks, scroll righ t. To view your missed calls, sc roll to the calls box in the notification area. To return a ca ll, scroll to a call and press the call key. To send a text messag e to a caller, scroll to a call, scroll right and select Send text msg. from the list of available actions. To listen to your voice mail, scroll to the voice mail box in the notification area. Scroll to the desired voice mailbox and press the call key to call it. Switch home screens You can define t wo home screen modes for different purposes, such as one mode to show your business e-mail and notific ations, and an other to show your personal e-mail. This way, you do not ha ve to see busine ss-related messages outside office hours. Your operator may have set you a third home screen with operator-specific items. To change from one home screen mode to another, scroll to and press the scroll key. One-touch keys With the One-touch keys you can a ccess applications an d tasks quickly. Each key has been as signed an application and a task. To change thes e, select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > One-touch keys . Your network operator may have assig ned applications to t he keys, in which case you cannot change them. 1 â Home key 2 â Contacts key 3 â Calendar key 4 â E-mail key Home key To access the home screen, press the home key briefly. Press the home key briefly again to access the menu . To view the list of active appl ications, press the home key for a few seconds. When the lis t is open, press the home key briefly to scroll the list. To open the selected application, press the home key for a few seconds, or press the scroll key. To close the selected applic ation, press the backsp ace key. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 29
Leaving applications running in the background increases the demand on battery power an d reduces the battery life. Contacts key To open the Contacts app lication, press the cont acts key briefly. To create a new contact, press t he contacts key for a few seconds. Calendar key To open the Calendar applic ation, press the calendar key briefly. To create a new meeting entry, press the calendar key for a few seconds. E-mail key To open your default mailbox, press the e-mail key briefly. To create a new e-mail message, press the e-mail key for a few seconds. Nokia Calendar for Eseries Select Menu > Office > Calendar . Create and view scheduled ev ents and appo intments , and switch between differe nt calendar views. Calendar views You can switch between the following views: ⢠Month view shows the current month and th e calendar entries of the selected day in a list. ⢠Week view shows the events for the selected week in seven day boxes. ⢠Day view shows the events for the selec ted day grouped into time slots according t o their starting time. ⢠To-do view shows all to-do items. ⢠Agenda view shows the events for the selected day in a list. To change the view, select Option s > Change view and th e desired view. Tip: To open the week view, scroll to a week number and press the scroll key. Tip: To switch between views, press * . To move t o the nex t or the pr evious day in month, week, day, and agenda views, scroll right or left. To change the default view, select O ptions > Settings > Default view . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 30
View calendar information In the month view, calendar entries are marked with a triangle. Anniversary entries are also marked with an exclamation mark. The entries of the selected day are shown in a list. To open calendar entries, open a calendar view, scroll to an entry, and press the scroll key. Create calendar entries You can create the following types of calendar entries: ⢠Meeting entries remind you of events that ha ve a specific date and ti me. ⢠Memo entries are related to the whole day but not to a specific time of the day. ⢠Anniversary entries remi nd you of birthdays and special dates. They refer to a cert ain day but not a specific time of the day. Anniversary entries are repeated every year. ⢠To-do entries remind you of a task tha t has a due date but not a specific time of the day. To create a calendar entry, scroll to a date, select Options > New entry and the entry type. Tip: To create a meeting entry, start entering the subject. Create meeting, memo, anniversary, or to-do entries 1. Enter the subject. 2. For meeting entries, enter the start and end times, or select All-day event . 3. For meeting and memo entries, enter the start and end dates. For annivers ary entries, enter the date and for to- do entries, enter the due date. 4. For meeting entries, enter the location. 5. For meeting, anniversary, and to-do entries, you can se t an alarm. 6. For recurring meeting entrie s, set the recurrence time. 7. For to-do entries, set the priority. To set the priorit y for meeting entries, select Options > Prior ity . 8. For memo, a nniversary, and to-d o entries, define how the entry is handled during synchronisation. Select Private to hide the entry from viewers if the calendar is available online, Public to make the entry visible to viewe rs, or None to not copy the entry to yo ur computer. 9. Enter a description. To send the entry, select Options > Send . Calendar settings Select Options > Settings . To change the alarm tone, select Calendar alarm tone . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 31
To change the view displayed when you open the calendar, select Default view . To change the first day of the week, select Week star ts on . To change the week view title, select Week view title and Week number or We ek dates . Nokia Contacts for Eseries Select Menu > Communic. > Contacts . Save and update contact in formation, such as phone numbers, home addresses, or e-mail addresses of your contacts. You can add a personal ringing ton e or a thumbnail image to a contact. Y ou can also create contact groups, w hich allow you to communicate with s everal contacts at the s ame time, and send c ontact infor mation (bus iness cards) to o r receive it from compatible devices. Whenever you see the icon, scroll right to access a list of available actions. T o cl ose the list, scroll left. Add contacts Select Options > New contact , and enter the conta ct's information. To copy a contact's information from the memory card, select Options > Copy > From memory card . Contact groups Select each contact you want t o add to the contact grou p, press # to mark it, select Opt ions > Group > Add to group > Create new group > Group name , and enter a name for the group. If you want to make conference calls to the group, define also the following: ⢠Conf. service number â Enter the conf erence call service number. ⢠Conf. servi ce ID â Enter the conference call ID number. ⢠Conf. servi ce PIN â Enter the conference call PI N code number. To make a conference call to the group, select the group, Options > Call > Call conf. se rvice , and from the list of available actions. Search for contacts To search for contacts, st art entering the contact's name i n the search field. To switch to the predictive search mode, select Options > Activate predict. search . To search for contacts in the predictiv e search mode, enter the beginning of the cont act's name in the search field. To move to the next hit with th e same alphabet ical combination of letters, press * . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 32
Manage contacts directories To change the conta cts directory, scroll to the top of th e names list, pres s the scroll key, and select from the list of available directories. To organise contacts directories, select Options > Organise contact lists and a directory. Scroll up to move it to the desired place. Add ringing tones for contacts You can set a ringing ton e for a contact or contact grou p. The ringing tone sounds when the contact calls you. To add a ringing tone for contacts, open a contact, select Options > Ringing tone and a ringing tone. To add a ringing tone for contact groups, select a contact group, Options > Group > Ringing tone and a ringing tone. To remove the assigned ringing tone, select Default tone from the list of ringing tones. Change contacts settings Select Options > Settings . To change the way the contacts' names a re displayed, select Name display . To select which contacts dire ctory opens when you open the Contacts application, select Default contact list . Multitasking You can have several a pplicat ions open at the same time. To switch between activ e applicat ions, press and hold the home key, scroll to an application, and press the scroll key. To close the selected application, press the backspace key. Example: When you have an active phone call and want to check your calendar, press th e home key to access the menu, and open the Calend ar application. The phone call remains active in the background. Example: When you are writing a message and want to check a web site, press the home key to access the menu, and open th e Web application. Select a bookmark or enter the web address manu ally, and select Go to . To return to your message, pres s and hold the home key, scroll t o the message and press the scroll key. Open Ovi Ovi is your door to different Nokia services. For a tour and more information, see www.ovi.com. About Ovi Store In Ovi Store, you can download mobile games, applications, videos, im ages, and ring ing tones to your device. So me of the items are free of charge; others you need to purchase using your credit card or through your phone bill. Ovi Store offers é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 33
you content that is compat ible with your mobile device and relevant to your ta stes and location. The content in Ovi Store is sorted into the following categories: ⢠Recommended ⢠Games ⢠Personalisation ⢠Applications ⢠Audio & video é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 34
Personalisation You can personalis e your devi ce by adjusting the various tones, background im ages, an d screen s avers, for example. Profiles Select Menu > Tools > Profiles . You can adjust and customise th e ringing tones, alert tones, and other device tones for diffe rent events, environments, or caller groups. The profile currently in use is shown at the top of the display on the home sc reen. However, if the active profile is General, only today's date is shown. To create a new profile, select Options > Create new , an d define the settings. To customise a profile, select a profile and Optio ns > Personalise . To change a profile, select a profile and Options > Activate . The Offl ine profile prevents your device from accidentally switching on, send ing or receiving messages, or using wireless LAN, Bluetooth, GP S, or FM radio; it also closes any internet connecti on that may be in operati on when the profile is selected. The Offline profile does not prevent you from establishing a wireless LAN or Bluetooth connection at a later time, or from restart ing the GPS or FM radio, so comply with any applicable safety requi rements when establishing and using these features. To delete a profile that you created, select Options > Delete profile . You cannot delete the predefined profiles. Select ringing tones To set a ringing tone for a profile, select Options > Personalis e > Ringing ton e . Select a ringing tone from the list, or select Download sounds to open a bookmark folder containing a list of bookmark s for downloading tones using the browser. Any downloaded tones are saved to Gallery. To play the ringing tone for a selected con tact group only, select Option s > Personali se > Alert for , and select the desired group. Phone calls comi ng from outside that group have a silent alert. To change the message ton e, select Options > Personalis e > Message alert tone . Customise profiles Select Options > Personali se , and define the following: ⢠Ringing tone â Select a ringing tone from the list, or select Download sounds to open a bookmark folder containing a list of bookmarks for download ing tones using the browser. If you ha ve two alternate phone li nes in use, you can specify a ringin g tone for each line. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 35
⢠Video call tone â Select a r inging tone for video calls. ⢠Say caller's name â When you select this option and someone from your contacts list calls you, the device sounds a ringi ng tone that is a combination of the spoken name of the contact and the selected ring ing tone. ⢠Ringing type â S elect how you want th e ringing tone to alert. ⢠Ringing volume â Select the volume level of the ringing tone. ⢠Message alert tone â Select a tone for received text messages. ⢠E-mail alert tone â Select a tone for received e-mail messages. ⢠Vibrating alert â Set the device to vibrate when you receive a call. ⢠Keypad to nes â Set the volu me level of the device keypad t ones. ⢠Warning tones â Turn the warning tones on or off. This setting also affect s the tones of some ga mes and Java applications. ⢠Alert for â Set the device to ri ng only upon calls from phone numbers that belong to a selected contact group. Phone calls coming from outside that group have a silent alert. ⢠Profile na me â You can give a name to a new profile or rename an existing profile. The General and Offline profiles cannot be renamed. Personalise the home screen Select Menu > Tools > Modes . T o c h a n g e t h e n a m e o f t h e current h ome screen, select Mode name . To select which applications and notifications you want to see on the home screen, select Home screen applications . To change the theme of the ho me screen currently in use, select Theme . To change the background image of the home screen currently in use, select Wallpaper . To change from one home screen to another, select Switch mode . Change the display theme Select Menu > Tools > Them es . To change the theme used in all applications, select the General folder. To change the theme used in the main menu, select the Menu view folder. To change the theme for a particul ar application, select the application-specific folder. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 36
To change the background image of the home screen, select the Wallpaper folder. To select an animation for the screen saver, select the Power saver folder. Download a theme To download a theme, select General or Menu view > Download themes . Enter the link from which you wan t to download your theme. Once the theme is downloaded, you can preview, activate, or edit it. To preview a theme, select Options > Preview . To start using the selected theme, select Options > Set . 3-D ringing tones Select Menu > Media > 3-D tones . To enable 3-D sound effects for ringing tones, select 3-D ringing tone effects > On . Not all ringing tones support 3â D effects. To change the 3âÂÂD effect th at is applied to the ringing tone, select Sound trajectory and the desired effect. To select the speed at which sound moves from one direction to another, select Trajectory sp eed . This setting is not available for all effects. To adjust the amount of echo, select Reverberation and the desired effect. To listen to the ringing to ne with the 3âÂÂD effect, select Options > Play tone . To adjust the volume of the ringing tone, select Menu > Tools > Profiles > Options > Personalise > Ringin g volume . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 37
Media Your device contains a variet y of media applicat ions for both business and leisure time use. For more information, see the extended user guide on the web. Camera Select Menu > Media > Camera . Capture an image Your device supports an image capture resolution of up to 2048 x 1536 pixels. The image re solution in this guide ma y appear different. To capture an image, use the display as a viewfinder and press the scroll key. T he device saves the image in Galle ry. To zoom in or out before capt uring an image in the landscape mode, scroll up or down. This f u nction is availa ble only when the toolbar is not shown. The toolbar provides you with shortcuts to different items and settings before and af ter capturing an image or recording a video. Scroll to a toolbar item and press the scroll key. Switch between the vide o mode and the image mode. Select the scene. Select the flash mode (images only). Activate th e self-timer (ima ges only). Activate th e sequence mode (images only). Select a colour effect. Show or hide the viewfinder grid (images only). Adjust the white balance. Adjust the exposure compensation (images only). The available options vary de pending on the capture mode and view you are in. The settings return to the default after you close the camera. Scen es A scene helps you to find the ri ght colour and lighting settings for the current environment. Th e settings of each scene have been set according to a ce rtain style or environment. To change the scene, select Scene modes in the toolbar. To make your own scene, scroll to User defined , a nd select Options > Change . To copy the settings of another scene, select Based on scene mode and the desired scene. To activate your own scene, scroll to User define d , press the scroll key, and select Select . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 38
Capture images in a sequenc e To capture several images in a sequence, if enough memory is available, select Switch to sequen ce mode in the toolbar and press the scroll key. The captured images are shown in a grid on the display. To view an image, scroll to it and press the scroll key. If you used a time interval, only the last image is shown on the display, and the other images ar e available in Gallery. To send the image, select Options > Send . To switch off the sequence mode, select Switch to norm al mode in the toolbar. View captured image The image you ca ptured is automatically saved in G allery. If you do not want to keep the image, select Del ete from the toolbar. Select from the following toolbar items: ⢠Send â Send the image to compatible devices. ⢠Post to â S end the image to your compatible online album (network service). To use the image as the background image, select Options > Set as wallpaper . To add the image to a contact, se lect Options > Set as contact call img. > Assign to contact . Record videos 1. If the camera is in the im age mode, select the video mode from the toolbar. 2. To start recording, press the scroll key. 3. To pause recording at any time, select Paus e . Select Continue to resume recording. 4. To stop recording, select St op . The video clip is automatically saved in Galle ry. The maximum length of the video clip depends on the available memory. Play a video clip To play a recorded video clip, select Play from the too lbar. Select from the foll owing toolbar items: ⢠Send â Send the video clip to other compatible devices. ⢠Send to cal ler â Send the video clip to the caller during an active call. ⢠Post to â Send the video to an online album (network service). ⢠Delete â Delete the clip. To enter a new name for the clip, select Options > Rename video . Image settings To change the still image se ttings, select Options > Settings and from the following: é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 39
⢠Image quality â Set the image quality. The better the image quality, the more me mory the image consumes. ⢠Show captured image â To see the image after the capture, select On . To continue taking pictures immediately, select Off . ⢠Default image name â Define the default na me for the captured images. ⢠Extended digital zoom â On (continuous) allows the zoom increments to be sm ooth and cont inuous between the digital and extend ed digital zoom, and Off allows a limited amount of zoom while retaining the image resolution. ⢠Capture tone â S et the tone that sounds when you capture an image. ⢠Memory in use â Choose where to store your images. ⢠Rotate image â Rotate th e images. ⢠Restore camera set tings â To return the default values to the camera settings, se lect Yes . Video settings To change the video mode setting s, select Opti ons > Settings and from the following: ⢠Video quality â Set the quality of the video clip. Select Sharing , if you want to send the video clip using a multimedia message. The clip is recorded with QCIF resolution, in the 3GPP file format , and the size is limited to 300 kB (approximately 20 seconds). You may not be able to send video clips saved in the MPEG-4 file format in a multimedia message. ⢠Audio recording â Select Mute if you do not want to record sound. ⢠Show captured vi deo â View the first frame of the recorded video clip after the recording stops. To view the entire video clip , select Play from the t oolbar. ⢠Default video name â Define the default name for recorded video clips. ⢠Memory in use â Choose where to store your video clips. ⢠Restore came ra settings â Restore the camera settings to the default va lues. Nokia Podcasting Select Menu > Media > Podcas ting . Download podcasts to your device an d listen them. Play and mana ge podcasts Podcasting delivers audio or video content over the internet for playback on mobile devices and PCs. With the Nokia Podc asting applica tion, you can s earch, discover, subscribe, and download podcast s over the air; and play, manage, and sha re podcasts with your device. Define the connection and downloading settings before using the application. Select Options > Setti ngs > Connection and Download . To search for new podcast episodes to subscr ibe to, select Directories . To search for podcasts usin g keywords and podcast show titles, select Search . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 40
To display the avai lable episod es from the selected podcast, open the Podcasts folder and select Ope n . To download the selected episode, select Download . To play the download ed episode, select Play . To update the selected podcast or marked podcasts, for a new episode, select Options > Update . To open the web site of the podcast (network service), select Options > Open web page . Some podcasts provide the opportunity to interact with the creators by commenting and voting. To connect to th e internet to do this, select Options > View comments . Directories Select Directories . Directories help you find new podcast episodes to which to subscribe. Contents of the directories change. Select the desired directory folder to update it (network service). The colour of the folder changes, when the update is complete. To subscribe to a podcast, s croll to the podcast title and select Update . After you have subscribed to episodes of a podcast, you can download, manage, a nd play them in the podcasts menu. To add a new directory or folder, select Option s > New > Web directory or Fo lder . Select a title, URL of the .opml (outline processor markup language) file, and Done . To import an .opml file stored on your device, select Options > Import OPML file . To save a received .opml file, open the file to save the file i nto the Received folder in Directories. Open the folder to subscribe to any of the links to add to your podcasts. Search podcasts Search helps yo u find podc asts by keyword or title. The search engine uses the podcast search service you set up in Podcasting > Options > Se ttings > Connection > Search service URL . To search for podcasts, select Search , and enter the desired keywords. Tip: Search looks for podcast titles and keywords in descriptions, not specific episodes. General topics, such as football or hip-hop, usually give better results than a specific team or artist. To subscribe to selected ch annels and add them to your podcasts, select Subscrib e . To start a new search, select Options > New search . To see the details of a podcast, select Options > Description . Podcasting settings To edit the connection settings, select Options > Settings > Connection . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 41
To edit the download settings, select Options > Settings > Download . To restore the default sett ings, open the corresponding settings and select Options > Rest ore default . Music player Select Menu > Media > Music player . Music player supports files form ats such as AAC, AAC , eAAC , MP3, and WM A. Music pl ayer does not n ecessarily s upport all features of a file format or a ll the variations of file formats. You can also use Music play er to listen to podcast episodes. Podcasting is a method for deli vering audio or video content over the internet using either RSS or Atom technologies for playback on mobile devices and PCs. You can transf er music from other compatible devices t o your device. See "Transfer music from a computer" , p. 43 . Play a song or a podcast episode To add all available song s and podcasts to the music library, select Options > Refresh . To play a song or a podcast episode, select Music or Podcasts and the desired category, then scroll to the song or podcast episode and press the scroll key. To pause playba ck, press the scroll key; to resume , press the scroll key again. To stop playback, scroll down. To fast forward or rewind, pres s and hold the scroll key to the right or left. To go to the next item, scroll ri ght. To return to the beginning of the item, scroll left. To skip to the previous item, scroll left again within 2 seconds a fter a song or podcast has started. To modify the tone of the music playback, select Options > Equaliser . To modify the balance and ster eo image or to enhance bass, select Option s > Audio settings . To return to the home screen and leave the player playing in the background, press the end key. Playlists To view and manage playlists, select Music > Playlists . To create a new playlist, select Options > Create playl ist . To add songs to the playlist, select the song and Opti ons > Add to a playlist > Saved playlist or Ne w playlist . To reorder songs in a playlist, scroll to the song you want to move, and select Options > Reorder list . Nokia Music Store Select Menu > Media > Music store . In the Nokia Music Store (network service) you can search, browse, and purchase music to download to you r device. To purchase music, you need to register for the service. Nokia Music Store is not availabl e in all regions and countries. To find more music in the different categories, select Options > Find in Music store . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 42
To select the access point to use with the Music Store, select Default acc. pt. . Transfer music from a computer You can use the following me thods to tr ansfer music: ⢠To install Nokia Ov i Player to manage an d organise your music files, download the PC software from www.ovi.com, and follow the instructions . ⢠To view your device on a computer as a mass memory device where you can transfer any d ata files, make the connection with a compatible U SB data cable or Bluetooth connectivity. If you are using a USB data cable, select Mass storag e as the connection mode. A compa tible memory card must be inserted in the device. ⢠To synchronise music with Windows Media Player, connect a compatible USB data cable, and select Media transfer as the connection mode. A compatible memory card must be inserted in the device. To change the defaul t USB connection mode, select Menu > Connectivity > USB and USB connection mode . Preset frequency settings Select Menu > Media > Music player > Options > Go to Now playing > Options > Equaliser . To use a preset frequency sett i ng when playin g music, select the frequency setting you wa nt to use, and se lect Opt ions > Activate . To modify the frequency of a preset setting, select Options > Edit , select a frequency band, and scroll up or down to increase or decrease its valu e. You hear your frequency adjustmen t immediately in the playback. To reset the frequency bands to their original values, select Options > Reset to defaults . To create your own freq uency setting, select Options > New preset . Enter a name for the frequency setting. Scroll up or down to mo ve between the frequ ency bands and set the frequency on each band. Share online Select Menu > Media > Share online . You can share images and vide o clips in compatible online albums, blogs, or in other comp atible online sharing services on the web. You can u pload content, save unfinished posts as drafts and continue later, an d view the content of the albums. The sup ported content types may va ry depending on the service provider. To share files online, you must have an account with a n online image sharing service. You can usually subscribe to such a service on the web page of your service provider. Contact your service provider for more information. Share images online To upload a file from Gallery to the online service, select Menu > Gallery , select the desired file and Options > Send > Post t o web . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 43
Recorder Select Menu > Media > Record er . With Recorder, you can record up to 60 minutes of a voice memo, save the voice recording as a sound clip, and play th e sound clip. Recorder suppo rts the AMR file format. You can also press the voice key to open the Recorder application. If you ha ve logged in to push to talk, the voice key works as a push-to-talk key and does not open Rec order. Record a sound clip To record a sound clip, select Options > Record s ound clip . Select Pause to pause the recording, and Record to resume recording. When you finish recording , select Stop . The sound clip is automatically saved to th e Sound clips folder in Gallery. Play a recording To listen to the sound clip that you just recorded, select Play . The progress bar displays th e playing time, p osition, and length of the clip. Select St op to cancel the playback. To pause the playback of a recorded clip, select Pause . Playback resumes when you select Play . Recorder settings Recordings are automatically sav ed to the device memory unless you change the default lo cation. Recordings that you create or receive after you change the settin gs are affected. To change the default location of saved recordings, select Options > Settings > Memory in use . To define the recording quality, select Options > Settings > Recording quality . If you sele ct High , the sound clip you record is in waveform file format (.wav) and th e maximum length for the clip is 60 minutes. If you select MMS compatible , the sound clip you record is in adaptive multirate file format (.amr), and the maximum leng th for the clip is one minute. Gallery Select Menu > Media > Gallery . Use Gallery to access and use different types of media, including images, videos, mu sic, and sounds. All viewed images and video s, and all re ceived music and sounds are automatically saved to Ga llery. Sound clips are opened in the Music player, and video clips and streaming lin ks in the RealPlayer application. Im ages are opened in the image viewer. Work with media files and folders To open a file or a folder, select the file or folder. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 44
To create a new folder, select a file and Options > Organise > New folder . You cannot create folders within folders. To copy or move files, select a file and Options > Organise > Move to folder , New fol der , Move to me mory card , Copy to mem ory card , Copy to phon e mem. , or Move to phone mem. . To download files into Gallery using the browser, select Downl. graphics , Downld. videos , or Downld. sounds . T he browser opens, and you can choose a bookmark or enter the address for the download site. To search for a file, select Options > Find . Write the item you are searching for. Files that match th e search are displayed. View images To open an image fo r viewing, select Options > Open . To open the next or previous image for viewing, scroll right or left. To enlarge the image on the disp lay, select Options > Zoom in . To reduce the image on the display, select Zoom out . To view the image in full screen size, select Options > Full screen . To return to normal view, select Options > Norm al screen . To rotate the image, select Options > Rotate . Select Right to rotate the image clockwise by 90 degrees, or select Left to rotate the image counterclockwise by 90 degrees. Manage image files To view detailed informat ion about the image, select Options > View details . To send the image, select Options > Se nd , and the me thod for sending. To rename the image, select Options > Rename . To set the image as th e display background, select O ptions > Use image > Set as wallpaper . To add the image to a contact, select Option s > Use image > Assign to contact . The Contacts application opens, and you can select the contact for the image. RealPlayer Select Menu > Media > RealPlayer . RealPlayer plays vi deo clips an d audio files that are stored in the device memory or on a memory card, transferred to your device from an e-mail messag e or a compatible computer, or streamed to your device over the web. Supported formats include MPEG-4, MP4 (not streaming), 3GP, RV, RA, AMR, and Midi. RealPlayer does not nece ssarily support all variations of a media file format. Play video clips and stream links To play a video clip or audio file, select Options > Open > Most recent clips to play one of the six clips you most é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 45
recently played, or Saved clip to play a clip or open a web link. Select Play . To play streaming media, select a web link th at points to a clip, and select Play ; or connect to the web, browse to a video clip or audio file, and select Play . RealPlayer recognises two kinds of links: an rtsp:// URL and an ht tp:// URL that points to a RAM file. Before the content begins s treaming, y our device must connect to a web site and buffer the content. If a network connection problem causes a playback error, RealPlayer attempts au tomatically to reconnect to the internet access point. To adjust the volume during playba ck, use the volume keys. To fast-forward during play back, scroll up and hold. To rewind during play, scroll down and hold. To stop the playback or streaming, select Stop . Buffering or connecting to the streaming site stops, the playback of the clip stops, and the clip rewinds to the begi nning. To download video clips from the web, select Options > Download videos . To view the video clip in full-screen size, select Option s > Play in full screen . Full screen increas es the size of the video to cover the maximum video area possible while the aspect ratio is maintained. Send audio files and video clips To transfer a media clip to a compatible device, select Options > Send . Select the sending method. To send a media clip in side a message, create a multimedi a message, select a clip to attach and Insert object > Video clip or Sound clip . View information about a media clip To view the properties of a video or sound clip, or web link, select Option s > Clip details . Information may include for example the bit rate or the inte rnet link of a streaming file. RealPlayer settings You may receive RealP layer sett ings in a message fro m your service provider. To define the settings manually, select Options > Settings > Vid eo or Streaming . Flash player Select Menu > Media > Flash Player . With Flash player, you can view, play, and int eract with flash files made for mobile devices. Manage flash files To optimise the use of Flash Pl ayer, insert a memory card in your device. To play a flash file, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 46
To send a flash file to co mpatible devices, select Options > Send . Copyright protection may prevent the sending of some flash files. To switch between flash files saved on your device memory or memory card, scroll to the corresponding tabs. To change the flash file quality, select Option s > Quality when you are playing the fla sh file. If you select High , the playback of some flash files ma y appear uneven and slow due to their original settings. Chan ge the quality setting of such files to Normal or Low for improved playback. To organise your flash files, select Op tions > Organise . Radio Select Menu > Media > Radio . The quality of the radio broa dcast depends on the coverage of the radio station in that particular area. The FM radio depends on an antenn a other than the wireless device antenna. At tach a compatible headset or enhancement to the device for th e FM radio to function properly. Listen to the radio To search for a station, s elect or . To set the frequency manually, select Options > Manual tuning . To view available stati ons based on location, select Options > Station directory (network service). To save the current station to your station list, select Options > Save station . To select a previously saved radio station, select or . To adjust the volu me, use t he volume keys . To switch from headset use to listeni ng to the radio through the loudspeaker, select Op tions > Activate loud speaker . To return to the home screen and leave the FM radio playing in the background, select Options > Play in background . View visual content To check availability a nd cost s, and to subscribe to the service, contact your service provider. Before you can view visual content, you mus t have an internet access point defined at Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points . 1. To view available visual content for a tuned station, select Options > Start visual service . If the visual radio service ID has not been saved for the station, enter it, or select Retrieve to s e a r c h f o r i t i n t h e station directory (network service). 2. Select the location nearest to y ou from the station directory. If your device finds a station that matches the tuned frequency, its visual service ID is displayed. To view the visual content, select OK . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 47
Saved stations To open the list of your s aved stations, select Options > Stations . To listen to a saved station, select Optio ns > Statio n > Listen . To view available visu al content for a sta tion with the Visual Radio service, select Option s > Station > Start visual service . To change the station details, select Options > Station > Edit . Radio settings Select Options > Settings and from the following: ⢠Start-up t one â Select whether a tone is played when the application is started. ⢠Auto-start se rvice â Select Ye s to have the Visual Radio service start automatically when you select a sa ved station that offers the Visual Radio service. ⢠Access point â Select the access point used for the data connection. You do not need an access p oint to use the application as an ordinary FM radio. Internet radio Select Menu > Media > Internet radio . Listen to internet radio stations Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. Continuous exposure to hi gh volume may damage y our hearing. Do not hold the device near your ea r when the loudspeaker is in use, becaus e the volume may be extremely loud. To listen to a radio station on the internet, select a station from the station directory , search stations by their name from the Nokia Internet Radi o service, or select Optio ns > Add station manually . When you have found the correct station, select Listen . To stop the playback, press th e scroll key. To resume the playback, press the scroll key again. To adjust the volu me, use t he volume keys . To view station information, select Op tions > Station information (not available if you h ave saved the stati on manually). If you are listening to a station saved in your favourites, scroll left or right to listen to the previou s or next saved station. Tip: You can browse for station links with the Web application. Comp atible links are automatically opened in the Internet radio application. Search for station s To search for radio stations in the Nokia Internet Radio service by their name, select Search . Enter a station name or the first letters of it in th e search field, and select Search . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 48
To listen to the station , select Listen . To save the station to your favourites, select Options > Add to Favourites . To make another search, select Optio ns > Search again . Save stations To view and listen to your favourit e stations, select Favourites . To add a station manually t o favourites, select Opt ions > Add statio n manuall y . Enter the web address of the station and a name that you want to ap pear in the favourites list. To add the currently playing stat ion to favourites, select Options > Add to Favourites . To view station information, to move a station up or down in the list, or to delete a station from the fa vourites, select Options > Station and the desired option. To view only stations beginning with p articular letters or numbers, start entering the ch aracters. M atching station s are displayed. Internet radio settings To select the default access point to connect to th e network, select Options > Settings > Default access point . Select Always ask if you want the device to ask for the access point every time you open the application. To change the connection speed for GPRS packet data connections, select Option s > Settings > GPRS connection bit rate . To change the connection speed for 3G packet data connections, select Option s > Settings > 3G connection bitrate . To change the connection spee d for WLAN connections, select Options > Settings > Wi-Fi connection bitrate . The quality of the radio broa dcast depends on the selected connection speed. The higher the speed, the better the quality. To avoid buffering, us e the highest quality only with high speed connections. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 49
Internet With yo ur new E series device you can browse both the internet and your co mpany's in tranet, and downloa d and install new applications to your device. You can also use your device as a modem and connect your PC to the internet . Web Select Menu > Web . To browse the web (network se rvice), you need to configure the internet access point settings. If you are using a data call or GPRS connection, your wire less network must support data calls or GPRS, and the data serv ice must be activated for your SIM card. Tip: You may receive the internet access point settings from your service provider as a special text message or from the service provider's web pages. You can also enter the internet access point settings manually. See "Internet access points" , p. 52 . Check the availability of servic es, pricing, and fees with your service provider. Service providers also give you instructions on how to use their services. Connection security If the security indicator ( ) is displayed during a connection, the data transmission between the device and the internet gateway or server is encrypted. The security icon does not indicate that the data transmission between th e gateway and the content server (or place where the requested resource is stored) is secure. Th e service provider secures the data transmission between the gateway and the content server. Security certificates may be re quired for some services, such as banking services. You are noti fied if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your device. For more information, contact your service provider. Browse the web To browse the web, select a bookmark or enter the web address manually , and select Go to . Use only services that you trust and that offer adequate se curity an d protection against harmful software. Tip: When you start to enter the address, the addresses of the pages you have previously visited that match your input are displayed. To open a page, scroll to its address, and pre ss the scroll key. To move on a web page, use the scroll key, which is shown as a pointer on the page. When y ou move the pointer over a link, the pointer changes in to a hand. Press the scroll key to open the link. On a web page, new links usually appear é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 50
underlined in blue and previou sly visited links in purple. Images that act as links ha ve a blue border around them. The addresse s of the pages you visit are saved in the Aut o. bookmarks folder. Bookmarks To access the bookmarks view whi le browsing, select Options > Bookmarks . To view a bookmarked web page, select the bookmark. To browse to another web page, select Options > Go to we b address , enter the web address, and select Go to . To add a bookmark while browsing, select Options > Save as bookmark . To organise your bookmarks, in the bookmarks view, select Options > Bookmark manager . You can move and edit bookmarks, and create new folders. Clear the cache A cache is a memory location tha t is used to store data temporarily. If you have tried to access or have accessed confidential information re quiring passwords, empty the cache after each use. The info rmation or services you have accessed are stored in the cache. To empty the cache, select Opti ons > Clear privacy data > Clear cache . Feeds and bl ogs Select Menu > Web > Web feeds . Feeds usually contain headlines and articles, often about recent news or other topics. Blog is a short ening of weblog, which is a continuously updated web diary. To download a feed or blog, scroll to it, and p ress the scroll key. To add or edit a feed or blog, select Options > Manag e feed > New fe ed or Edit . End a connection To end the connection and vi ew the browser page offline, select Option s > Tools > Disconnect . To end th e connection and close the browser, select Options > Exit . Web settings Select Menu > Web > Optio ns > Settings . The web settings are divided into four groups: ⢠General contains access point, home page, an d browsing security setting s. ⢠Page contains imaging, audio, and pop-up settings. ⢠Privacy contains settings related to your privacy. ⢠Web feeds con tains settings related to web feeds and blogs. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 51
Browse the intranet Select Menu > Office > Intra net . To browse your company's i ntranet, you must create a company-specific VPN policy. Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > VP N . To connect to the intranet, op en the Intranet appli cation, select the connection method a nd Options > Connect . To define which VPN profile to use in the connection, select Options > Use other VPN poli cy . To define the settings for th e intranet connection, select Options > Settings . Internet access points An internet access point is a collection of settings, which define how the device creates a data connection t o the network. To use e-mail and mult imedia services or to browse web pages, you must first defi ne access points for these services. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to create, edit, or remove them. Set up an internet access point for packet data (GPRS) 1. Select Menu > To ols > Se ttings > Connection > Access points . 2. Select Options > New access point to create a new access point, or select an ex isting access point from the list and then Optio ns > Duplicate access point to use the access point as a basis for th e new one. 3. Define the following settings. ⢠Connection name â Enter a descript ive name for the connection. ⢠Data bearer â Select Packet da ta . ⢠Access point name â Enter the nam e for the access point. The name is usually provided by your service provider. ⢠User name â E nt er y o ur u s er n am e if r eq u ir e d b y th e service provider. User names are often case-sensitive and provided by your service provider. ⢠Prompt password â Select Yes to enter your p a s s w o r d e a c h t i m e y o u l o g i n t o a s e r v e r o r No to save the password in your device memory a nd automate the login. ⢠Password â Enter your password if required by the service provider. The password is often case-sensitive and provided by the service provider. ⢠Authenticat ion â Select Secure to send your password always encrypted, or Normal to send your password encryp ted when possible. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 52
⢠Homepage â Enter the web address of the page you want to display as the home page when you use this access point. 4. After defining the s ettings, select Options > Advanced settings to define the advanced set tings or Back to sa ve the settings and exit. Advanced internet access point settings for packet data (GPRS) Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points . After setting up a basic internet access point for packet data (GPRS), select Options > Advanced settings , and define the following advanced settings: ⢠Network t ype â Select IPv4 or IPv6 as the internet protocol type. The internet protocol defines how data is transferred to and from your device. ⢠Phone IP addres s â Enter the IP address of your device. Select Auto matic to have the network pro vide the device IP address. This se tting is shown only if you select Network t ype > IPv4 . ⢠DNS address â Select Primary DNS address and Secondary DNS address and enter their IP addresse s, if required by your service provider. Otherwise, the name server addresses are pr ovided automatically. ⢠Proxy server addres s â Enter the address of the proxy server. Proxy servers are intermediate servers used by some service providers between a browsing service and its users. These servers may provide additional security and speed up access to the service. Set up an access point for WLAN manually 1. Select Menu > To ols > Se ttings > Connection > Access points . 2. Select Options > New access point to create a new access point, or select an ex isting access point from the list and then Optio ns > Duplicate access point to use the access point as a basis for th e new one. 3. Define the following settings. ⢠Connection name â Enter a descriptive name for the connection. ⢠Data bearer â Select Wireless LAN . ⢠WLAN network nam e â To enter the service set identifier (SSID), that is, the name that identifies the specific WLAN, select Enter manually . To s elect the network from the WLANs in range, select Search for networks . ⢠Network status â Sel ect Hidden if the network you are connecting to is hidden or Publi c if it is not hi dden. ⢠WLAN network mode â If you select Infrastructure , devices can commu nicate with each other and with wired LA N devices through a WLAN access point. If you sele ct Ad-hoc , devices can send and receive data directly with each other, and no WLAN access point is needed. ⢠WLAN security mode â You mus t select the same security mode that is used in the WLAN access point. If you select WEP (wired equivalent privacy), 802.1x, or WPA/WPA2 (W i-Fi protected access), you must also configure the relevant additional settings. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 53
⢠WLAN security se ttings â Edit the security settings for the selected security mode. ⢠Homepage â Enter the web a ddress of the pa ge you want to display as the home page when you use this access point. To set up a WLAN access p oint automatically, use the WLAN wizard. Select Menu > Connectivi ty > WLAN wiz. . Advanced access point settings for WLAN Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points . After setting up a basic access point for WLAN, select Options > Advanced setting s , and define the following advanced settings : ⢠IPv4 settings â Enter the device IP and name server addresses for the IPv4 internet protocol. ⢠IPv6 setti ngs â Select or enter the name server addresses for the IPv6 internet protocol. ⢠Ad-hoc channel â The channel is usually chosen automatically. To enter the chann el number (1-11) manually, select User defined . ⢠Proxy server addres s â Enter the proxy server address. ⢠Proxy port numb er â Enter the proxy server port number. Connect PC to web You can use yo ur device to connect your PC to the web. 1. Connect the data cable to the USB connectors of your device and your PC. 2. Select Connect PC t o web . The necessary software is automatically installed from your device to the PC. 3. Accept the installation in your PC. Accept also the connection, if prompted. When the connection to the web is established, the web br owser of your PC opens. You must have administ rator rights to your PC, and t he autorun option en abled in the PC. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 54
Messaging Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging . In Messaging (network service), you can send and receive text messages, mult imedia messages , audio messages, and e - mail messages. You can als o receive web service m essages, cell broadcast messages, and special messa ges containing data, and send serv ice commands. Before sending or receiving messages, you m ay need to do the following: ⢠Insert a valid SIM card in the device and be located in the service area of a cellular network. ⢠Verify that the network supports the messaging feat ures you want to use and that they are activated on your SIM card. ⢠Define the internet access point settings on the device. See "Internet access points" , p. 52 . ⢠Define the e-mail account settin gs on the device. See "E- mail account settings" , p. 70 . ⢠Define the text message setting s on the device. See "Text message setting s" , p. 69 . ⢠Define the multimedia message sett ings on the device. See "Multimedia messa ge settings" , p. 69 . The device may recognise the SIM card provider and automatically configure some of the message settings. If not, you may need to define the settin gs manually; or contact your service provider to configure the settings. Messaging folders Messages and data receive d usin g Bluetooth connectivity or infrared are stored in the Inbox folder. E-mail messages are stored in Mailbox . Messages that you have been writing can be stored in the Drafts folder. Messages that are waiti ng to be sent are stored in the Outbox folder, and messages that have been sent, excluding Bluetooth and infr ared messages, are stored in the Sent folder. Tip: Messages are placed in Outbox, for example, when your device is outside ne twork coverage. You can also schedule e-mail messages to be sent the nex t time you connect to your remote mailbox. Note: The message sent icon or text on your device screen does not indicate that the message is received at the intended destination . To request the network to send you a delivery report of the text message s and multimedia messa ges you have s ent (network service), select Options > Settin gs > Text message or Multimedia message > Receive report . The reports are saved in the Reports fold er. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 55
Organise messages To create a new folder to or ganise your me ssages, select My folders > Options > New folder . To rename a folder, select Options > Rename folder . You can only rename folders that you have created. To move a message to anoth e r folder, select the message, Options > Move to folder , the folder, and OK . To sort messages in a specific order, select Optio ns > Sort by . You can sort the message s by Date , Sender , Subject , or Message type . To view the properties of a me ssage, select the message and Options > Message details . Message reader The message reader reads received text and multimedia messages al oud. To play a mess age, press and h o ld the left selection key when you receive a message. To start reading the next messa ge in Inbox, scroll down. To start reading the m essage again, scroll up. I n the beginning of the message, scroll up t o hear the previous m essage. To pause the reading, press th e left selection key briefly. To continue, press the left selection key briefly again. To end the reading, press the end key. Speech Select Menu > Tools > Speech . With Speech, you can set the langu age, voice, and voice properties for the message reader. Edit the voice properties To set the language for the messa ge reader, select Langua ge . To download additional languages to your device, visit the Nokia web site. To set the speaking voice, select Voice . The voice is language- dependent. To set the speaking rate, select Voice settings > Speed . To set the speaking volume, select Voice settings > Volume . To listen to a voice, open the voice tab, select the voice, and select Option s > Play voice . E-mail messages Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Mailbox . To receive and send e-mail, y ou must have a remote m ailbox service. This service may be o ffered by an internet service provider, a network service provider, or your company. Your device is compliant with in ternet standards SMTP, IMAP4 (revision 1), and POP3, and with different vendor-specific e- mail solutions. Other e-mail pr oviders may offer services with é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 56
different settings or features than those described in this us er guide. For more details, contact your service provider or e- mail service provider. You may be able to install the following e-mails to your device: ⢠Regular POP or IMAP e-mail. You need to con nect to the mailbox, and download the e-mails to your device befor e you can read them. ⢠Nokia Messaging. N okia Messaging is used with different internet e-mail providers, such has Google e-mail services. Nokia Messaging pushes the ne w e-mails t o your d evice as long as the Nokia Messag ing application is open. ⢠Mail fo r Exchan ge. Mail for Ex change is usually used for accessing work e-mails. Your company's IT department may have further instructions on how to install and use Mail for Exchange with your company's e-mail servers. Other e-mail solution s may be available. If you have defined several ma ilboxes, for example a POP or I M A P e - m a i l a n d M a i l f o r E x c h a n g e , s e l e c t o n e o f t h e m a s y o u r default mailbox. That mailbox is used every time you start composing a new e-mail messa ge. To define the default mailbox in Messaging, select Options > Settings > E-mail > Default mailbox and the mailbox. E-mail in home screen To select the mailbox that is shown in the home screen, select Menu > Tools > Settin gs > General > Personalisation > Home screen > Mode settings > Home screen applications > E-mail 1 notifi cation > Mailbox and the e-mail account. To check that th e mailbox that yo u selected can be shown in the home screen, select Menu > Tools > Settin gs > General > Personalisation > Home screen > Mod e settings > Home screen applications > Enabled applications and E-mail 1 notifi cation or E-mail 2 notification . Nokia Messaging The Nokia Messagin g service automatically pushes e-mail from your existing e-mail address to your Nokia E66. You can read, respond to, and organise your e-mails on the go. The Nokia Messaging service works wi th a number of internet e- mail providers that are often used for personal e-mail, such as Google e-mail services. The Nokia Messagin g service may be char geable. For information on possible costs, contact your service provider or the Nokia Messaging service. The Nokia Messaging service must be supporte d by your network and m ay not be av ailab le in all regions. Install the Nokia messaging applic ation 1. Select Menu > Noki a E-mail > New . 2. Read the information on the display, and select Start . 3. Select Connect to allow your device to ac cess the network. 4. Enter your e-mail address an d password. The Nokia Messagin g service can run on your device even if you have installed other e-mail applications, such as Mail for Exchange. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 57
Mail for Exchange With Mail for Exchange, you ca n receive your work e-mail to your devi ce. You can read and re ply to your e-mails, view and edit compatible attachments , view calendar information, receive and reply to meeting requests, schedule meetings, and view, add, and ed it contact inform ation. ActiveSync Use of the Mail for Exchange is limited to over-the-air synchronisation of PIM info rmation between the Nokia device and the authorised Microsoft Exchange server. Mail for Exchange can be set up only if your company has Microsoft Exchange Server. In additi on, your company's IT administrator must have activa ted Mail for Exchange for your account. Before starting to set up Mail for Exchange, ensure that y ou have the following: ⢠A corporate e-mail ID ⢠Your office network user nam e ⢠Your office network password ⢠Your network domain name (contact your company's IT departm ent) ⢠Your Mail for Exchange server name (contact your company's IT dep artment) Depending on your company's Mail for Exchange server configuration, you may need to enter other information in addition to those listed. If you do not know the correct information, contact your company's IT department. With Mail for Excha nge, the use of th e lock code may be m a n d a t o r y . T h e d e f a u l t l o c k c o d e o f y o u r d e v i c e i s 1 2 3 4 5 , b u t your company's IT administrator may ha ve set a different one for you to use. You can access and modify the Mail for Exch ange profile and settings in the Messaging setti ngs. Regular POP or IMAP e-mail Your device can download e-ma ils from a POP or IMAP e-mail account. POP3 is a version of the post office protocol that is used to store and retrieve e-mail or in ternet mail messages from a server. IMAP4 is a version of the internet me ssage access protocol that lets you access and mana ge e-mail messages while the messages are still on the e-mail server. You can then choose which messages to download to y our device. Set up POP or IMAP e-mail 1. Go to the home screen, scro ll to the e-mail wizard, and press the scroll key. 2. Select Start e-mail setup . 3. Read the information on the display, and select Start . 4. Select Yes to allow your device to access the ne twork. 5. Enter your e-mail address an d password. 6. Read the information on the display, and select OK to finalise e-mail setup. The na me of your new mailbox replaces Mailbox in the Messaging main v iew. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 58
Tip: Af ter you have set up a POP or I MAP e-mail, in the Messaging mai n view, sele ct Optio ns > Settings > E-mail and the mailbox to edit the setting s, for example a possible signature, or the name of your mailbox. Connect to a remote mailbox E-mail addressed to you is not automa tically received by yo ur device, but by your remote mailbox. To read your e-mail, you must first connect to the remote mailbox; then select the e- mail messages you wish to retrieve into your device. 1. To retrieve received e-mail messages to your device and view them, select your ma ilbox in the Messaging main view. When the device asks Connect to mailbox? , select Yes . 2. Enter your user name and password, if prompted. 3. Select Option s > Retrieve e-mail > New to retrieve new messages that you have neither read nor retrieved, Selected to retrieve only messages you select from the remote mailb ox, or All to retrieve all messages not previously retrieved. 4. To manage your e-mail offline to save in co nnection costs and work in conditions th at do not allow a dat a connection, select Options > Disconnect to discon nect from the remote mailbox. Any changes you ma ke in the remote mailbox folders while offline, take effect in your remote mailbox the next time you go online and synchronise. Read and reply to e-mail Important: Exercise caution wh en opening messages. Messages may contain ma licious software or othe rwise be harmful to your device or PC. To read a received e-mail, open it from the mailbox. To open an attachment, select Option s > Attachments . Scroll to the attachment, and press the scroll key. To reply only to the sender of an e-mail, select Opt ions > Reply > To se nder . To reply to all recipients of an e-mail, select Options > Reply > To all . Tip: If you reply to an e-mail that con tains attached files, the attachments are not included in the rep ly. If you forward the received e-mai l, the attachments are included. To forward an e-ma il, select Options > Forward . To attach a file to an e-mail messa ge, select Optio ns > Insert and the attachment you want to add. To delete an attachment from an e-mail that you are sending , select the attachment and Opti ons > Remove . To set the message priority, select Options > Sending options > Priority . To set the sending time for th e e-mail message, select Options > Sending optio ns > Send message . Select Immediately , or select When conn. avail. if yo u are working offline. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 59
To call the sender of the e-mail message, if the sender can be found in Contacts, select Options > Call . To reply to the sender of th e e-mai l with an audio message or multimedia message, select Opti ons > Create message . Write and send e-mail 1. To write an e-mail, select New message > E-mail . 2. Select Options > Add recipient to select the recipients' e-mail addresses from Cont acts, or enter the e-mail addresses in the To field. Use a semicolon to separate entries. Use the Cc field to send a copy to other recipient s, or the Bcc field t o send a bl ind cop y to reci pient s. 3. In the Subject field, enter the subject o f the e-mail. 4. Enter your e-mail message in the text area, and select Options > Send . Delete messages To free up memory space on your device, regularly delete messages from th e Inbox and Sent folders, and delete retrieved e-mail messages. To delete e-mail from the device only, and keep the original on the server, select Options > Delete > Phone (h eader remains) . To delete e-mail both from th e device and the remote server, select Options > Delete > Phone and server . To cancel the deleting, select Options > Restore . Subfolders in your remote e-mail If you create subfolders in yo ur IMAP4 mailboxes on a remote server, you can view and manage these folders with your device when you subscribe to them. You can only subscribe to folders in your IMAP4 mailboxes. To view folders in your IMAP4 mailbox, establish a connection, and select Opti ons > E-mail settings > Retrieval se ttings > Fold er subscriptions . To view a remote folder, select a folder and Options > Subscribe . Every time you go online, the subscribed folders are updated. This may take some time if the folders are large. To update the list of fold ers, select a folder and Options > Update fo lder list . Text messages Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging . Write and send text messages Your device supports text messag es beyond the limit for a single message. Longer messag es are sent as two or more messages. Your service provid er may charge accordingly. Characters with accent s, ot her marks, or some languag e options take more spa ce, and limit the number of ch aracters that can be sent in a single message. 1. To write a tex t message, select Ne w message > Text message . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 60
2. In the To field, enter a recipien t's number, or press the scroll key to add a recipient from Conta cts. If you enter more than on e number, sepa rate the numbers with a semicolon. 3. Enter the text of the message. To use a templa te, select Options > Insert > Template . 4. Select Option s > Send . Sending options for text messages To select a message ce ntre to send the message, select Options > Sending option s > Message centre in use . To have the network send you delivery reports on your messages (ne twork service), se lect Options > Sending options > Receive report > Yes . To define how long the me ssage centre resends your message (network service) if the first attempt fails , select Options > Sending option s > Message validity . If the recipient cannot be reached wi thin the validity period, the message is delet ed from the message centre. To convert the message t o another format, select Op tions > Sending o ptions > M essage sent as > Text , Fax , Paging , or E-mail . Change this option only if you are sure that your message centre is able to convert text messages into these other form ats. Contact y our service provider. Text messages on the SIM card Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > SIM messages . Text messages may be stored on your SIM card. Before you can view SIM messages, you must copy the messages to a folder in the device. After copying the messages to a folder, you can view them in the folder or delete them from the SIM card. 1. Select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark or Mark all to mark every message. 2. Select Options > Copy . 3. Select a folder and OK to begin copying. To view SIM card messages, open the fo lder where you copied the messages, and open a message. View picture messages The appearance of a pictu re message may vary depen ding on the receiving device. To view a picture message, op en the message from the Inbox folder. To view information about the picture message, select Options > Message details . To save a message in a different folder, select Optio ns > Move to folder . To add the sender of the message to Contac ts, select Options > Save to Contacts . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 61
Forward picture messages 1. To forward the message, open the message from the Inbox folder and select Options > Forward . 2. In the To field, enter a recipien t's number, or press the scroll key to add a recipient from Conta cts. If you enter more than on e number, sepa rate the numbers with a semicolon. 3. Enter the text of your messa ge. To use a template, select Options > Insert > Template . 4. Select Option s > Send . Multimedia messages Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging . Only devices that have compat ible features can receive and display multimedia m essages. The ap pearance of a message may vary depending on the receivi ng device. A multimedia message (MMS) ca n contain text and objects such as images, sound clips, or video clips. Before you can send or receive multimedia messages on your de vice, you must define the multimedia message settings. Your devi ce may have recognised the SIM ca rd provider and automatically configured the multimedia message settings. If not, use Settings wizard, or contact yo ur service provider for the correct settings. See "Multimedia message settings" , p. 69 . Create and send multimedia messages Important: Exercise caution wh en opening messages. Messages may contain ma licious software or othe rwise be harmful to your device or PC. 1. To create a new message, select New messa ge > Multimedia me ssage . 2. In the To field, enter a recipient's number or e-mail address, or press the scr oll key to add a recipient from Contacts. If y ou enter mor e than one num ber or e-mail address, separ ate them with a semicolon. 3. In the Subject field, enter a subject for the message. To change the fields that are visible, select Options > Address fields . 4. Enter the text of the message, an d select Options > Insert object to add media objects. You can add objects such as Image , Sound clip , or Video clip . The wireless ne twork may limit th e size of MMS me ssages. If the inserted picture exceed s this limit, the device may make it smaller so that it can be sent by MMS. 5. Each slide of your message can contain only one video or sound clip. To add more slides to your message, select Options > Insert n ew > Slide . To change the order of slides in your message , select Opti ons > Move . 6. To preview a multimedia message before sending it , select Optio ns > Preview . 7. Select Options > Send . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 62
To delete an obj ect from a multimedia message, select Options > Remove . To set the sending options for the current multimedia message, s elect Opti ons > Sending options . Receive and reply to multimedia messages Important: Exercise caution wh en opening messages. Messages may contain maliciou s software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. Tip: If you receive multimedia messages that contain objects unsupported by your device, you cannot open them. Try to send these objects to another device such as a computer, and open them there. 1. To reply to a multimedia mess age, open the message, and select Options > Reply . 2. Select Options and To sender to reply to th e sender with a multimedia message, Via text message to reply wit h a text messag e, Via audio message to reply with a n audio message, or Via e-mail to reply with an e-mail message. 3. Enter the text of the message, and select Op tions > Send . Create pres entations Creating multimedia presentations is not possible if the MMS creation mode setting is s et to Restricted . To change the setting, sele ct Messaging > Options > Settings > Multimedia message > MMS creati on mode > Free . 1. To create a presentation, select New message > Multimedia me ssage . 2. In the To field, enter a recipient's number or e-mail address, or press the scr oll key to add a recipient from Contacts. If y ou enter mor e than one num ber or e-mail address, separ ate them with a semicolon. 3. Select Options > Create present ation and a presentation template. A templa te may define which media objects you can include in the presentation, where they appear, and which e ffects are displayed between images and slides. 4. Scroll to the text area and enter the text. 5. To insert images, sound, video, or notes in your presentation, scroll to the co rresponding object area, and select Optio ns > Insert . 6. To add slides, select Insert > New slide . To select the background colo ur for the presentation and background images for di fferent slides, select Options > Background settings . To set effects between images or slides, select Options > Effect settings . To preview the presentation, select Options > Preview . Multimedia presentations may on ly be viewed in compatible devices that support prese ntations. They may a ppear different in different devices. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 63
View presentations To view a presentation, open the multimedia message from the Inbox folder. Scroll to the presentation, and press the scroll key. To pause the presentation, press either selection key. To resume playing the prese ntation, select Opt ions > Continue . If the text or images are too la rge to fit on the display, select Options > Activate scro lling , and scr oll to see the entire presentation. To find phone numbers and e-ma il or web addresses in the presentation, select Options > Find . You ma y use these numbers and addres ses to make calls, send mess ages, or create bookmarks, for example. View and save multimedia attachments To view multimedia messages as complete presentations, open the message, and select Options > Pl ay presentation . Tip: To view or play a multimedia object in a multimedia message, select View image , Play sound clip , or Play vide o clip . To view the name and size of an at tachment, open the message, a nd select Options > Objects . To save a multimedia object, select Optio ns > Objects , the object, and Options > Save . Forward a multimedia message Open Inbox, scroll to a multimed ia notification, and press the scroll key. To send the message to a compat ible device without r etrieving it t o your device, select Opti ons > Forward . If the server does not support multimedia message forwarding, this option is not available. 1. In the To field, enter a recipient's number or e-mail address, or press the scr oll key to add a recipient from Contacts. If y ou enter mor e than one num ber or e-mail address, separ ate them with a semicolon. 2. Edit the message, if desired, and select Options > Send . Tip: To edit the delivery settings of the message, select Options > Sending options . Send a sound clip 1. To compose an au dio messa ge, select New message > Audio message . 2. In the To field, enter a recipient's number or e-mail address, or press the scr oll key to add a recipient from Contacts. If y ou enter mor e than one num ber or e-mail address, separ ate them with a semicolon. 3. Select Options > Insert sound clip , and select whether to record a sound clip or select one from Gallery. 4. Select Options > Send . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 64
Sending options for multimedia messages Select New message > Multimedia message > Options > Sending option s and from the following options: ⢠Receive report â Select Yes if you want to receive a notification when the me ssage has been successfully delivered to the recipient. Receiving a delivery report of a multimedia message that has been sent to an e-mail address may not be possible. ⢠Message validity â Select how long the messaging centre tries to send the mess age. If the recipient of a message cannot be reached with in the validity period, the message is removed from the multimedia messaging centre. The net work must support this feature. Maximum time is the maximu m amount of time allowed by th e network. ⢠Priority â Set th e sending priority t o High , Normal , or Low . Instant messaging Select Menu > Communic. > IM . Instant messa ging (IM) (netwo rk service) allows you to converse with other people using instant messages and join discussion forums (IM groups) with specific topics. Various service providers maintain IM servers that you can log in to after you register to an IM service. Service providers may differ in their support of features. If IM is not available from your service provider, it may not appear in the menu of your device. Contact your service provider for more information about signing up for IM services and cost s of services . For more information on IM settings, contact your service provider. You may receive the settings in a special text message from the service provider that offers the IM service. If not, enter the settings manually. Other instant messaging solution s, such as WindowsLive and Yahoo, may be available in Download. Define IM settings To define the IM application settings, select Opti ons > Settings > Pre ferences . You can, for example, set your screen name and IM alert tones . To converse with an IM user or users, and to view and edit your IM contacts, you must log into an instant messagin g server. To add an IM server, select Options > Settings > Servers . For the correct settings, contact your service provider. To set the server as the one to which your device automatically lo gs in, select Options > Settings > Default server . To define how your device connects to the IM server, select Options > Settings > IM login typ e . To establish a connection between your device and the default server automatically, select Automati c . To automate the connection only when in your home network, select Auto in home netw. To connect to the se rv er when you open the IM application, select On app. start-up . To connect to the server manually, select Manual and log into the server in the IM é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 65
main view by selecting Opt ions > Log in . Enter your user ID and password at the prompt. You can obtain t he user name, password, and other se ttings to log i n from your service provider when you register for the service. Start a conversation Open Conver sations . To search for IM users and user IDs, select IM contacts > Options > New IM contact > Search . You can search by User's name , User ID , Phone number , and E-mail address . To view a conversation, select a participant. To continue the conversa tion, enter your message, and select Options > Send . To return to the conversations list without closing the conversation, select Back . To close the conversation, select Options > End conversation . To start a new conv ersation, select Options > Ne w conversation . You can start a new convers ation with a contact while you are in side an active conversation. However, you cannot have two acti ve conversatio ns with the sa me contact. To insert an image to an ins tant message, select Options > Send image , and se lect the image you w ant to send. To save a conversation p articipant to your IM contacts, select Options > Add to IM contacts . To save a conversation, while in the conversation vi ew, select Options > Record chat . The conversation is saved as a text file that can be opened and vi ewed in the Notes application. IM groups Open IM groups . IM gro ups is available only if you are logged into an IM server, and the server supports IM groups. To create an IM group, select Options > Create new group . To join an IM group or to continue a group conversation, scroll to the group, and press the scroll key. Enter a message, and select Option s > Send . To join an IM group that is no t on the list, but for which you know the group ID, select Opti ons > Join new group . To leave the IM group, select Options > Leave IM group . To search for IM groups and group IDs, select IM groups > Options > Search . You can search by Group name , Topic , and Members (user ID) . To add an IM user to the group, select Options > Add member . Select a user from your IM contacts or enter the contact ID. To remove a member from the IM group, select Options > Remove . To provide members with editin g rights to th e group, select Options > Add editor . Se lect a user from your IM contacts or enter the ID of the user. IM users with editing rights can edit group settings and invite other users to join the group or ban them from the group. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 66
To remove editing rights from a group member, select Options > Remove . To prevent IM users from joining the group, select Optio ns > Add to banned list . Select a user from your IM contacts or enter the ID of the user. To allow a banned user to join the group , select Opti ons > Remove . Block users Select IM contact s > Optio ns > Blocking opti ons > View blocked list . To find a blocked IM user, enter the first letters of the user's name. Matc hing names a ppear in a lis t. To allow receiving messages fr om a blocked IM user, select Options > Unblock . To prevent receiving messages from other IM users, select Options > Block new contacts . Select the IM user from your IM contacts, or enter the user ID. IM application settings Select Options > Settings > Preferences and define the following settings: ⢠Use scre en name â Change the name th at identifies you in IM groups. ⢠Show my availability â Show your online status to all other IM users or your IM contacts only, or hide y our online status. ⢠Allow messages from â Select to receive instant m e s s a g e s f r o m a l l o t h e r I M u s e r s , y o u r I M c o n t a c t s o n l y , o r not to receive messages at all. ⢠Allow invi tations from â Select to receive invitations to IM groups from all IM users, your IM contacts only, or not to receive invitations at all. ⢠Msg. scrolling speed â To adjust the speed at which new messages are d isplayed, scroll left or right. ⢠Sort IM contacts â List your IM contacts alphabetically or by their online status. ⢠Availability reloading â T o u pd ate th e o nli ne st at us of your IM contacts automa tically, select Automatic . ⢠Offline contacts â Select if IM contacts with an offline status are shown in t he IM contacts list. ⢠Own message colour â Select the colour o f the instant messages y ou send. ⢠Received msg colour â Select the colour of the instant messages you receive. ⢠Show date / time i nfo â View the receiving or sending time of each messag e in an IM conversation. ⢠IM alert tone â Select the tone that is played when you receive a new instant message. Special message types Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging . You can receive special messages that contain data, such as operator logos, ringing tones, bookmarks, or internet access or e-mail account settings. To save the contents of these messages, select Options > Save . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 67
Service messages Service messages are sent to your device by service providers. Service messages may contai n notifications such as news headlines, services, o r links throug h which the message content can be downloaded. To define the service message sett ings, select Options > Settings > Servic e message . To download th e service or mess age content, select Options > Download message . To view information about the sender, web address, expiration date, and other de tails of the mes sage before downloading it, select Options > Message details . Send service commands You can send a service reque st message (also known a s a USSD command) to your service provid er and request activation for certain network services. Contact your service provider for the service request text. To send a service reques t message, select Options > Service command . Enter the service request text and select Options > Send . Cell broadcast Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Cell broadcast . With the cell broadcast network service, you can receiv e messages on various topics fr om your service provider, such as weather or traffic conditions in a particular region. For available topics and relevant topic numbers, contact your service provider. Cell broadcas t messages cannot be received when the device is in the remote SIM mode. A packet data (GPRS) connection ma y prevent cell broadcast reception. Cell broadcast messages cannot be received in UMTS (3G) networks. To receive cell broadc ast messages, you may need to set the cell broadcast reception on. Select Options > Settings > Reception > On . To view messages related t o a topic, select the topic. To receive messages related to a topic, select Options > Subscribe . Tip: You can set important topics as hot topics. While the device is in the standby mode, you are notified when you receive a message related to a hot topic. Select a topic, and select Options > Hotmark . To add, edit, or delete topics, select Options > Topic . Messaging settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings . Fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or with a red asterisk. Your device may recognise the SIM card provider and configure the correct text message, multimedia message, é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 68
and GPRS settings automa tically. If not, contact you r service provider for the correct settings, order the settings from your service provider in a configuration message, or use the Settings wizard a pplication. Text message settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > Text message . Select from the following: ⢠Message centres â View the available message centres for your device, or create a new one. ⢠Message centre in use â Select a messag e centre to send the message. ⢠Character encoding â Select Red uced support to use automatic character conv ersion to another encoding system when available. ⢠Receive report â Selec t Yes if you want the network to send you delivery reports on your messages (net work service). ⢠Message validity â Sele ct how long the message centre resends yo ur message if th e first attemp t fails (networ k service). If the recipient ca nnot be reached within the validity period, the message is deleted from the message centre . ⢠Message sent as â Convert the message to anot her format, suc h as Text , Fax , Pa ging , or E-mai l . Change th is option only if you are sure th at your messag e centre is able to convert text messages into these other formats. Contact your service provider. ⢠Preferre d connect ion â Select the preferred method of connection when sending text messages from your device. ⢠Reply via same centre â S elect whethe r you want the reply message to be sent using the same text message centre number (net work service). Multimedia message settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > Multime dia message . Select from the following: ⢠Image size â Select Sm all or Large to scale images in multimedia messages. Select Original to maintain the original image size. ⢠MMS creation mode â Select Restricted to have your device prevent you from including content in multimedia messages that may not be supported by the network or the receiving device. To receive warnings about including such content, select Guided . To create a multimedia message with no restrictions on attachment typ e, select Free . If you select Re stricted , creating m ultimedia presentations is not possible. ⢠Access point in use â Select the default access point to connect to the multimedia messa ge centre. You may not be able to change the default ac cess point if it is preset in your device by your service provider. ⢠Multimed ia retrieval â S elect Always autom atic to receive multimedia messages always automatically , Auto in home netw. to receive notification of a new multimedia message that you can retrieve from the message centre (for exampl e, when you are travelling abroad and are outside your home network), Manual to retrieve multimed ia messages from the me ssage centre é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 69
manually, or Off to prevent r eceipt of any mult imedia messages. ⢠Allow anon. msgs. â Select whether you want to receive messages from unknow n senders. ⢠Receive adverts â Select whether you want to receive messages defined as advertisements. ⢠Recei ve repo rt â Select Yes to have the status of the sent message to be shown in the log (network service). Receiving a delivery report of a multimedia mess age that has been sent to an e-mail address may not be possible. ⢠Deny report sending â Select Yes to not send delivery reports from your device for received multimedia messages. ⢠Message validity â Select how long the messaging centre tries to send the mess age (network service). If the recipient of a message cann ot be reached within the validity period, the message is removed from the multimedia messaging centre. Maximum time is the maximum amount of time allowed by the network. E-mail account settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > E-mail . If you try to edit mailbox setti ngs but have not set up an e- mail account, the mailbox gu ide opens and helps you set up your e-mail ac count. If you have defined a mailbox, scroll to it, and press the scroll key to edit the settings. The settings available for ed iting may vary. Some settings may be preset by your service provider. Connection settings To define the connection setting s, se lect an e-mail account and Options > Edit > Connection se ttings . To edit the settings for the e-mail you receive, select Incoming e-mail . To edit the settings for the e-mail you send, select Outgoing e-mail . User settings To define the user settings for an e-mail account, select the account, select Options > Edit > User settings , and define the following settings: ⢠My name â Enter a name to appear before your e-mail address when you send e-mail. ⢠Reply-to â Select whether you want replies to be redirected to a different address. Select On , and enter the e-mail address to which you want to direct the replies. You can only enter one address to which replies are directed. ⢠Delete e-mails from â Select whether you wa nt to delete the e-mail messages on ly from the device or from both the device and the server. Select Always ask if you want to confirm from where the e-mail should be deleted every time you delete an e-mail. ⢠Send message â Select to send the e-mail imme diately or when a connection is available. ⢠Send copy to self â Select whether you want to sa ve a copy of the e-mail to your remote mailbox and t o the address defined in My e-mail address in the Outgoing e- mail settings. ⢠Include sign ature â Select whether you want to attach a signature to your e-mail messages. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 70
⢠New e-mail alerts â Select whether you want to be notified of a new received e-mail messa ge with a tone and a note. Retrieval settings To define the retrieva l setting s, select the e-mail account, select Op tions > Edit > Retrieval sett ings , and define the following settings: ⢠E-mail to retrieve â Select whether you want to retrieve only the e-mail header inform ation such as sender, subject and date, e-mail, or e-mail wi th atta chments. This setting is for POP3 mailboxes only. ⢠Retrieval amount â Select the number of e-mail messages you want to retrieve from the remote server to your mailbox. ⢠IMAP4 folder p ath â Define the folder path for folders to be subscribed. This settin g is for IMAP4 mailboxes only. ⢠Folder subs criptions â Subscribe to ot her folders in the remote ma ilbox and retr ieve content from those folders. This setting is for IMAP4 mailboxes only. Automatic retrieval settings To define the automati c retrieval settings for an e-ma il account, select the account and Options > Edit > Automatic retri eval , and define the following settings: ⢠E-mail retrieval â S e l e c t Enabled to retrieve new e-ma il messages au tomatically fro m your remote mailbo x, or Only in home net w. to retrieve new e-mail messages automatically from your remo te mailbox only when you are in your home network and not, for example, travelling. ⢠E-mail notifications â Receive notifications on received e-mail. Service mess age settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > Se rvice message . To receive service messages from service providers, select Service mess ages > On . To select how to download services and service message content, select Download messages > Automatically or Manually . If you select Auto matically , you may still need to confirm some d ownloads since not all serv ices can be downloaded automatically. Cell broadcast settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > Ce ll broadcast . To receive cell broadcast m essages, select Reception > On . To select the langua ges in which you want to receive cell broadcast messages, select Language . To display new topics in th e ce ll broadcast topics list, select Topic detection > On . Other settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > Ot her . Select from the following: ⢠Save sent mess ages â Select whether to store sent messages in the Sent folder. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 71
⢠Number of s aved msgs . â Enter the number of sent messages to save. When the limit is reached, the oldest message is deleted. ⢠Memory in use â Select wher e to save your messag es. You can save messages to th e memory card only if a memory card is inserted. ⢠Folder vie w â Define how you want the mess ages in Inbox to be shown. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 72
Phone To make and receive calls, the device must be switched on, the device must have a valid SI M card installed, and you must be located in the service area of a cellular network. To make or receive a net call, your device must be connected to a net call service. To connect to a net call service, your device must be in the coverage of a connection ne twork, such as a WLAN access point. Voice calls Note: The actual invoic e for ca lls and services from your service provider may vary, de pending on network features, rounding off for billing, taxes, and so forth. Answer a call To answer a call, press the ca ll key. To reject a call, press the end key. To mute the ringing tone inst ead of answering a call, select Silence . When you have an active call a nd the call waiting function (network service) is activated, press the call key to answer a new incoming call. The first ca ll is put on hold. To end the active call, press the end key. Make a call To make a call, enter the ph one number, including the area code, and press the call key. Tip: For international calls, add the character that replaces the international access code, and enter the country code, area code (omit the leading 0, if necessary), and phone number. To end the call or cancel the call attempt, pres s the end key. To make a call using the saved cont acts, press the conta cts key. Enter the first letters o f the name, scroll to the name, and press the call key. See "Nokia Contacts for Eseries" , p. 32 . To make a call using the log, pr ess the call key to view up to 20 numbers that you last called or attempted to call. Scroll to the desired number or name, and press the call key. See "Log" , p. 82 . To adjust the volume of an acti ve call, use the volume keys. To switch from a voice ca ll to a video call, select Options > Switch to video call . T he device ends the voice call and makes a video call to the recipient. Make a conference call 1. To make a conference call, enter a participant's phone number, and press the call key. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 73
2. When the participant an swers, select Options > New call . 3. When you have made a phone call to all the participants, select Options > Conference to merge the calls into a conference call. To mute the microphone of your device during the call, select Options > Mute . To drop a participant from the conference call, scroll to the participant, and select Op tions > Con ference > Drop participant . To discuss priv ately with a conf erence call participant, scroll to the participant , and select Options > Conference > Private . Video calls T o b e a b l e t o m a k e a v i d e o c a l l , y o u n e e d t o b e i n t h e c o v e r a g e of a UMTS network. For availability of and subscription to video call services, contact your network operator or service provider. While talking, you can see a real-time, two-way video between you and the reci pient of the call, if the recipient has a compatible mo bile phone. The v ideo image capture d by the camer a in your d evice i s shown to the vi deo call recipient. A video call ca n only be made between two parties . Make a video call To make a video call, enter th e phone number or select the recipient of the call from Contacts, and select Options > Call > Video call . When the video call starts, th e camera of the device is activated. If the camera is alread y in use, video sending is disabled. If the reci pient of the call does not want to send a video back to you, a still image is shown instead. You can define the still image in Menu > Tools > Settings > Ph one > Call > Im age in v ideo call . To disable the sending of aud io, video, or video and audio, select Option s > Disable > Sendin g audio , Sending video , or Sending aud. & vid eo . To use the loudspeaker for receiving audio, select Options > Activate loud speaker . To mute the loudspeaker and use the earpiece, select Options > Activate handset . To swap the places of images, select Op tions > Change image order . To zoom the image on the display, select Options > Zoom in or Zoom out . To end the video call and make a new voice call to the same recipient, select Options > Switch to voice ca ll . Share a video Use Video sharing (network servic e) to send live video or a video clip from your mobile device to another compatible mobile device during a voice call. To use this feature, the device must be within the coverage of a UMTS network. 1. Make a phone call to the selected recipient. You can start sharing a video once the phon e call is established and your device has been registered to the SIP server. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 74
2. To send live video or a video clip from your device, select Options > Share vide o > Live or Cli p . To prev iew the clip, select Options > Play . 3. Select the recipient from Cont acts, or enter the recipien t's SIP address manually to send an invitation to the recipient. Shar ing begins au tomatically when the recipient accepts the video sharing. 4. To end sharing the video, se lect Stop . The voice call continues normally. Receive a video sharing invitation When you receive a video sharing invitation, a message is displayed showing the caller's name or SIP address. To accept the invitation and begin the sharing se ssion, select Accept . To reject the invitation, select Reject . The voice call continues normally. Net calls Select Menu > Communic. > Intern et tel. . Your device supports voice calls over the internet (net calls). Your device attempts emergenc y calls primarily over cellular networks. If an emergency call using cellular networks is not successful, your device attempts a n emergency call through your net call provider. Due to the established nature of cellular telephony, you should use cellular networks for emergency calls, if possible. If you have cellular network coverage available, make sure that your cellular phone is switched on and ready to make calls before you attem pt an emergency call. The capability for an emergency call using internet telephony depends on th e availabilit y of a WLAN an d your net call provider's impl ementation of emergency call capabilities. Contact your ne t call provider to check the internet telephony emer gency call capability. With the n et call servic e (netwo rk service), yo u can make and receive calls over the intern et using the VoIP (voice over internet protocol) technology. Net calls can be establish ed between computers, between mobile phones, and between a VoIP device and a traditional te lephone. To make or receive a net call, your device must be within WLAN coverage, for example. The availability of the net call service may vary according to your country or area. Create a net call profile Before you can make net calls, you need to create a net call profile. 1. Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > SIP settings > Options > New SIP profil e , and enter the required information. To make the login to the net call service automa tic, select Regis tration > Al ways on . Contact your net call provider for the correct settings. 2. Select Back until you return to the Connecti on settings main view. 3. Select Internet tel . > Optio ns > New profile . Enter a name for the profile, and se lect the SIP profile you just created. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 75
To set the created profile to be used automati cally when connecting to the net call service, select Menu > Communic. > Intern et tel. > Preferred profile . To login to the net call service manually, select Registration > When needed in the SIP settings when creating a net call profile. To make secure net calls, ask yo ur service provider for secure net call settings. Th e proxy serv er selected for the net call profile must support se cure net calls. A secure net call is indicated with . Connect to the net call service Select Menu > Communic. > Intern et tel. . To make or receive a net call, your device must be connected to a net call service. If you have selected automati c login, your device automati cally connects t o the net call servi ce. If you login to the service manually, select an available n etwork from the list and Select . The list of networks is re freshed automatically every 15 seconds. To refresh the list manually, select Options > Refresh . Use this option if your WLAN is not shown on the list. To select a net call service for outgoing calls if the device is connected to more than one service, select Optio ns > Change service . To configure new services, select Opt ions > Co nfigure service . This option is shown only if there are services that have not been config ured. To save the netw ork to whi ch you are currently connec ted, select Option s > Save network . The saved networks are marked with a star on the list o f networks . To connect to a net call service using a hidden WLAN, select Options > Use hidden n etwork . To end the connection to a net call service, select Options > Disconnect fr om service . Make net calls You can make a net call from all applications where you can make a regular voice call. For example in Contacts, scroll to the desired contac t, and select Cal l > Internet call . To make a net call in the home screen, enter the SIP address, and press the call key. To make a net call to an address th at does not start with a digit, press any number key when the device is in the standby mode, then press # for a few seconds to clear the display and to switch the device from the number mode to the letter mode. Enter the address, and press the call key. To set net call as the preferre d call type for outgoing calls, select Menu > Communic. > Internet tel. > Options > Settings > Default call type > Internet call . When your device is connected to a net ca ll service, all calls are made as net calls. Net call service settings Select Options > Settings , scroll to the sett ings of the desired service, and press t he scroll key. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 76
To login automati cally to th e net call service, select Login type > Automatic . If you use the automatic log in type for WLANs, the device periodica lly scans for WLANs, which increases the demand on ba ttery power and reduces the battery life. To login manually to the net call service, select Login type > Manual . To view the networks you have saved for the ne t call service and the networks detected by the ne t call service, select Saved conn. networks . To define the service-sp ecific settings, select Edit service settings . This o ption is only avai lable if a service-specific software plug-in has been inst alled in the device. Speed dialling Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Phone > Call > Spee d dialling > On . Speed dialling allows you to make a call by pressing and holding a number key when in the home screen. To assign a number key to a phone nu mber, select Menu > Communic. > Speed dial . Scroll to the number key (2 - 9) on the display, and select Options > Assign . Select the desired number from Contacts. To delete the phone number assi gned to a number key, scroll to the speed dialling key, and select Options > Remove . To modify a phone number assi gned to a number key, scroll to the speed dialling key, and select Options > Change . Call divert Select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > Phone > Call divert . Divert incoming calls to your voice mailbox or to another phone number. For details, co ntact your service provider. Select to divert voice, data, or fax calls, and select from the following options: ⢠All voice calls , All da ta calls , or All fax calls â Divert all incoming voice, data, or fax calls. ⢠If busy â Divert incoming calls when you ha ve an active call. ⢠If not answered â Divert incoming calls after your device rings for a specified period of time. Select the time you let the device ring before diverting the call in the Delay time: list. ⢠If out of reach â Divert calls when the device is switched off or out of network coverage. ⢠If not available â Activate the last three settings at the same time. This option diverts calls if your device is busy, not answered, or out of reach. To divert calls to your voice mailbox, select a call type and a diverting option, then select Options > Activate > To voice mailbox . To divert calls to another ph one number, select a call type and a diverting option, then select Opti ons > Activat e > To other number . Enter a number in the Number: field, or select Find to retrieve a number saved in Contacts . To check the current diverting s tatus, scroll to the diverting option, and select Options > Check status . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 77
To stop diverting calls, scroll to the diverting option, and select Options > Cancel . Call barring Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Phone > Call barring . You can bar the calls that can be made or received with the device (network service). To change the settings, you need the barring password from your service provider. Call barring affects all call types. To bar calls, select from the following: ⢠Outgoin g calls â Prevent making voice calls with your devic e. ⢠Incoming calls â Prevent incoming calls. ⢠International calls â Prevent calling to foreign countries or regions. ⢠Incoming calls when abroad â Prevent incoming calls when outside your home country. ⢠International calls except to h ome country â Prevent calls to foreign countries or re gions, but allow calls to your home country. To check the status of voice call barrings, select the barring option and Option s > Check stat us . To stop all voice call barrings , select a barring option and Options > Cancel all barrings . To change the password us ed fo r barring voice, fax, and data calls, select Option s > Edit barring password . Enter th e current code, then the new code twice. The barring password must be four digits long. For details, contact your service provider. Bar net calls Select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > Phone > Call barring > Internet call barring . To reject net calls from anonymous callers, select Anonymous call barring > On . Send DTMF tones You can send dual tone multi-frequency (D TMF) tones during an active call to control your voice mailbox or other automated phone services. Send a DTMF tone sequence 1. Make a call, and wait un til the other end answers. 2. Select Options > Send DTMF . 3. Enter the DTMF tone sequence, or select a predefined sequence. Attach a DTMF tone sequ ence to a contact card 1. Select Menu > Communic. > Contacts . Open a c ontact, and select Options > Edit > Options > Add de tail > DTMF . 2. Enter the tone sequence. To inse rt a pause of about 2 seconds before or between DTMF tones, enter p . To set the device to send the DTMF tones only after you select Send DTMF during a call, enter w . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 78
3. Select Done . Voice mail Select Menu > Communic. > Call mailbox . When you open the Voice mail application for t he first ti me, you are asked to enter the number of your voice mailbox. To call your voice mail, select Options > Call voice mailbox . If you have configured net call settings to your device and have an internet call mailbox, select Internet call mailbox > Optio ns > Call internet call mbx. to call it. To call your voice mail when in the home screen, press and hold 1 ; or press 1 and then the call key. If you have defined an internet call mailbox, select whether you want to call your voice mail or internet call mailbox. To change the voice mailbox nu mber, select the mailbox and Options > Change number . To change the int ernet call mailbox address, select the mailbox and Options > Change address . Voice aid Select Menu > Tools > Voice aid . The Voice aid application reads text on the display, allowing you to use the basic fu nctions of your device without looking at the display. To hear the entries in your contac ts list, select Contacts . Do not use this option if you ha ve more than 500 cont acts. To hear information on your missed and received calls, dialled numbers, and frequent calls, select Recent calls . To listen to your v oice messages, select Voice mailbox . To dial a telephone number, select Dialler . To use voice commands to ma ke a phone call, select Voice commands . To have your r eceived messag es read al oud, se lect Message reader . To hear the current time, select Clock . To hear the current date, scroll down. If the Voice aid application is open when a calendar alarm is due, the application reads the calendar alarm cont ent aloud. To hear more options, select Opti ons . Voice commands Select Menu > Tools > Voice comm. . Use voice commands to make p hone calls and launch applications, profiles, or ot her functions on the device. The device creates a voice tag fo r the entries in Contacts and for the functions designated in the Voice commands application. When a voice co mmand is spoken, the device compares the spoken words to the voice tag in the device. Voice commands are not dependent on a speakerâÂÂs voice; however, the voice recognition in the device adapts to the main userâÂÂs voice to reco gnise voice commands better. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 79
Make a call A voice tag for a contact is the name or nickname that is saved on the contact in Conta cts. Note: Using voice tags may be difficult in a noisy environment or during an emer gency, so you should not rely solely upon voice dialing in all circumstances. To listen to a voice tag, open a contact, and select Options > Play voice tag . 1. To make a call using a voice command, press and hold the voice key. 2. When you hear the tone or see the visual display, clearly speak the name save d on the contac t. 3. The device plays a synth esised voice tag for the recognised contact in the se lected device language, and displays the name and num ber. After a timeout of 1.5 seconds, the device dials the number. If the recognised contact was not correct, select Next to view a list of other matches or Quit to cancel dialling. If several numbers are saved under t he contac t, the dev ice selects the default number, if it h as been set. Otherwise, the device selects the first available number of the following fields: Mobile , Mobile (home) , Mobile (business) , Te lephone , Tel. (home) , and Tel. (business) . Launch an application The device creates voice tags fo r the applications liste d in the Voice commands application. To launch an ap plication using a voice command, p ress and hold the voice key, and clea rly speak the name of the application. If the recognised application was not correct, select Next to view a list of other matches or Quit to cancel. To add more applications to the li st, select Options > New application . To change the voice command of an application, select Options > Change command , and enter the new command. Change profiles The device creates a voice tag for each profile. To set on a profile using a voice command, press and hold the voice key, and say the name of the profile. To change the voice command, select Profiles > Options > Change command . Voice command settings To switch off the syn thesise r that plays recognised voice commands in the selected device language, select Options > Settings > Synthesiser > Off . To reset voice recognition learni ng when the main user of the device has changed, select Remove voice adapts. . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 80
Push to talk Select Menu > Communic. > PTT . Push to talk (PTT) (n etwork se rvice) provides direct voice communication connected with the push of a key. With PTT, you can use y our device as a w alkie-talk ie. You can use PTT to have a conversat ion with one person or with a group of people, or join a channel. A channel is like a chat room: you can call the channel to s ee if anyone is online. The channel call does not alert the other users; the users just join the channel and start sp eaking with each other. In PTT communication, one person talks while the other users listen through the built-i n loudspeaker. Users take turns responding to each other. Beca use only one user can talk at a time, the ma ximum duration of a speech tu rn is limited. For details of the speech turn duration for your network, contact your service provider. PTT settings Select Options > Settings and select User setti ngs to define your preferences for PTT, or Connection settings to change the connection details. Conta ct your service provider for the correct settings. Tip: You may al so receive the settings in a message from the provider of the PTT service. Log in to PTT service If you have set Application start-up on in User s ettings , PTT automatically logs in to the service when started. If not, you must log in manually. To log in to the PTT service manually, select Opti ons > Log in to PTT . When the Ringing type setting of your device is set to Beep once or Silent , or there is an ongoin g phone call, you cannot make or receive PTT calls. Make a PTT call To make a PTT call, select Option s > Contacts , select one or several contacts from the list, and press the voice key. Remember to hold the device in front of you during the call so you can see the display. Th e display informs you when it is your turn to speak. Speak towards th e microphone, and do not cover the loudspeaker with your hands. Pres s and hold the voice key the entire time yo u are talking. When you have finished talking, release the key. To end the PTT call, press the end key. When you receive a PTT call, pr ess the call key to answer the call or the end key to dismiss the call. Created PTT calls Select Options > PTT log > Created PTT , and a call. To make a PTT call to a contact, select Options > Talk 1 to 1 . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 81
To send a request to a contact to call y ou, select Options > Send callback request . To crea te a conta ct, sele ct Options > Save to Contacts . Manage PTT contacts To view, add, modify, delete, or call contacts, select Options > Contacts . A list of names from the Contacts application is displayed with informat ion about their login status. To call a selected contact, select Opt ions > Talk 1 to 1 . To make a group call, sele ct several con tacts and Options > Talk to many . To send the contact a request to call you, select Options > Send callback request . To answer a callback request, select Show to open the callback request. To make a PTT call to the sender, press the voice ke y. Create a PTT channel To create a channe l, selec t Options > New channel > Create new . To join a channel, select the channel you wa nt to talk to, and press the voice key. To invite a user to a channel, se lect Options > Send invitation . To view the currently active users of a channel, select Options > Active membe rs . When you log in to PTT, you are automatically connected to the channels that were acti ve when the application was last closed. Exit PTT To exi t P T T, s el ec t Opti ons > Exit . Select Yes to log out and close the service. Select No if you want to keep the application active in the backgro und. Log Select Menu > Log . Log stores information about the communication history of the device. The device registers missed and r eceived calls only if the network supports these func tions, the device is switched on and within the network service area. Call and data registers To view recently missed, rece ived, and dialled calls, select Recent calls . Tip: To open Dialled numbe rs when in the home screen, press the call key. To view the approximate durat ion of calls to and from your device, select Call duration . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 82
To view the amount of data t ransferred during packe t data connections, select Packet d ata . Monitor all communications To monitor all voice calls, text messages, or data connections registered by the device, open the general log tab. To view detailed information about a communication event, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. Tip: Subevents, such as a te xt message sent in more than one par t and packet da ta connections, are logged as one communication event. Connections to your mailbox, multimedia mess aging centre, or web pages are shown as packet data connections. To add the phone number fr om a communication event to Contacts, select Options > Save to Co ntacts , and se lect to create a new contact or to add the phone n umber to an existing c ontact. To copy the number, for example to paste it to a text message, select Options > Copy number . To view a single type of communication event or communication events with one other party, select Options > Filter , and select the desired filter. To erase the contents of the lo g, recent calls register, and messaging delivery reports permanently, select Options > Clear log . Call and send messages from Log To call back a caller, select Recent calls and open Missed calls , Received calls , or Dialled numbers . Select the caller, and Options > Call . To reply to a caller with a mess age, select Recent calls and open Missed calls , Received calls , or Dialled numbers . Select the caller, and select Options > Create message . You can send text messages and multimedia messages. Log settings To set the time for keeping all communication events in the log, select Options > Settings > Log durati on , and the time. If you select No l og , all log contents are permanently deleted. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 83
Travelling Need directions? Looking for a restaurant? Your Eseries device has the tools to get you where you want to be. About GPS and satellite signals The Global Positioning System (GPS) is a worldwide radio navigation system tha t includes 24 satellites and their ground stati ons that monitor the op eration of the satellites. Your device has an internal GPS receiver. A GPS terminal receives low- power radio signals from the satellites and measures the travel time of t he signals. From the travel time, the GPS receiver can calculate its location to the accuracy of metres. The Global Positioning System (GPS) is operated by the government of the United States, which is solely responsible for its accuracy and maintenanc e. The accuracy of location data can be affected by adju stments to GPS satellites made by the United States government and is subject to change with the United States Departmen t of Defense civil GPS policy and the Federal Radionavigation Plan. Accuracy can also be affected by poor satellite geom etry. Availability and quality of GPS signals may be affected by your location, bui ldings, natural obstacles, and weat her conditions. GPS signals may not be available inside buildi ngs or underground and may be impaired by materials such as concrete and metal. GPS should not be used for precise location measurement, and you should never rely solely on location data fr om the GPS receiver and cellular rad io networks for positioning or navigation. The trip meter ha s limited accu racy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and quality of GPS signals. To enable or disable different positioni ng methods, such as Bluetooth GPS, select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Po sitioning > Posit ioning methods . About satellite signals If your device cannot find th e satellite signal, consider the following: ⢠If you are indoors, go outdoo rs to receive a better signal. ⢠If the numeric keypad slide is closed, open it. ⢠If you are outdoors, move to a more open space. ⢠Ensure that your hand does not cover the GPS antenna of your device. ⢠If the weather conditions are bad, the sign al strength may be affected. ⢠Establishing a GPS connection may take from a couple of seconds to severa l minutes. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 84
Satellite status To check how many satellites you r device has found, and whether your device is receiv ing satellite signals , select Menu > GPS > GPS data > Position > Options > Satellite stat us . If your device has found satellites, a bar for each satellite is sh own in the satellite info view. The longer the bar, the stronger the satellite signal. When your device has received enough data from the satellite sig nal, the bar turns black. Positioning settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Positioning . To use a specific positioning me thod to detect the location of your device, select Positioning methods . To select a position ing server, select Position ing server . Maps Maps overview Select Menu > GPS > Maps . Welcome to Maps. Maps shows you w hat is nearby, helps you plan your route, and guides you where you want to go. ⢠Find cities, streets, and services. ⢠Find your way with turn-by-turn directions. ⢠Synchronise yo ur favourite locations and routes between your mobile device and the Ovi Maps internet service. Note: Downloading content su ch as maps, satellite images, voice files, guides or traffic information may involve transmission of large amounts of data (network service). Some services may not be ava ilable in all countries, and may be provided only in selected languages. The services may be network dependent. For more information, contact your network service provider. Almost all digital cartography is inaccurate and incomplete to some extent. Never rely sole ly on the cartography that you download for use in this device. Content such as satellite images, g uides, weather and traffic information and related servic es are generated by third parties independent of Nokia. The content m ay be inaccurate and incomplete to some extent and is subj ect to availability. Never rely solely on the afor ementioned content and related services. My position View your location and the map See your current location on the map, and browse maps of different cities and countries. Select Menu > GPS > Maps and My pos ition . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 85
When the GPS connec tion is active, marks your current or last known location on the map . If the icon's colours are faint, no GPS signal is av ailable. If only cell ID based positioning is available, a red halo around the positioning icon indicates the general area you might be in. The accuracy of the estimate increases in densely populated area s. Move on the map â Use the scro ll key. By default, the map is oriented north. View your current or last known location â Press 0 . Zoom in or out â Press * or # . If you browse to an area not covere d by maps that are s tored on your device and you ha ve an active data connection, new maps are automatically downloade d. Map coverage varies by country and region. Map view 1 â Selected location 2 â Indicator area 3 â Point of interest (for ex ample, a railway station or a museum) 4 â Information area Change the look of the map View the map in different modes, to easily identify where you are. Select Menu > GPS > Maps and My pos ition . Press 1 , and select from the following: ⢠Map â In the standard map view, details such as location names or motorway numbers, are easy to read. ⢠Satellit e â For a detailed view, use satellite images. ⢠Terrain â View at a gla nce th e ground type, for example, when you are travelling off-road. Change between 2D and 3D views â Press 3 . Download and update maps To avoid mobile data transfer costs, download the latest maps and voice guidance files to your computer using the Nokia Ovi Suite application, and then transfer and save them to your device. To download and install Nokia Ovi Suite on your compatible computer, go to www.ovi.com. Tip: Save new maps to your device before a journey, so you can browse the m aps without an intern et connection when tr avelling abroad. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 86
To make sure your device does not use an internet connection, in the main menu, select Option s > Settings > Internet > Connection > Offline . About positioning methods Maps displays your location on the map using GPS, A-GPS, or cell ID based positioning. The Global Positioning System (GPS) is a satellite-based navigation system used for calc ulating your location. Assisted GPS (A-GPS) is a network service that sends you GPS data, improving the speed and accuracy of the positioning. When you use Maps for the first time, you are prompted to define an internet access poin t to download map information or use A-GPS. indicates the availability of the sat ellite signals. One bar is one satellite. When the device is searching for satellite signals, the bar is yellow. Whe n there is enough data available to calculate your lo cation, the bar turns green. The more green bars, the more reli able the location calculation. The Global Positioning System (GPS) is operated by the government of the United States, which is solely responsible for its accuracy and maintenanc e. The accuracy of location data can be affected by adju stments to GPS satellites made by the United States government and is subject to change with the United States Departmen t of Defense civil GPS policy and the Federal Radionavigation Plan. Accuracy can also be affected by poor satellite geom etry. Availability and quality of GPS signals may be affected by your location, bui ldings, natural obstacles, and weat her conditions. GPS signals may not be available inside buildi ngs or underground and may be impaired by materials such as concrete and metal. GPS should not be used for precise location measurement, and you should never rely solely on location data fr om the GPS receiver and cellular rad io networks for positioning or navigation. The trip meter ha s limited accu racy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and quality of GPS signals. With cell ID based positioning, the position is determined through the antenna tower your mobile device is currently connected to. Depending on the available po sitioning method, the accuracy of positioning may vary from a few metres to s everal kilometres. Find places Find a location Maps helps you find specific locat ions and types of business you are looking for. Select Menu > GPS > Maps and Find places . 1. Enter search terms, such as a street addre ss or postcode. To clear the search field, select Clear . 2. Select Go . 3. In the list of proposed matches, go to the desired item. To display the location on the map, select Map . To view the other locations of the search result list on the map, scroll up and down with the scroll key. Return to the list of prop osed match es â Select List . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 87
Search for different types of nearby places â Selec t Browse categories and a category, such as shopping, accommodation, or tran sport. If no search result s are found, ensure the spelling of your search terms is correct . Problems with your internet connection may also affect re sults when searching online. To avoid data transfer costs, you can also get se arch results without an active int ernet connection, if you ha ve maps of the searched area stored on your device. View location details View more information about a specific location or place, such as a hotel or r estaurant, if a vailable. Select Menu > GPS > Maps and My position . View the detail s of a place â Select a place, press the scroll key, and select Show details . Manage places and routes Save places and routes Save addresses , places of interest, and routes, so they can be quickly used later. Select Menu > GPS > Maps . Save a place 1. Select My position . 2. Go to the location. To search for an a ddress or place, select Search . 3. Press the sc roll key. 4. Select Save place . Save a route 1. Select My positio n . 2. Go to the location. To search for an address or place, select Search . 3. To add another route point, press the scroll key, and sele ct Add to route . 4. Select Add new route point and the appropriate option. 5. Select Show route > Options > Save route . View your saved places and routes â Select Favourites > Places or Routes . View and organise places or routes Use your Favourites to quickly access the places and routes you have saved. Group the places and routes in to a collection, for example, when planning a trip. Select Menu > GPS > Maps and Favourites . View a saved place on the map 1. Select Places . 2. Go to the place. 3. Select Map . To return to the list of saved places, select List . Create a collect ion â Select Create new collection , an d enter a collection name. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 88
Add a saved place to a collection 1. Select Places and the pla ce. 2. Select Organise collections . 3. Select New collection or an existing collection. If you need to delete places or routes, or add a route to a collection, go to the Ovi Maps internet service at www.ovi.com. Send places to your friends When you want to share place information with your friends, send these details directly to their devices. Select Menu > GPS > Maps and My position Send a place to your fr iend's compatible device â Select a location, press the sc roll key, and select Send . Synchronise your Favourites Plan a trip on your computer at the Ovi Maps website, synchronise the saved places , routes, and collections with your mobile device, and access the plan on the go. To synchronise places, routes , or collections between your mobile device and the Ovi Maps internet service, you need a Nokia account. I f you do not have one, in the ma in view, select Options > Account > Nokia account > Create new account . Synchronise saved places, route s, and collections â Select Favourites > Synchronise with Ovi . If you do not have a Nokia account, you are p rompted to create one. Set the device to synchronise Favourites automa tically â Select Op tions > Settings > Synchronisation > Change > At start-up and shut-d. . Synchronising requires an acti ve internet connection, an d may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service providerâÂÂs network. Contact your service provider for information abou t data transmission charge s. To use the Ovi Maps internet service, go to www.ovi.com. Drive and Walk Get voice guidance Voice guid ance, if available fo r your language, helps you find your way to a destination, leaving you free to enjoy the journey. Select Menu > GPS > Maps and Drive or Walk . When you use drive or walk navi gation for the first time, you are asked to select the langua ge of the voice guidance, and download the appropri ate files. If you select a language that in cludes street names, also the street names are said aloud. Voice guidance may not be available for your language. Change the voice guidance language â I n t h e m a i n v i e w , select Option s > Sett ings > Navigation > Drive guidance or Walk guidance and the appropriate option. Repeat the voi ce guidance for car navig ation â In the navigation view, select Options > Repeat . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 89
Adjust the v olume of the v oice guidance for car navigation â In the navigation view, select Options > Volume . Drive to your destination When you need turn-by-turn directions while driving, Maps helps you get to your destination. Select Menu > GPS > Maps and Driv e . Drive to a destination â Select Se t destinati on and the appropriate opti on. Drive to your home â Select Drive home . When yo u selec t Drive home or Walk hom e for the first time, you are prompted to define your home location. To later change the home locati on, do the following: 1. In the main view, select Options > Se ttings > Navigation > Home Loc ation > Change > Redefine . 2. Select the appropriate option. Tip: To drive without a s et destinat ion, select Map . Your location is displayed on the centre of the map as you move. Change views during navigation â Press the scroll key, and select 2D view , 3D view , Arrow view , or Route overview . Obey all local laws. Always keep your ha nds free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safety. Navigation view 1 â Route 2 â Your location and direction 3 â Compass 4 â Information bar (speed, distance, time) Get traffic and safety information Enhance your driving experience with real-time information about traffic events, lane a ssistance, and speed limit warnings, if available for your country or region. Select Menu > GPS > Maps and Drive . View traffic events on th e map â During drive navigation, select Option s > Traffic info . The events are displayed as triangles and lines. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 90
Update traffic information â Select Options > Traffic info > Update traffic info . When planning a route, you can set the device to avoid tra ffic events, such as tra ffic jams or roadworks. Avoid traffi c events â In the main view, select Options > Settings > Navigation > Reroute due to traffic . The location of speed cameras may be shown on your route during navigation, if this feature is enabled. Some jurisdictions prohibit or regu late the use of speed camera location data. Nokia is not respon sible for the accuracy, or the consequences of using speed camera location data. Walk to your destination When you need directions to follow a route on foot, Maps guides you over squares, an d through parks, pedestrian zones, and even shopping centres. Select Menu > GPS > Maps and Wal k . Walk to a destination â Select Set dest ination and the appropriate opti on. Walk to your home â Select Walk home . When yo u selec t Drive home or Walk hom e for the first time, you are prompted to define your home location. To later change the home locati on, do the following: 1. In the main view, select Options > Se ttings > Navigation > Home Loc ation > Change > Redefine . 2. Select the appropriate option. Tip: To walk without a set destination, s elect Map . Your location is displayed on the centre of the map as you move. Plan a route Plan your journey, and create yo ur route and view it on the map before setting off. Select Menu > GPS > Maps and My pos ition . Create a route 1. Go to your starting p oint. 2. Press the scroll key, and select Add to route . 3. To add another route point, select Add new route point and the appropriate opti on. Change the order of the route points 1. Go to a route point. 2. Press the scroll key, and select Move . 3. Go to the place where you want to move the route point to, and select OK . Edit the location of a route point â Go to the route point, press the scroll key, and select Edit and the appropriate option. View the route on the map â Select Sh ow route . Navigate to the de stination â Select Show route > Options > Start driving or Start walking . Change the settings for a route The route settings affect the navigation guidance and the way the route is di splayed on the map. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 91
1. In the route planner view, op en the Settings tab. To get to the route planner view from the navigation view, select Options > Route points or Route po int list . 2. Set the transportat ion mode to Drive or Walk . If you select Walk , one-way streets are regarded as normal streets, and walkways and ro utes through, for example, parks and shopping cen tres, can be used. 3. Select the desired option. Select the walking mode â Open the Settings tab, and select Walk > Preferred route > Streets or St raight line . Straight line is useful on off-road terrain as it indicates the walking direct ion. Use the faster or sho rter driving route â Open the Settings tab, and select Drive > Route selection > Faster route or Shorter route . Use the optimised driving route â Open the S ettings tab, and select Drive > Route selection > Optimised . The optimised driving route combines the advantag es of both t he shorter and the faster routes. You can also ch oose to allow or avoid using, for example, motorways, toll roads, or ferries. Maps shortcuts General shortc uts To zoom in or out on the map, press * or # . To return to your current location, press 0 . To change the map type, press 1 . To tilt the map, press 2 or 8 . To rotate the map, press 4 or 6 . To return the map back to the north up position, press 5 . Pedestrian navigation shortcuts To save a location, press 2 . To search for locations by categories, press 3 . To adjust the volume of the pe destrian navigation guidance, press 6 . To view the list of route points, press 7 . To adjust the map for ni ght-time usage, press 8 . To view the dashboard, press 9 . Car navigation shortc uts To adjust the map for daytime or night-time usage, press 1 . To save the current location, press 2 . To search for locations by categories, press 3 . To repeat the voice guidance, press 4 . To find a different route, press 5 . To adjust the volume of voice guidance, press 6 . To add a stopover to the route, press 7 . To view traffic information, press 8 . To view the dashboard, press 9 . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 92
GPS data Select Menu > GPS > GPS data . With GPS data, you ca n view your current location, find your way to a desired location, and track distance. Select Navigati on to view navigating i nformation to your trip de stina tion, Po sition to view positioning information about your current location, or Trip dist. to view your travelling information s u c h as t h e d i s t a n ce and duration you have travelled, and your average and max imum speeds. The application must receive positioning information from at least four satellites to be used as a travelling aid. The trip meter has limited accu racy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can al so be affected by availability and quality of GPS signals. Use GPS data To check the signal strength of the satellites that provide the positioning informat ion necessary for na vigation, open any of the three views and select Optio ns > Satellite status . To set a landmark or location as the destination of your trip, select Navigation > Options > Set d estination . You can also enter the destination latitude and longitude coordinates. To remove the destination set for your trip, select Navigation > Option s > Stop navigation . To save your current position as a landmark, select Navigation or Posit ion , and Options > Save posit ion . To activate the t rip meter, select Trip distance > Options > Start . To stop the trip meter, select Options > Stop . To reset all fields and start calculating the trip ag ain, select Trip distance > Op tions > Restart . To change the measuring system in use, select Opt ions > Settings > Meas urement sy stem > Metric or Imperial . To enter the altitude calibration to correct the altitude received from the positioning satellites , select Opti ons > Settings > Alti tude calibrat ion . Landmarks Select Menu > GPS > Landmarks . Landmarks are coordinates to ge ographic locations th at you can save to your device for la ter use in different location- based services. You can create landmarks using the intern al GPS receiver of your device or network (network service). Create a landmark To create a landmark, select Opti ons > New landmark . Select Curre nt position to make a network request for the latitude and longitude coordina tes of your current location, Select from map to select the location from a map, or Enter manually to fill in necessary locat ion information such as a name, category, address, la titude, longitude, and altitude. To show the landmark on the map, select Options > Show on map . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 93
Edit landmarks To edit a landmark, select Options > Edit > Options and from the following: ⢠Select categories â Organise the landmark to a grou p of similar landmarks. Select a category to modify landmark information such as a name, category, addre ss, latitude, longitude, and altitude. ⢠Retrieve curre nt position â Request and automatically fill in the geographical latitu de and longitude coordinates to make a landmark of your current location. ⢠Delete â Remove the landmark. ⢠Landma rk ico n â Change the icon of the landmark. ⢠Show on map â Show the land mark on the map. ⢠Send â Send the landmark to compatible devices. ⢠Input optio ns â Modify text input settin gs, such as the writing language. ⢠Editin g options â Edit the phone numbers and web addresses assigned to the land mark. Landmark categories You can see the landmark categories in two views: one lists categories that already conta in landmarks, and the oth er lists all the categories your device has. To view the landmarks that a category contains, scroll to the category, and press the scroll key. To create a new category, select Options > Edit categories > Options > New category . To change to which categories a la ndmark belongs, open the landmarks tab. Scroll to the landmark, and select Options > Edit > Options > Select cate gories . Select the category or categories in which you want to include the landmark and OK . Receive landmarks Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging . Open a message that contains a landmark you have received from another device. Scroll to the landmark, and press the scroll key. To save the landmark in your device, select Op tions > Save . To forward the landmark to compatible devices, select Options > Send . To show the received land mark on the map, select Opti ons > Show on map . To find out how to navig ate to the received landmark, select Options > Show route . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 94
Nokia Office Tools Nokia Office Tools su pport mobile business and enable effective communication with work teams. Active notes Select Menu > Office > Active note s . Active notes allows you to create, edit, and v iew different kinds of notes, for example, meeting memos, hobby notes, or shopping lists. You can in sert images, vi deos, and sound in the notes. You can link notes to other applications, such as Contacts, an d send notes to other s. Create and edit notes To create a note, st art writing. To edit a note, scroll to it, and p ress the scroll key. To insert images, sound clips, video, busin ess cards, web bookmarks, and files, select Options > Ins ert object . To add new item s to the note, select Options > Insert new . You can record sound and video clips, and capture images. To add boldface, italics, or underlining to your text or change the font colour, press and hold the shift key and use the scroll key to select the tex t. Then select Options > Text . To send the note, select Opt ions > Send . To link a note to a conta ct, select Optio ns > Link note to call > Add contacts . You can see the note on the display of your device when making a call to or receiving a call from the contact. Settings for Active notes Select Sett ings . To save notes to your device memory, select Memory in use > Phone memory . To save them to a memory card, select Memory in use > Memory card . To change the layout of active notes, select Change view > Grid . To view the notes as a list, select Change view > List . To see a note in the backgrou nd when making or receiving phone calls, select Show note during call > Yes . Tip: If you temporarily do not want to see the notes during phone calls, select Show note during call > No . This way you do not have t o remove the links between notes an d contact car ds. Calculator Select Menu > Office > Calculator . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 95
This calculator has limited a ccuracy and is designed for simple calculations. To make a calculation, en te r the first number of the calculation. Select a function such as add or subtr act from the function map. Enter the seco nd number of the calculation, and select = . The calculator performs operations in the order they are entered. The result of the calculation remains in the editor field and can be used as the first number of a new calculation. The device saves the result of the last calculation in its memory. Exiting the C alculator application or switching off the device does not clear the me mory. To recall the last saved result the next time you open the Calculator application, select Options > Last result . To save the numbers or resu lts of a calculation, select Options > Memory > Save . To retrieve the results of a ca lculation from the memory and use them in a calculation, select Options > Memory > Recall . File manager With File manage r, you can manage the con tents and properties of files and folder s on your device memory and memory card. You can open, create, move, copy, rename, send, and search for files and folders. Copyright protection may prevent sending some files. Open the device tab or the memory card tab. To select multiple files, sc roll to each file, and select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark . To send the selected files, select Option s > Send . To move or copy files or folders to another folder, select Options > Move to folder or Copy to fol der . Default folders such as Sound clips in Gallery cannot be moved. To search for files, select Options > Find . Enter the search text, and press the scroll key. The folders and files whose names contain the search te xt are displayed. To view information about the selected file, select Options > View details . Quickoffice About Quickoffice Select Menu > Office > Quickoffice . Quickoffice consists of Quickword for viewing M icrosoft Word documents, Quicksheet for viewing Microsoft Excel worksheets, Quickpoint fo r Microsoft PowerPoint presentations, and Quickman ag er for purchasing software. You can view Microsoft Office 2000, XP, 2003, a nd 2007 documents (DOC, XLS, an d PPT fi le formats) with Quickoffice. If you have the editor version of Quickoffice, you can also edit files. Not all file formats or features are supported. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 96
Converter Select Menu > Office > Converte r . The converter has limited accura cy, and rounding errors may occur. Convert measurements 1. Scroll to the Type field, and select Options > Conve rsion type to open a list of measur es. Select the measure to us e, and select OK . 2. Scroll to the first Unit field, and select Options > Select unit . Select the unit from which to convert, and select OK . Scroll to th e next Unit field, and select the unit to which to convert. 3. Scroll to the first Amount field, and enter the value to convert. The other Amount field changes automatically to show the converted value. Set base currency and exchange rate When you change base currency, you must enter new exchange rates because all previously set exchange rates a re cleared. Before you can make currency conversions, you must choose a base currency and add exchange rates. The rate of the base currency is always 1. The base currency determines the conversion rates of the other currencies. 1. To set the rate of exchange for the unit of currency, scroll to the Type field, and select Options > Currency rates . 2. Scroll to the currency type and enter the exchange rate you would like to set per single unit of currency. 3. To change the base currency, scroll to the currency, and select Optio ns > Set as base currency . 4. Select Done > Yes to save the ch anges. After you have inserted all the necessa ry exchange rates, you can make currency conversions. Zip manager With Zip manager, you can creat e new archive files to store compressed ZIP formatted file s; add single or multiple compressed files or directories to an archive; set, clear, or change the archiv e password for protected archives; and change settings , such as comp ression level, and file name encoding. You can store the archive files on the device mem ory or on a memory card. PDF reader Select Menu > Office > Adobe PDF . With PDF reader you can read PDF documents on the display of your device; search for text in the documents; modify settings, such as zoom level and page views; and send PDF files using e-mail. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 97
Printing You can print documents, such as files, messages, or web pages, from the device, preview a print job, define page layout options, select a printer, or print to a fi le. You may not be able to print all t ypes of document s. Print files To configure a p rinter for your devi ce, select Menu > Office > Printers > Options > Add . To set the printer as the default printer, select Options > Printing options > Printers , scroll to the printer and select Op tions > Set as default . B e f o r e y o u p r i n t , m a k e s u r e y o u r d e v i c e i s p r o p e r l y c o n n e c t e d to the printer . To print a document, select Opt ions > Printing options > Print . To print to a file, select Options > Printing options > Print > Print to file , and d etermine the lo cation for the file. To change the prin ti ng options, select Options > Printi ng options . You can select the printer you want to use, the number of copies and the rang e of pages you want to pr int. To change the page layout before printing, select Options > Printing options > Page setup . You can chan ge th e paper size and orientation, define the margins , and insert a header or a footer. The maximum len gth of the header and footer is 128 characters. To preview a file or message before you print, select Options > Printing op tions > Prev iew . Printing options Open a document, such as a file or message, and select Options > Printing op tions > Print . Define the following: ⢠Printer â Select an availabl e printer from the list. ⢠Print â Select All pages , Ev en pages , or Odd pages as the print range. ⢠Print range â Select Al l pages in range or Defined pages as the page range. ⢠Number of copi es â Select the number of copies to print. ⢠Print to file â Print to a file, and define the location for the file. The available options ma y vary. Printer settings Select Menu > Office > Printers . To add a new printer, select Option s > Add . Define the following: ⢠Printer â Enter a name for the printer. ⢠Driver â Select a driver for the printer . ⢠Bearer â Select a bearer for the printer. ⢠Orientation â Select the orientation. ⢠Paper size â Select the paper size. ⢠Media type â Select the media type. ⢠Colour mode â Select the co lour mode. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 98
⢠Printer mode l â Select the printer model. The available options may vary. Clock Select Menu > Office > Clock . In Clock, you can view your local time and time zone information, set and edit a larms, or modify date and ti me settings. Alarm clock Open the alarm clock tab. To set an alarm, select Options > New alarm . When an alarm is active, is displayed. To switch off the alarm, select Stop , or to stop the alarm for 5 minutes, select Snooze . If the alarm time is rea ched while the device is switched off, the device switches itself on and starts sounding the ala rm tone. If you select Stop , the devic e asks whether you want to activate the device for calls. Select No to switch o ff the device or Yes to make and receive calls. Do not select Yes when wireless ph one use may cause interference or danger. To change the alarm time, select Opti ons > Reset alarm . To remove the alarm, select Op tions > Remove alarm . World clock Open the world clock tab to check the time in different cities. To add a city to the world clock view, select Option s > Add city . T o c h a n g e t h e c i t y t h at d e te r m i ne s t he ti m e a n d d a t e i n y ou r device, select Options > Set as current city . T he city is displayed in the Clock main vi ew, and the time in your device is changed according to the city selected. Check th at the time is correct and matches your time zone. Clock settings Select Options > Settings . To change the time or date, select Tim e or Date . To change the clock shown on the home screen, select Clock type > Analogue or Digital . To allow the mobile phone network to u pdate the time, date, and time zone information to yo ur device (network service), select Network operator time > Auto-update . To change the alarm tone, select Clock alarm tone . Notes Select Menu > Office > Notes . You can create and send note s to other compatible devices, and save received plain text files (.txt format) to Notes. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 99
Write and se nd notes To write a no te, start enterin g the text. The note editor opens automatic ally. To open a note, scroll to it, a nd press the scroll key. To send a note to other co mpatible devices, select Options > Send . To synchronise or to define synchronisation settings for a note, select Options > Synchronisation . Se lect Start to initialise synchronisation or Settings to define the synchronisation settings for the note. Nokia Wireless Keyboard Wireless keyboards are availabl e as separate enhancements. To set up the Nokia Wireless Key board or other compatible wireless keyboard supporting the Bluetooth Human Interface Devices (HID) profile for us e with your device, use the Wireless keyboard application. 1. Activate Bluetoo th connectivi ty on your device: select Menu > Connectivity > Bluetooth > Bluetooth > On . Make sure that you have set My phone's visibility > Shown to all . 2. Switch on the keyboard. 3. Select Menu > Office > Wlss. keybd. . 4. To start searchi ng for devices with B luetooth connectivity, select Options > Find keyboard . 5. Select the keyboard from th e list, and press the s croll key to start the connection. 6. To pair the keyboard with your device, enter a passcode of your choice (1 to 9 digits) on the device a nd the same passcode on your keyboard. 7. If you are asked for a keyboard layout, select it from a list on your device. When the name of th e keyboard appears, it s status changes to Keyboard connected , and the indicator of your keyboard blinks slowly; the keyboard is ready for use. For details on the operation and maintenance of your keyboard, see its user guide. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 100
Connectivity Your device offers several options to connect to the internet, a corporate intranet, or to another device or computer. Fast downloading High-speed downlink packet a ccess (HSDPA, also called 3.5G, indicated by ) is a network service in UMTS networks and provides high-speed data do wnloads. When HSD PA support in the device is activated and t he device is connected to a UMTS network that supports HS DPA, downloading data su ch as messages, e -mail, and browser pa ges through the cellular network may be faster. An active HSDPA connection is indicated by . The icon may vary between regions. To activate or deactivate HSDPA, select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Packe t data > High speed packet access . Some cellular networks do not allo w incoming voice calls when HSDPA is active, in which case you need to deactivate HSDPA to receiv e calls. Contact your network operator for details. For availability and subscription to data connection services, contact your service provider. HSDPA only affects the downloa d speed; sending data to the network, such as messages and e-mail, is not affected. PC connections You can use your m obile device with a variety of compatible PC connectivity and data co mmunicati ons applications. With Nokia Ovi Suite you can, for example, transfer files and images between your device an d a compatible computer. To use Ovi Suite with USB connection mode, select PC Suite . For more information about Ov i Suite, see the support area at www.ovi.com. Data cable To avoid damaging the memory card, do not remove th e data cable in the middle of a data transfer. Transfer data between your device and a PC 1. Insert a memory card to your device, and connect the device to a compat ible PC with the USB da ta cable. 2. When the device asks which mode is used, select Mass storage . In this mod e, you can s ee your devi ce as a removable hard drive in your computer. 3. Close the connection from the computer ( for example, from an Unplug or Eject Hard ware wizard in Wi ndows) to avoid damaging the memory ca rd. To use Nokia Ovi Suite with your device, install Nokia Ovi Suite on your PC, connect the data ca ble, and select PC Suite . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 101
To use your device to connect your PC to the web, connect the data cable, and select Connect PC to web . To synchronise the music in your device with Ovi Player, install the Ovi Player software on your PC , connect the data cable, and select Media transfer . To change the USB mode you n ormally use with the dat a cable, select Menu > Connecti vity > US B > USB connection mode and the desired option. To set the device to ask for the mode each time you connect the USB data cable to the device, select Menu > Connectivity > USB > Ask on connection > Ye s . Infrared Do not point the infrared ( IR) beam at anyone's eye or allow it to interfere with other IR de vices. This device is a Class 1 laser product. Use infrared to connect two devices and trans fer data between them. With infrared, you can transfer data such as business cards, calendar notes, and media files with a compatible device. 1. Ensure that the infrared po rts of the devices face each other. The positioning of th e devices is more important than the angle or distance. 2. Select Menu > Connec tivity > Infrared to switch on infrared on your device. 3. Switch on infrared on the other device and wait a few seconds until the infrared connection is established. 4. Locate the desired file in an application or File manager, and select Options > Send > Via infrared . If the data transfer is not starte d within 1 min ute after the activation of the infrared port, the connection is cancelled and must be started again. All items received through infrared are placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging. Positioning the devices away from each other breaks the connection, but the infrared light beam remains active on your device until it deactivat es. Bluetooth Select Menu > Connectivity > Bluetooth . About Bluetooth Bluetooth technology in your device enables wireless connections between electronic devices within a range of 10 metres (33 feet). A Bluetooth co nnection can be used to send images, videos, text, business cards, calendar notes, or to connect wireless ly to devices that use Blueto oth technology. Since devices using Bluetooth technology communica te using radio waves, your device and the other devices do not need to be in direct line-of- sight. The two devices only need to be within a maximum of 1 0 metres of each other, although the connection can be subject to interference from obstructions such as walls or other electronic devices. Several Bluetooth connecti ons can be active at a time . For example, if your device is connected to a headset, you can é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 102
also transfer files to another compatible dev ice at the same time. This device is compliant with Bluetooth Specification 2.0 EDR supporting the following pr ofiles: Dial-Up Networking, Object Push, File Transfer, Han dsfree, Headset, Ba sic Imaging, Remote SIM Access, Stereo Audio, Generic Audio/Video Distribution, Audio/Video Remote Control, and Advanced Audio Distribution. To ensure interoperability between other devices supporting Bluetooth t echnology, use Nokia approved accessories for th is model. Check with the manufacturers of other de vices to determine their compatibility wi th this device. Features using Bluetooth techno logy increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life. Send and receive data with Bluetooth 1. When you activate Blu etooth for the first time, you are asked to give a name to your device. Give your device a unique name to make it easy to recognise if there are several Bluetooth devices nearby . 2. Select Bluetoot h > On . 3. Select My phone's visibility > Shown to all or Define period . If you select Define period , you need to define the time during which your dev ice is visible to ot hers. Your device and the name you entered can now be seen by other users with devices us ing Bluetooth technology. 4. Open the application where th e item you want to send is stored. 5. Select the item and Options > Send > Via Bluetooth . The device searches for ot her devices using Bluetooth technology within range and lists them. Tip: If you have sent da ta using Bluetooth before, a list of the previous search results is displayed. To search for more Bluetooth devices, select More devices . 6. Select the device with which you want to connect. If t he other de vice re quire s pa iring before data can be transmitted, you ar e asked to enter a passcode. When the connection ha s been established, Sending data is shown. The Sent folder in the Messag ing application does not store messages sent using B luetooth connectivity. To receive data using Bluetooth, select Bluetooth > On and My phone's visibility > Shown to all to receive data from a non-paired device or Hidden to receive data from a paired device only. When you rece ive data through Bluetooth, depending on the settings of an active profile, a tone sounds , and you are as ked if you want to accept the message in which the data is included. If you a ccept, the message is placed in the Inbox folder in the Messaging application. Tip: You can access the files in the device o r on the memory card using a compatible accessory that supports the File Transfer Profile Client service (for example, a lapt op computer). A Bluetooth connection is disc onnected automatica lly after sending or receiving data. On ly Nokia PC Suite and som e enhancements such as headse ts may maintain a connection even if not actively used. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 103
Pair devices Open the paired devices tab. Before pairing, decide on your own passcode (1-16 digits), and agree with the user of th e other device to use the same code. Devices that do not have a user interface have a fixed passcode. Y ou need th e passco de o n l y w he n y o u c o nn e c t t h e devices for the first time. After pairing, it is possible to authorise the connection. Pa iring and authorising the connection makes connecting quicker and easi er, as you do not have to accept the connec tion between paired devices every time you establish a connection. The passcode for remote SIM a ccess must have 16 digi ts. 1. Select Option s > New paired device . The device star ts to search for Bluet ooth devices with in range. If you ha ve sent data using B luetooth be fore, a list of the previous search results is displayed. To search for more Bluetooth devices, select More devices . 2. Select the device wi th which you wa nt to pair, an d enter the passcode. The same passcod e must be entered to the other device as well. 3. Select Yes to make the connection between your device and the other dev ice automat ic, or No to confirm the connection manually every time a connection attempt is made. After pairing, the device is saved to the paired devices page. To give a nickname to the paired device, select Optio ns > Assign short nam e . The nickname is only displayed in your device. To delete a pairing, select the device whose pairing you want to delete and Options > Dele te . To delete all pairings, select Options > Delete all . I f you are currently connected to a device and cancel the pairing with that device, pairing is removed immediately, and th e connection is ended. To allow a paired device to connect automati cally to your device, select Set as authorised . Connections between your device and the other device can be made with out your knowledge. No separate acce ptance or authorisation is needed. Use this status for your own devices, such as your compatible headset or comput er, or devices that belong to someone you trust. If you want to accept connection requests from the other device sepa rately every time, select Set as unauthorised . To use a Bluetooth audio enha ncement such as a Bluetooth handsfree or headset, you need to pair your device wit h the enhancement. See the enhanc ement user guide for the passcode and further instruction s. To connect to th e audio enhancement, switch on the enhancem ent. So me audio enhancements conn ect automatically to your device. Otherwise open the paired devices tab, scroll to the enhancement, and select Options > Connect to audio device . Security tips When you are not using Bluetooth connectivity, select Bluetooth > Off or My phone's visibility > Hidden . Do not pair with an unknown device. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 104
SIM access profile With the SIM access profile, you can access the SIM card of your device fr om a comp atible car kit device. This way, you do not need a separate SIM card to access SIM card data and connect to the GSM network. To use the SIM access profile, you need the following: ⢠Compatible car kit device that supp orts Bluetooth wire less technology ⢠Valid SIM card in your device When the wireless device is in the remote SIM mode, you can only use a compatible conn ected accessory, s uch as a car kit, to make or receive calls. Your wireless device will not make any calls, except to the emergency numbers programmed into your device, while in this mode. To make calls, you must first leave the remote SIM mode. If the device has been locked, ente r the lock code to unlock it first. For more information about car kit devices and compatibility with your device, see the Nokia web site and your car kit user guide. Use the SIM access p rofile 1. Select Menu > Connec tivity > Bluetooth > Remote SIM mode > On . 2. Activate Bluet ooth in the car kit. 3. Use your car kit to start a search for compatible devices. For instructions, see the us er guide of your car kit. 4. Select your device from the list of compatible devices. 5. To pair the devices, ente r the Bluetooth passcode shown on the display of the car kit to your device. Tip: If you have already accessed the S IM card from the car kit with the act ive user prof ile, the car kit searc hes automatically for a device with the SIM card. I f it finds your device, and automatic authorisation is activated, the car kit auto matically con nects to the GSM network when you switch on the car ignit ion. When you activate the remote SIM access profi le, you can use applications on your device that do not need network or SIM services. To make connections between yo ur device and the car kit without sep arate acceptance or authorisation, select Menu > Connectivity > Bluetooth , and open the paired devices tab. Scroll to the car kit, press the scroll key, and enter the Bluetooth passcode. When the device as ks to make the connection automati c, select Yes . If you select No , connection requests from this car kit must be accepted separately every time. To end the remote SIM access connecti on from your device, select Menu > Connecti vity > Bluetooth > Remote SIM mode > Off . Wireless LAN Note: U s i n g W L A N m a y b e r es t r i ct e d i n s o m e c o u n t r i e s. For example, in France, you are only allowed to use WLAN indoors. For more information, contact your local authorities. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 105
Your device can detect and co nnect to a wireless local area network (WLAN). To use a WL AN, a network must be available in the location and your devi ce must b e connected to it. WLAN connectio ns To use a WLAN, you must create an in ternet access point in a WLAN. Use the access point for a pplications that need t o connect to the internet. A WLAN connection is es tablished when you create a data co nnection using a WLAN access point. The active WLA N connec tion is ended when you end the data connection. You can also end the connection manually. You can use a W LAN during a vo ice call or when packet data connection is active. You can only be connected to one WLAN access point device at a time, but several app lications can use the same internet access point. When the device is in the Offli ne profile, you can still use a WLAN, if available. Remember to comp ly with any applicable safety requirements when es tablishin g and using a WLAN connection. If you move the device to an other location within the WLAN and out of range of a WLAN access point, the roaming functionality can automatica lly connect your device to another access point that belongs to the same WL AN. As long as you remain within range of access points that belong to the same network, your device can st ay connected to the network. Tip: To check the unique media access control (MAC) address that identifies yo ur device, for example to configure the MAC a ddress of your device to a WLAN router, enter *#62209526# in the home screen. The MAC address is displayed. See WLAN availability To have your device show WLAN availability, select Menu > Tools > Sett ings > Connec tion > Wireless LAN > Show WLAN availability . If WLAN is available, is shown on the display. Tip: You can also sc an for networks in range. WLAN wizard Select Menu > Connectivity > WLAN wiz. . The WLAN wizard helps you fi nd and connect to a wireless LAN. When you open the application, your device starts to scan for available WLANs and lists them. To update the list of available WLAN s, select Options > Refresh . To mark up WLANs in the list of found networks, select Filter WLAN networks . Th e selected networks are filtered out the next time the applic ation searches for wireless LANs. To start or continue browsing the web using the access point of the WLAN, scroll to the desired network, an d select Options > Start web browsing or Cont.web browsing . To disconnect th e active co nnection to the WLAN, select Options > Disconnect WLAN . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 106
To view the details of the WLAN, select Options > Details . To save the acce ss point of the WLAN , select Options > Define access point . Important: Always enable one of the available encryption methods to increase the security of your wireless LAN connection. Using encryp tion reduces the risk of unauthorised access to your data. Use the wizard on the home screen On the home screen, the WLAN wizard shows the statu s of your WLAN conn ections and ne twork searches. To view the available options, scroll to th e row showing the status, and press the scroll key . Depending on the status, you can start the web browser using a WLAN connection, connect to your net call service, disconnect from a WLAN, search for WLANs, or set the network scanning on or off. If WLAN scanning is off and you ar e not connected to any WLAN, WLAN scanning off is displayed on the home screen. To set scanning on and search for available WL ANs, scroll to the row showing the status, and pr ess the scroll key. To start a s earch for available WLANs, scroll to the row showing the status, press the scroll key, and select Search for WLAN . To set WLAN scanning off, scroll to the row showing the status, pres s the scroll key, and select Switch WLAN scan off . When Start we b browsing or Use for is selected, the WLAN wizard automatically creates an access point for the selected WLAN. The access point can also be used with other applications requiring WLAN connection. If you select a secured WLAN, you are asked to enter the relevant passcodes. To connect to a hidden network, you must enter the correct service set identifier (SSID). To use the found WLAN for a net call connection, scroll to the row showing the stat us, and press the s croll key. Select Use for , the desired net call service, and the WLAN to be used. Modem Select Menu > Connectivity > Modem . Together with a compa tible computer, you can use your device as a modem to connect to the web, for example. Before you can use your device as a mo dem é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 107
⢠You need an approp riate data comm unications softwa re on your computer, such as Nokia PC Suite. For more information, see the No kia PC Suite guide. ⢠You must subscribe to the appropriate network services from your service provider or internet service provider. ⢠You must have the appropriat e drivers installed on your computer. You must i nstall drivers for the ca ble connection, and you may need to install or update Bluetooth or infrared drivers. To connect the device to a compatible compu ter using infrared, press the scroll key. Ma ke sure the infrared ports of the device and computer are di rectly facing each other with no obstacles between them. To connect your device to a computer us ing Bluetooth wireless technology, initiate the connection from the computer. To activate Bluet ooth in your device, s elect Menu > Connectivi ty > Bluet ooth and select Bluet ooth > On . If you use a cable to connect your device to a computer, initiate the connection from the computer. You may not be able to use some of the other communication features when the device is used as a modem. Connection manager Select Menu > Connectivity > Co nn. mgr. . View and end active connections To see the open data connections, select Acti ve data connecti ons . To view detailed information about network connections, select a connection from the list and Options > Details . Th e type of information shown dep ends on the connection typ e. To end the selected network connection, select Options > Disconnect . To end all active network conn ections simultan eously, select Options > Disconnect all . Search for WLAN To search for WLAN s availa ble within range, select Availab le WLAN networks . The available WLANs are listed with their network mode (infrastructure or ad-hoc), signal strength, and network encryption indica tors, and whether your device has an active connection wit h the network. To view the details of a networ k, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To create an internet a ccess point for a network, select Options > Define access point . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 108
Security and data management Manage the data and software on your device, and take ca re of the security of the device and its contents. Important: Your device can only support one antivirus application. Having more than one appl ication with antivirus functionality could affect performance and operation or cause the device to stop functioning. Lock the device To prevent access to the conten ts of your device, lock the device when in home screen. Press the power key, select Lock phone , and enter your lock code. The default lock co de is 12345. To unlock, press the left selection key, enter your lock code, and press the scroll key. To change the lock code, select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Security > Phone and SIM card > Lock code . Enter the old code and then the new code twice. The new code can be 4-255 characters long. Both alphab ets and digits can be used, and both up percase and lowercase alphabet s are possible. You can also lock the device remotely by sending a text message to the device. To enable remote locking and to define the text for the message, select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Security > Phone and SIM ca rd > Allow remote l ock > Yes . Enter the remote lock message and confirm the message. Th e message must be at least 5 characters long. Memory card security Select Menu > Tools > Memory . You can protect a memory card with a password to prevent unauthorised access. To set a password, sele ct Optio ns > Set password . The password can be u p to 8 characters long and is case-sensitive . The password is stored i n your device. You do not need to enter it again while you use the memory card on the same device. If you use the memory card on another device, you a re asked for the password. Not all memory cards support password protection. To remove the memory card password, select Options > Remove pass word . When you remove the password, the data on the memory card is not protected against unauthorised use. To open a locked memory card, select Options > Unloc k memory card . Enter the password. If you cannot recall the password to unlock a locked memory card, you may reformat the card , in which case the card is unlocked and password remove d. Formatting a memory card destroys all data stored on the card. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 109
Encryption Select Menu > Tools > Encryptio n . Encrypt your device or memory ca rd to prevent outsiders from accessing your important information. Encrypt device memory or memory card To encrypt the device memory, select Phone memory . To encrypt the memory card, select Memory card and from the following: ⢠Encrypt without savi ng key â Encrypt the memory card without saving the encryption key. If you select this option, you cannot use the me mory card in other devices, and if you restore factory setti ngs, you cannot decry pt the memory card. ⢠Encrypt and save key â Encrypt the memory card and save the key manually in th e default folder. For security, store the key to a safe place outside the device. For example, you can send the key to your computer. Enter a pass phrase for the key and a name for the key file. The pass phrase should be long and complex. ⢠Encrypt with restored key â Encrypt the memory card with a key you have received. S elect the key file, and enter the pass phrase. Decrypt device memory or memory card Always remember to decrypt the device memory a nd/or the memory card before updating the device software. To decrypt the device memory, select Phone memo ry . To decrypt the memory card without destroying the encryption key, select Memory card > De crypt . To decrypt the memory card an d destroy the encryption key, select Memory card > Decrypt and turn off encrypti on . Fixed dialling Select Menu > Communic. > Contacts > Options > SIM contacts > Fixed dial contacts . With the fixed dialling service, you can restrict calls from your device to certain phone numbers. Not all SIM cards support the fixed dialling service. Contact your service provider for more information. 1. To restrict calls from your device, select Op tions > New SIM contact and enter the contact name and phone number to the list of numbers to which calls are allowed, or select Add from Cont acts to copy the conta ct from Contacts. To restrict calls by a country p refix, enter the country prefix in the list of numbers. All phone numbers to which calls are allowed must start with this country prefix. 2. Select Options > Activate f ixed dialling . You need your PIN2 code to activ ate and deactivate fixed di alling or edit é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 110
your fixed dialling contacts. Contact your service provider if you do not have the code. To cancel the service, select Options > Deactivate fixed dialling . Tip: To send text mess ages to the SIM con tacts while the fixed dialling service is active, you need to add the text message centre number to the fixed dialling list. Certificate manager Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Ge neral > Security > Certific ate manage ment . Digital certificates are used to verify the origins of software but do not guarantee safety. Th ere are four different types of certificates: authority certific ates, personal certificates, trusted site certificates, and devi ce certificates. During a secure connection, a server may send a server certificate to your device. Upon receipt, it is ch ecked through an authority certificate stored in your device. You receive notification if the identity of the server is no t authentic or i f you do no t have the correct certificate in your device. You can download a certificate from a web site, or receive a certificate as a message. Certif icates s hould be used when you connect to an online b ank or a remote server to transfer confidential information. They should also be used if you want to reduce the risk of viru ses or other malicious software, and to check the authenticity of software when you download and install software to your device. Tip: When you add a new certificat e, check its authenticity. View certificate details You can only be sure of the co rrect identity of a server when the signature and the validit y period of a server certificate have been checked. To view certificate details, open a certificate folder, and select a certificate and Options > Certific ate details . One of the following notes may appear: ⢠Certificate n ot trusted â You have not set any application to use the certi ficate. You may want to change the trust settings. ⢠Expire d certific ate â The period of validity has ended for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate n ot valid yet â The period of validity has not yet begun for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate corrupted â The certificate cannot be used. Contact the certificate issuer. Certificate trust settings Trusting a cert ificate means that you au thorise it to verify web pages, e-mail servers, software packages, and other data. Only trusted certific ates ca n be used to verify services and software. Important: Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote co nnections and software installation considerably smaller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer an y protection by itself; the certificate manager must co ntain correct, authentic, or é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 111
trusted certificates for increa sed secur ity to be available. Certificates have a restricted li fetime. If "Expired certificate" or "Certificate not valid yet" is shown, even if the certificate should be valid, chec k that the curren t date and tim e in your device are correct. Before changing any cert ificate settings, you must make sure that you really trust the own er of the certificate an d that the certificate really belong s to th e listed owner. To change the trus t settings, select a certificate and Options > Trust sett ings . Select an application field and press the scroll key to select Yes or No . You cannot cha nge the trust settings of a personal certificate. Depending on the certificate, a list of applications that can use the certificate is displayed: ⢠Symbian installatio n â New Symbian operating system application. ⢠Internet â E-mail and graphics. ⢠App. installat ion â New Java⢠application. ⢠Online certif. check â Online certificate status protocol. Security modules Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Ge neral > Security > Security module . View and edit security modules To view or edit a security mo dule, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To view detailed information about a security module, select Options > Security details . To edit the PIN codes for the security module, select Module PIN to edit the PIN code for the security module or Signing PIN to edit the PIN code for digital signatures. You may not be able to change these co des for all security modules. The key store contains the cont ents of the security module. To delete the key store , select Key store , select the desired key store, and Options > Delete . Y ou may no t be able to delete the key store of all security modules. Back up data It is recommended to back up device memory regularly t o the memory card or a compatible computer. To back up information from the device memory to a memory card, select Menu > Tools > Memory > Options > Back up phone memory . To restore information from the memory card to the device memory, select Menu > Tools > Memory > Options > Restore from card . You can also connect your device to a compatible computer and use Nokia PC Suit e to bac k up data. Application manager Select Menu > Installation s > App. mgr. . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 112
You can install two types of ap plications and so ftwar e on your device: ⢠Applications and soft ware spec ifically intended for your device or compatible with the Symbian operating system. These software ins tallation files have the extension .sis or .si sx. ⢠Java ME⢠applications comp atible with the Symbia n operating system. The Java a pplication installation file extensions are .jad or .jar. Installation files ma y be transferred to your device from a compatible comput er, downloaded during browsing, or sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, or with Bluetooth. During the installation, the devi ce checks the integrity of the package to be installed. The device shows information about the checks being carried out, and you are given options to continue or cancel the installation. If you install applications that require a network connection, note that the power consumption of your device may increase when you us e these applications. Tip: When browsing web pages, you can download an installation file and install it immediately. Note, however, that the connection runs in the background during the installation. Install applications Important: Only install and use applications and other software from trusted sources, such a s applications that are Symbian Signed or hav e passed the Java Verified⢠testing. To download and install soft ware from the web, select Download apps. . Select the application and Op tions > Install . To view the details of an installed software package, select the application and Opt ions > View details . To view the installation log, select Optio ns > View log . A list shows what software has be en installed and removed, and the date of the ins tallation or removal. If you encounter problems with the device after installing a software pa ckage, use this list to find out which software package may be the cause of the problem. The info rmation in this list may also help you pinpoint problems that are caused by software packages that are incomp atible with each other. To remove software, se lect Options > Remove . If you remove software, you can only reinstall it by using the original software package file, or by restoring a full backup that contains the removed software p ackage. If you remove a softwar e package, you m ay no longer be able to open files created with th at software. If another software package depends on the software packa ge that you removed, the other so ftware pa ckage ma y stop wo rking. Re fer to the documentation of the installed software package for details. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 113
Installation settings To modify the installation s ettings, select Options > Settings and from the following: ⢠Software instal lation â Select to install signed applications only or all applications. ⢠Online certificate check â T o check the validity of certificates when an applicat ion is installed, select On . If validity cannot be verified, you are asked if you want to continue installa tion. ⢠Default web address â The vali dity of a certificate is checked from the default addres s if the certificate does not include its own web address. To change the default address, select Default web addre ss , and enter the new address. Java security settings To specify security sett ings for a Java applicat ion, select Options > Settings . You can define which functions the Java application can access. The value that you ca n set for each functionality depends on the pro tection doma in of the software package. ⢠Access point â Select an access p oint that the application may use when making network connections. ⢠Network acc ess â Allow the application to create a data connection to the network. ⢠Messaging â Allow the app lication to send messages. ⢠Application auto-start â Allow the app lication to st art automatica lly. ⢠Connectivity â Allow the applica tion to activate a data connection, such as a Bluetooth connection . ⢠Multimed ia â Allow the application to use the multimedia features of your device. ⢠Read user data â Allow the applicat ion to read your calendar entries, contacts, or any other personal data. ⢠Edit u ser data â Allow the application to add personal data, such as entries to Contacts. ⢠Positioni ng â Allow the application to use the location data in your device. ⢠Landmarks â Allow the application to use the la ndmarks in your device. You can define how you are prom pted to confirm the Ja va application's access to the device functions. Select one of the following values: ⢠Ask every time â Require the Java a pplication to ask for your confirmation each time it uses the functionality. ⢠Ask first time â Require the Java application to ask for initial confirmation to use the functionality. ⢠Always allowed â Allow the Java applicati on to use the functionality without your confirmation. The securit y settings help protect your device ag ainst harmful Java applications that m ay use the functions of your device without your permis sion. Only select Always allowed if you know the supplier and trustworthiness of the application. ⢠Not allowed â Prevent the Java ap plication from using the functionality. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 114
Activation keys Select Menu > Tools > Actv. keys . Some media files, such as imag es, music, or video clips, are protected by digital usage rig hts. The activat ion keys for such files may allow or restrict their usage. For example, with some activation keys you may listen to a music tra ck only a limited number of ti mes. During one playba ck session you may rewind, fast-forward, or pause th e track, but once you stop it, you have used on e of the instances allowed. Use activation keys Digital rights manag ement (DRM) protected content comes with an ass ociated activ ation key th at defines your rights to use the content. If your device has OMA DRM-protected cont ent, to back up both the activation keys a nd the content, use the backup feature of Nokia Ovi Suite. If your device has WMDRM-protected c ontent, both the activation keys and the cont ent will be lost if the device memory is formatted. Y ou may also lose the activation keys and the content if the files on you r device get corrupted. Losing the activati on keys or the content may limi t your ability to use the sa me content on your device agai n. For more information, contact your service provider. Some activat ion keys ma y be connected to a speci fic SIM card, and the protected content can be accessed only if the SIM card is inserted in the device. To view your activation keys by type, select Valid keys , Invalid keys , or Not in use . To view the key details, select Options > Key details . The following details are displayed for each media file: ⢠Status â The status is Acti vation key is val id , Activation key expire d , or Activation key not yet valid . ⢠Content se nding â Allowed means that you can send the file to another device. Not allowed means that you cannot send the file to another device. ⢠Content in phone â Yes means that the file is in the device and the path of the file is displayed. No means that the related file is not currently in the device. To activate a key, go to the Activation keys main view, and select Invalid keys > Option s > Get act ivation key . Establish a network connect ion at the prompt, and you are directed to a web site where yo u can purchase rights to the media. To remove file rights, open the valid keys tab or the keys not in use tab, scroll to the desired file, and select Option s > Delete . If there are several rights related to the same media file, all the rights are deleted. The group key view displays all of the files related to a group right. If you have downloaded multiple media files with the same rights, they are all displa yed in this view. You can open the group view from either the va lid keys or invalid keys tabs. To access these files, open the group rights folder. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 115
Data synchronisation Select Menu > Tools > Sync . With Sync, you can sy nchronise your contacts, calenda r entries, or notes with corre sponding applications on a compatible computer or remote internet server. Your synchronisation settings are saved in a synchronisation profile. The Sync application uses SyncML technology fo r remote synchronisation. For information on SyncML compatibility, contact the supplier of th e applications with which you want to synchroni se your device. You may rec eive the sy nchronis ation settings as a message from your service provider. Th e available applications you ca n synchronise may vary. C ontact yo ur service provider for more information. Create a synchr o nisation profile There is a Nokia PC Suite sync hronisation profile available in your device. You d o not need to edit it if you synch ronise your device with a computer usin g Nokia PC Suite. To create a new profile, select Options > New sync profile and as sign a name fo r the profile, select the applications to synchronise with the profile, and specify the needed connection settings. Contact your service provider for details. Select app lications to synchronise 1. To select the applications to synchronise with a synchronisation profile, select Optio ns > Edit sync profile > Applications . 2. Select the desired application, and select Include in sync > Yes . 3. Specify the Remote data base and Synchronisat ion type setting s. Synchronisation connection settings To define the connection settings of a new profile, select Options > New sync prof ile > Connection settings and define the following settings: ⢠Server ve rsion â Select the SyncM L version you can use with the remote server. ⢠Server ID â Enter the server ID of the remote server. This setting is only available if you select 1.2 a s the SyncML version. ⢠Data bearer â Select the data bearer to connect to the remote server duri ng synchronisation. ⢠Access point â Select the a ccess point to use for the synchronisation connection, or create a new access point. You can also choose to be as ked for the access point every time you start synchronising. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 116
⢠Host address â Enter the web address of the server that contains the database wit h which you w ant to sync hronise your device. ⢠Port â Enter the port num ber of the remote database server. ⢠User nam e â Enter your user name t o identify your device to the server. ⢠Password â E n t e r y o u r p a s s w o r d t o i d e n t i f y yo u r d ev ic e to the server. ⢠Allow sync request s â To allow synchronisation to start from the remote database server, select Yes . ⢠Accept all sync requests â To have your device ask for your confirmation before accepting synchronisation from the server, select No . ⢠Network aut henticati on â To authenticate your device to the network before synchronisation, select Yes . Enter your network user name and network password. Mobile VPN Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > VPN . The Nokia mobile virtual privat e network (VPN) client creates a secure connection to compatible corporate intranet and services, such as e- mail. Your device connects from a mobile network, through the intern et, to a corporate VP N gateway that acts as a front door to the compatible corp orate network. VPN client uses IP Security (IPSec) technology . IPSec is a framework of open standards for supporting secure exchange of data over IP networks. VPN policies define the method used by the VPN client and a VPN gateway to au thenticate each oth er, and the encryption algorithms that they use to he lp protect the confidenti ality of data. Contact your company's IT department for a VPN policy. To install and configure the VPN client, certificates, and policies, contact the IT administrator of your organisation. Manage VPN Select VPN management , and from the following: ⢠VPN policies â Install, view, and update VPN policies. ⢠VPN policy servers â Edit the connection settings of VPN policy servers from wh ich yo u can install and update VPN policies. A policy server refers to a Nokia Security Service Manager (NSSM), which is not necessarily required. ⢠VPN log â View the lo g for your VPN policy installations, updates and synchronisations, and other VPN connections. Create VPN access points An access point is where your phone connects to the network. To use e-mail and multimedia services or to browse web pages you must first define inte rnet access points for these servic es. VPN ac cess p oints pair VPN p olicie s with re gular internet access points to create secure connections. Your service provider may preset some or all acces s points for your device, and you may not be ab le to create, edit, or remove them. Contact your company's IT department for the correct settings. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 117
Open a destination, select a VPN access point, sele ct Edit , and define the following: ⢠Connection name â Enter a name for the VPN access point. ⢠VPN policy â Select the VPN policy to combine with the internet access point. ⢠Internet access po int â Select the internet access point with which to combine the VPN policy to crea te secure connections for data transfer. ⢠Proxy server addres s â Enter the proxy server address of the priva te network. ⢠Proxy port numb er â Enter the proxy port number. Use a VPN connection in an application You may have to prove your identity when you log on to the enterprise network. Contact your company's IT department for the credentials. To use a VPN connection in an application, the applicati on must be associated wit h a VPN access p oint. Tip: You can configure the application's connection setting to Always ask , in which case you select the VPN access point from a list of connections when a connection is established. 1. In the application in which you want to create a VPN connection, select a VPN acces s point as the access point. 2. If you are using legacy authentication, enter your VPN user name and passcode or password. I f the SecurID token has become out of synchronis ation with the clock of the ACE/Server, enter the next pass code. If you are using certificate-based authenticat ion, you may h ave to enter the key store password. Barcode reader Select Menu > Tools > Barcode . Use the Barcode reader applicat ion to decode barcodes. The codes may contain in formation such as URL links, e -mail addresses, phone numbers, and busin ess cards. T he Barcode reader does not support 1D codes. The Barco de reader uses the camera in your device to scan codes. To scan a code, select Scan code . After a valid code is detected in the viewfinder, the decode d information appears on the dis pl ay . To sc an a co de th at i s lo cated at some distance from your device, deactivate the close-up mode by selecting Options > Deactiv. close-up mode . To save the scanned data, select Options > Save . The data is saved in the BCR file format. To save scanned data to Contacts, s elect Options > Add to Contacts or Save busines s card , depending on the data you are saving. If the data you scann ed includes a mobile phone number or an e-mail addres s, you can call or send a m essage to the number or send an e-ma il to the addres s by selecting Options > Call or Opti ons > Creat e message: . If the dat a you scanned includes a URL link, you can open it by selectin g Options > Open link . To view previously saved, decoded information, select Saved data in the main view. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 118
Settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings . You can define a nd modify various setti ngs of your device. Modifying these settings affects the operation of your devi ce across sever al applications. Some settings may be preset fo r the device or sent to you in a special messag e by your se rvice provider. You may not be able to change such settings. Select the setting you want t o edit to do the following: ⢠Switch between two values , such as on or off. ⢠Select a value from a list. ⢠Open a text editor to enter a value. ⢠Open a slider to decrease or increase the value by scrolling left or right. General settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General . Select from the following: ⢠Personalisation â Change the display settings and personalise the device. ⢠Date and time â Change the date and time. ⢠Slide handling â Change the slide settings. ⢠Enhancemen t â Define the settings for your enhancements. ⢠Security â Define the s ecurity settings. ⢠Factory settings â R estore the original settings of the device. ⢠Positioni ng â Define the positioning method and server for GPS-based appl ications. Personalisation settings Select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > General > Personalisation . Display settings To turn the automatic display rotation on or off, select Display > Display ro tation . To select whet her you wa nt the image to change to full screen in the landscape mode, select Display > Turn to full v iew . To define the level of light that the device needs before switching on the backlight, select Display > Light sensor . To change the text size, select Display > Fo nt size . To adjust the length of time th e display can be left idle before the screen saver is activat ed, select Display > Power saver time-out . To select a welcome note or logo for the display, select Display > Welcome note / logo . You can either choose the default welcome note, enter your own text, or select an image. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 119
To set how quickly th e display dims after t he last keypre ss, select Display > Light time- out . Standby mode settings To select whether to use the home screen, select Home screen > Home scre en . To change the home screen mode setti ngs, select Home screen > Mode se ttings . To assign shortcuts for the device key s, select Home screen > Key shortcuts . These shortcuts are not available in the home screen. Tone settings To select a ringing tone for voice calls, select Tones > Ringing tone . To select a ringing tone for video calls, select Tones > Video call tone . To set the ringing type, select Tones > Ringing typ e . You can also set the device to sound a ringing t one that is a combination of the spoken name of the caller and the selected ringing tone, when someone from your contacts list calls you. Select Tones > Say caller's name . To set the volume level of the ringing tone, select Tones > Ringing volume . To set the v arious alert tones, select To nes > Message al ert tone , E-mail alert tone , Calendar alarm tone , or Clock alarm tone . To set the device to vibrate when you receive a call, select Tones > Vibrating alert . To set the volume level of the device keypad tones, select Tones > Keyp ad tones . To set the warning tones on or off, select Tones > Warning tones . To select whether you want the alarms and incomin g calls to be silenced when you turn the device face down, select Turn to silence . To select whether you want the alarms and incomin g calls to be silenced when you tap the device twice, s elect Tap to silence . Language settings To set the language used on the device display, se lect Langua ge > Pho ne langu age . To select the langua ge in which you write notes and messages, select Language > Writing language . To select whether to use the predic tive text i nput, selec t Langua ge > Pr edictive te xt . Notification light When you receive a message or miss a call, the scroll key starts blinking to indicate the even t. To set the length of time you want the scroll key to blink, select Notification light > Blink light for . To select of which events you want to be notified, select Notification light > Notified even ts . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 120
Settings for One-touch keys Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > One-touch keys . To select which application an d task is opened when you press a One-touch key, select the key and Options > Open . To restore the preset appl ications and tasks, select Restore defaults . Date and time settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Date and time . To set the current date and time, select Date and Time . To define your time zone, select Time zone . To update the time, date, an d time zone information automatic ally (network ser vice), select Network operato r time > Auto-update . To select whether to us e the 12-hour or 24-hour clo ck system and with which symbol to sepa rate hours and min utes, select Time format and Time separator . To determine the date format and separator, select Date format and Date separat or . To define the clock type, s elect Clock type > Analogue or Digital . To select the tone for the alarm clock, s elect Clock alarm tone . To determine the week days that are work days for you, select Workdays . Slide settings Select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > General > Slide handling . To select whether you want to answer a call by opening the slide, select Openi ng the s lide . To select whether you want to end a call by closing the slide, select Closing the slide . To select whether you want to lock the keypad when you close the slide, select Keyguard activation . Enhancement settings Select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > General > Enhancement . Common enhancement settings With most enhancements, you ca n do the following: To determine which profile is activated when you attach an enhancement to your device, select the enhancement and Default profile . To let the device an swer phon e calls automatically after 5 seconds when an enhancem ent is atta ched, select Automatic answer > On . If the ringing type is set to Beep once or Silent in the selected profile, the automatic answer is disabled. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 121
To illuminate the device w hile it is attached to an enhancement, select Lights > On . E-mail key settings To select which mailbox to open with the e-mail key, select E-mail key settings > E-mail key , and press the scroll key. Security settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Security . Define the following security settings: ⢠Phone and SIM card â Ad just the security settings for your device and SIM card. ⢠Certificate management â Manage your security certificates. ⢠Security module â Manage your security module. Avoid using codes that are similar to emergency numbers to prevent accidental dialling of the emergency number. Codes are shown as asterisks. When you change a code, enter the current code, then the new code twice. Device and SIM card security To change the PIN code, select Phone an d SIM card > PIN code . The new code must be 4 to 8 digits long. The PIN code protects your SIM card against unauthorised use and is provided with the SIM card. A f ter three consecutive incorrect PIN code entries, the code is bloc ked, and you need to use the PUK code to unblock it before you can use the SIM card again. To set the key pad to lock auto matically after a defin ed period, select Phone and SIM card > Keypad autolock period . To set a time-out after whic h th e device is automa tically locked and can be used only if the correct lock code is entered, select Pho ne and SIM card > Phone autolock pe riod . Enter a number for the time-out in minutes, or select None to set off the autolock period. When the device is locked, you can still answer incoming calls, and calls may still be possible to the official emergency nu mber programmed into your device. To set a new lock code, select Phone and SIM car d > Lock code . The preset lock code is 12345. Enter the current code and then the new code twice. The new code can be 4-255 characters long. Both alph abets and digits can be used, and both uppercase and lowercase alphabets are possible. The device notifies you if the lock code is not properly format ted. Restore original settings To restore the original device settings, select Factory settings . To do this , you need yo ur device lock c ode. After resetting, the device may take a longer time to p ower on. Documents, contact information, calendar entries, and files are unaffected. Telephone settings Select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > Phone . Select from the following: ⢠Call â Define general call settings. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 122
⢠Call divert â Define your call divert settings. See "Call divert" , p. 77 . ⢠Call barring â Define your call barring set tings. See "Call barring" , p. 78 . ⢠Network â Adjust the network settings. Call settings To display your phone n umber to the person you are calling, select Call > Send my caller ID > Yes . To let the network determine whether your ca ller ID is sent, select Set by network . To display your net call addres s to the person you are calling using a net call, select Call > Send my internet call ID > Yes . To be notified of a new incoming call while you have a call in progress, se lect Call > Call waitin g > Options > Activate . To check if the function is ac tive on the network, select Options > Check status . To select whether net calls alert or not, select Call > Internet call alert . You are notified of missed net calls with a notification. To set the default call type, select Call > Default call type and select Vo ice cal l if you make a GSM calls, or Intern et call if you make net calls. To send a text message automa tically to the person who is calling you informing why y ou cannot answ er the incoming call, select Call > Reject call with SMS > Yes . To set the tex t for the message, se lect Call > Message text . To set off the contact search on the home scree n, select Call > Contact search > Off . Network settings Select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > Phone > Network . To select the network mode, select Network mode and Dual mode , UMTS , o r GSM . In the dual mode, the device switches automatically between networks. Tip: UMTS enables faster data tran sfer, but may increase the demand on ba ttery power and reduce the battery life. In regions close to both GSM and UMTS networks, selecting Dual mode may cause constant jumping between the two networks, which also increases the demand on batte ry power. To select the operator, select Operato r selection and Manual to choose from available networks, or Automatic to have the device select t he network autom atically. To set t he dev ice to indica te whe n it is used in Micr o Cell ular Network (MCN), select Cell info display > On . Connection settings Select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > Connection . Select from the following: ⢠Bluetooth â Edit the Bluetooth settings. See "Send and receive data with Bluetooth" , p. 103 . ⢠USB â Edit th e data cable setti ngs. See "Data cable" , p. 10 1 . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 123
⢠Access points â Set up new or edit existi ng access points. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to create, edit, or remove them. ⢠Packet d ata â Determine when pa cket data connections are used, and enter the access point if you use your device as a modem for a computer. ⢠Wireless LAN â Determine if the device displays an indicator when a WLAN is available, and how often the device searches for networks. ⢠SIP settings â View or create session initiation protocol (SIP) profiles. ⢠Internet tel . â Define settings for net calls. ⢠Configurations â Vi ew and delete trusted servers from which your device may receive configuration settings. ⢠APN control â Restrict packet data connections. See "Restrict packet data" , p. 128 . This option is only available when a USIM card that supports this feature is inserted. Access points Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points . An internet access point is a collection of settings, which define how the device creates a data connection t o the network. To use e-mail and mult imedia services or to browse web pages, you must first defi ne access points for these services. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to create, edit, or remove them. To create a new access point, select Options > New access point o r s e l e c t a n e x i s t i n g a c c e s s point fr om the list and then Options > Duplicate access point to use the acc ess point as a basis for the new one . Packet data (GPRS) settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Packet data . Your device supports packet da ta connections, su ch as GPRS in the GSM network. When you are using your device in GSM and UMTS networks, it is poss ible to have multiple data connections active at the same time; access points can share a data connection, and data co nnections remain active, for example, during voice calls. See "Connection manager" , p. 108 . To define the packet data settings, select Packet data connecti on and select When available to register the device to the packet data network w hen you switch the device on in a supported network, or When ne eded to establish a packet data connect ion only when an application or action requires it. Select Access point and enter the access point name provided by your service provider to use the device as a packet data modem to your com puter. To use a high-speed data co nnection, select High s peed packet access > Enabled . These settings affect all ac cess points for packet data connections. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 124
WLAN settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Wireless LAN . To have an indicator displa yed when there is a WLAN available in your curre nt location, select Show WLAN availability > Yes . To select the interval for your device to scan for availa ble WLANs and update the indicator, select Scan for networks . This setting is not ava ilable unless you select Show WLAN availability > Yes . Advanced WLAN settings Select Options > Advanced settings . The advanced WLAN settings are no rmally defined autom atically, and changin g them is not recommended. To edit the settings manually, select Automatic configuration > Disabled , and define the following: ⢠Long re try lim it â Enter the ma ximum number of transmission attempts if the device does not receive a receiving acknowledgement signal from the network. ⢠Short retry limit â Enter the maximum number of transmission attempts if the device does not receive a clear-to-send signal from the n etwork. ⢠RTS threshold â Select the data packet size at which the WLAN access point device issu es a request to send before sending the packet. ⢠TX power level â Select the power level of your device when sending data. ⢠Radio meas urements â Enable or disable the radio measurements. ⢠Power saving â Select whether to use the WLAN power saving mechanism to save the power in t he device battery. Using the power saving mech anism enhances the battery performance but may weaken WLAN interoperability. To restore all settings to their original values, select Options > Restore default s . WLAN security settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points > Option s > Ne w access point , or select an access point and Options > Edit . In the access point setting s, select WLAN security mode and the desired mode. WEP security settings Select WEP as the WLAN security mode. The wired equivalent privacy (WEP) encryption method encrypts data before it is transmitted. Access to the network is denied to users who do not have the required WEP keys. When the WEP security mode is in use, and your device receives a data packet not en crypted with the WEP keys, the data is discarded. In an ad-hoc network, all devices must use the sa me WEP key. Select WLAN securi ty settings and from the following: ⢠WEP key in use â Select the desired WEP key. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 125
⢠Authenticati on type â Select Open or Shared . ⢠WEP key settings â Edit the settings for t he WEP key. WEP key settings In an ad-hoc network, all devices must use the same WEP key. Select WLAN securit y settings > WEP key settings and from the following: ⢠WEP encryption â Select the desired WEP encryption key length. ⢠WEP key format â Select whether you want to enter the WEP key data in ASCII or Hexadecimal format. ⢠WEP key â Enter the WEP key data. 802.1x security settings Select 802.1x as the W LAN security mode. 802.1x authenticates and authorises devices to access a wireless network, and prevents access if the authorisation process fails. Select WLAN securit y settings and from the fo llowing: ⢠WPA/WPA2 â Sel ect EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) or Pre-shared key (a secret key used for device identification). ⢠EAP plug-in settings â I f you selected WPA/WP A2 > EAP , select which EAP pl ug-ins defined in you r device to use with the access point . ⢠Pre-shared key â I f you selected WPA/WP A2 > Pre- shared key , enter the shared private key that identifies your device to the WLAN to which y ou connect. WPA security settings Select WPA/WP A2 as the WLAN security mode. Select WLAN securi ty settings and from the following: ⢠WPA/WP A2 â Select EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) or Pre-shared key (a secret key used for device identification). ⢠EAP plug-in settings â If you select W PA/WPA2 > EAP , select which EAP plug-ins defined in your device t o use with the access point. ⢠Pre-shared key â I f you select WPA/WPA2 > Pre- shared key , enter the shared private key that identifies your device to the WLAN to which you connect. ⢠WPA2 onl y mode â To allow both TKIP and AES (Advanced Encryption Stan dard) encryption, select Off . To allow AES only, select On Wireless LAN plugins Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points . The EAP (extensible authentica tion protocol) plug-ins are used in wireless networks to authenticate wireless devices and authentication serv ers, and the different EAP plug-ins make possible the use of va rious EAP methods (network service). You can view the EAP plug-ins currently installed in your device (network service). é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 126
EAP plug-ins 1. To define the EAP plug-in settin gs, select Options > New access point and define an access point that uses WL AN as a data bearer. 2. Select 802.1x or WPA/WPA2 as the security mode. 3. Select WLAN secu rity settings > WPA/WPA2 > EAP > EAP plug-in setti ngs . Use EAP plug-ins To use an EAP plug-in wh en you connect to a WLAN us ing the access point, select th e desired plug-in and Options > Enable . The EAP plug-ins enabled for use with this a ccess point have a check mar k next to them . To not use a plug-in , select Options > Disable . To edit the EAP plug-in s ettings, select Op tions > Edit . To change the priority of th e EAP plug-in s ettings, s elect Options > Raise priorit y to attempt to use the plug- in before other plug-ins when con necting to the network w ith the access point, or Optio ns > Lower priority to use this plug-in for network auth entication after attemptin g to use other plug-ins . See the device help for more information on EAP plugins. Session initiation protocol (SIP) settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > SIP settings . Session initiation protocols (SIP) are used for creating, modifying, and terminating ce rtain types of communication sessions with one or more part icipants (network service). Typical communication session s a re video sharing an d net calls. SIP profiles include setti ngs for these ses sions. The SIP profile used by default fo r a communication session is underlined. To create a SIP profile, select Options > New SIP profile > Use default profil e or Use existin g profile . To select the SIP profile you want to use by default for communication sessions, select Options > Defaul t profile . Edit SIP profiles Select Options > Edit , and select from the following: ⢠Profile name â Enter a name for the SIP profile. ⢠Service profi le â Select IETF or Nokia 3GPP . ⢠Default access point â Select the access point to use for the internet connection. ⢠Public user name â Enter your user name received from your service provider. ⢠Use compression â Select if compression is used. ⢠Registration â Select the registration mode. ⢠Use security â Select if security negotiation is used. ⢠Proxy server â Enter the proxy server settings for this SIP profile. ⢠Registrar server â Enter the registration server settings for this SIP profile. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 127
Edit SIP proxy servers Select Options > New SIP prof ile or Edit > Proxy server . Proxy servers are intermediate servers between a browsing service and its users used by some service providers. These servers may provide additional security a nd speed up access to the servic e. Select from the following: ⢠Proxy server addres s â Enter the host name or IP address of the proxy server in use. ⢠Realm â Enter the proxy server realm. ⢠User nam e and Passwor d â Enter your user name and password for the proxy server. ⢠Allow loose routing â Select if loose routing is allowed. ⢠Transport type â Select UDP , Auto , or TCP . ⢠Port â Enter the port number of the proxy server. Edit registration servers Select Options > New SIP profile or Edit > Registrar server . Select from the following: ⢠Registrar server address â Enter the host name or IP address of the registrar server in use. ⢠Realm â Enter the registrar server realm. ⢠User nam e and Passwor d â Enter your user name and password for the registrar server. ⢠Transport type â Select UDP , Auto , or TCP . ⢠Port â Enter the port number of the registrar server. Net call settings Select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > Connection > Internet tel. . To create a new net call profile, select Options > New profile . To edit an existing profile, select Options > Edit . Configuration settings Select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > Connection > Configurations . You can receive messages from your service provider or company information manag ement containing configuration settings for trusted servers. Th ese settings are automatically saved in the Co nfigurations folder. You may receive configuration settings fo r access points, multimedia, or e-mail services, and synchron isation settings from trusted servers. To delete configurations for a trusted serve r, select Options > Delete . The configuration settings for other applications provided by this server are also deleted. Restrict packet data Select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > Connection > APN control . With the access point control se rvice, you can restrict packet data connections from your de vice to certain access points é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 128
only. Your SIM card may not support the access point control service. Contact your serv ice provider for more information. To restrict the packet data connections from your device, select Op tions > Activate restrictions . You need your P IN2 code to activate and deactivate acces s point control or to edit the packet data ac cess points on the co ntrol list. To add access points that can be used for pa cket data connections to the control list, select Options > Add name manually . To enable connections to an operator-provided access point, create an empty access point. To remove acces s points from the list, select Option s > Remove . Application settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Applicat ions . Select an application from the list to adjust its settings. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 129
Shortcuts Here are some of the available keyboard shortcuts in your device. Shortcuts can m ake th e use of the applications more efficient. General shortcuts Power key Press and hold to switch your device on and off. Press once to switch between profiles. Home screen Call key Open the call log. 0 Press and hold to open your home p age in the web browser. # Press and hold to switch between the Silent and General profiles. 1 Press and hold to call your voice mailbox. Number key (2âÂÂ9) T o activate speed dialling, select Menu > Tools > Settings > Phone > Call > Speed dialling > On . Web * Zoom in the page. # Zoom out the page. 2 Open the search dialog. 8 View the page overview. 9 Open the dialog for entering a new web address. 0 Open the bookmarks folder. Image viewer Call key Send the image. 0 Zoom out. 5 Zoom in. 4 Scroll left in the zoomed image. 6 Scroll right in the zoomed image. 2 Scroll up in the zoomed image. 8 Scroll down in the zoomed image. 3 Rotate clockwise. 1 Rotate anticlockwi se. * Switch between the fu ll screen size and normal view. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 130
Glossary Glossary 3G 3rd generation mobile communications. A digital system for mo bile communi cations which aims at glo bal use and provides increased bandwidth. 3G lets a mobile device user access a wide variety of services, such as multimedia. Ad-hoc operating mode A WLAN network mode where two or more devices connect to each other using WLAN directly without a WLAN access point. Cookies Cookies are little pieces of information, given by the server to you, to store information about your vis its to a web site. When you accept cookies, the server is able to evaluate your use of the web s ite, what you are interested in, w hat you want to read, and so on. DNS Domain name serv ice. An internet service that trans lates domain names such as www.nokia.com into IP addresses such as 192.100.124.195 . Domain names are easier to remember but this translation is needed because the internet is based on IP addresses. DTMF tones Dual-tone multifrequen cy tones. The DTMF system is used by touch-tone telephones. DTMF assigns a specific freque ncy, or tone, t o e a c h k e y s o t h a t i t can easily be identified by a microprocess or. DTMF tones allo w you to communicate with voice mailboxes, computerised teleph ony systems, and so on. EAP Extensible authentica tion p rotocol. EAP plug-ins are used in wireless networks to authenticate wireless devices and authentication se rvers. EGPRS Enhanced GPRS. EGPRS is similar to GPRS, but it enables fast er connection. For availability and da ta transfer speed, contact your service provider. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 131
GPRS General packet radio se rvice. GPRS enables wireless access for mobile phones to data networks (network service). GPRS uses packet data technology where information is sent in short bursts of data over the mobile network. The benefit of sending data in packets is that the network is occupied only when sending or receiving data. As GPRS uses the network efficiently, it allows for quick da ta conn ection s etup and fast data transmiss ion speeds. You must subscribe to the GPRS service. For availability and su bscription to GP RS, contact your service provider. During a voice call, yo u cannot establish a GPRS connection, and any existing GPRS connection is put on hold unless the network supports du al transfer mode. GPS Global positioning system. GPS is a worldwide radio navigat ion system. HSDPA High-speed downlink packet access. HSDPA brings high-speed data delivery to 3G terminals, ensuring that users requiring effective multimedia capabilities benefit from data rates previously un available because of limitations in the radio access network. HTTP Hypertext t ransfer protocol. A document transfer protocol used in the web. HTTPS HTTP over a secure connection. IMAP4 Internet mail access p rotocol, version 4. A protocol used for accessing your remote mailbox. Internet access point An access point is where your device connects to a network. To use e-mail and multimedia services or to connect to the internet and browse web pages, you must first define internet access points for these services. Infrastructure operating mode A WLAN network mode where devices are connected to WLAN using a WL AN access point . PIN Personal identity number. The PIN code protects your device from unaut horised use. The PIN code is supplied with the SIM card. If the PIN cod e request is selected, the code is required each time the device is switched on. The PIN code must be 4 to 8 digits long. PIN2 The PIN2 code is supplied with some SIM cards. The PIN2 code is required to access certain function s supported by the SIM card. The length of the PIN2 code is 4 to 8 digits. POP3 Post office protocol, version 3. A common mail protocol that can be used for accessing your remote mailbox. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 132
PUK and PUK2 Personal Unblocking Key. PUK and PUK2 codes are required to change a blocked PI N code or PIN2 code, respectively. The length of the code is 8 digits. SIP Session Initiation Protocol. SIP is used for creating, modifying, and termin ating certain types of communication sessions with one or more participants. SSID Service set identifier. SSID is the name that identifies the specific WLAN. Streaming Streaming audio and video files means playing them directly from the web without downloading them first to your device. UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunications System. UM TS is a 3G mobile communication system. B esides voice and data, UMTS enables audio and video delivery to wireless devices. When you use your devi ce in GSM and UMTS networks, multiple data connections can be active at the same time, an d access points can share a data connection. I n the UMTS network, data connections remain active during voice calls. You can, for example, browse the web faster than previously possible while simultan eously speaking on the phone. UPIN PIN code used in UMTS network. UPUK UPIN Unblocking Key. UPUK code is requ ired to change a blocked UPIN code or PIN2 code. The length of the code is 8 digits. USIM SIM card used in UMTS network. USSD command A service request, such as request to activate an application or configure various settings remotely , that y ou can s end to yo ur operator or service provider with your device. VoIP Voice over IP technology. VoIP is a set of protocols that facilitate phone calls over an IP network, such as th e internet. VPN Virtu al private network. VPN creates a secure connection to compatible corporate intranet and services, such as e-ma il. WAP Wireless application protocol. WAP is an international stan dard for wireless communication. WEP Wired equivalent p rivacy. WEP is an encryption method that encryp ts data before it is transmitted in WLAN. WLAN Wireless local area network. WPA Wi-Fi Protected Access. Security me thod for WLAN. WPA2 Wi-Fi Protected Access 2. Security meth od for WLAN. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 133
Troubleshooting To see frequent ly asked questions about your device, visit the product support pages at the Nokia web site. Q: What is my lock, PIN, or PUK code? A: The default lock code is 12345 . If you forget or lose the lock code, contact your device dealer. If you forget or lose a PIN or PUK code, or if you ha ve not received such a code, contact your network service provider. Q: How do I clo se an application that is no t responding? A: Press and hold the home key. Scroll to the application, an d press the backspace key to close the application. Q: Why do images look smudg y? A: Ensure that the camera len s protection windows are clean. Q: Why do missing, discoloured, or bright dots appear on the screen every time I switch on my device? A: This is a characteristic of th is type of display. Some displays may contain pixels or dots tha t remain on or off. This is normal, not a fa ult. Q: Why canâÂÂt I find my friendâÂÂs device while using Bluetooth connectivity? A: Check that both devices are compat ible, have activated Bluetooth connectivity, and are not in the hidden mode. Check also that the distance between t he two devices is not over 10 metres (33 feet) and that there are no walls or other obstructions between the devices. Q: Why canâÂÂt I en d a Bluetooth connectio n? A: If another device is connecte d to your device, you can end the connection using the other device or by deactivating Bluetooth connectivity. Select Menu > Connectivi ty > Bluetooth > Bluetoot h > Off . Q: Why can't I se e a WLAN access point even though I know I'm within its range? A: Check that the Offline profile is not in use in your device. The WLAN access point may use a hidden service set identifier (SSID). You can on ly access networks that use a hidden SSID if you know the correct SSID, and have created a WLAN access point for the network on your Nokia device Check that the WLAN access p oint is not on channels 12-1 3, as they cannot be associat ed with. Q: How do I sw itch WLAN off on my Nok ia device? A: The WLAN on your Nokia device s witches off when you are not trying to con nect, not connected to anoth er access point, or not scanning for availabl e networks. To further reduce battery consumption, you can sp ecify that your Nokia device does not scan, or scans less often, for avai lable networks in the background. WLAN switches off in between background scans. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 134
To stop the background scans, select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Wi reless LAN > Sho w WLAN availability > Never . You can still manually scan for available WLAN networks and con nect to WLAN net works as usual. To increase the background scan interval, select Show WLAN availability > Yes , and define the interva l in Scan for networks . Q: Why can't I browse th e web even though the WLAN connection is working and the IP settings are correct? A: Check that you have define d the HTTP/ HTTPS prox y settings correctly in the advanc ed settings of your WLAN access point. Q: How do I check the si gnal quality of my WL AN connection ? Select Menu > Connectivity > Conn. mgr. > Active data connections > Options > Detail s . If the signal quality is weak or moderate, you may encounter connection problems. Try again closer to the a ccess point. Q: Why do I have prob lems with the security mode? A: Check that you have configured th e security mode correctly, and that it is the same that the network uses. T o check the security mode the network uses, select Menu > Connectivity > Conn. mgr. > Active data co nnecti ons > Options > Details . Check also the following: you ha ve the correct WPA mode (preshared key or EAP), you ha ve disabled all EAP typ es that are not needed, and all the EAP type settings are correct (passwords, user names, certificates). Q: Why canâÂÂt I select a con tact for my message? A: The contact card does not have a phone number, an address, or an e- mail address. Select Menu > Communic. > Contacts , and edit the contact card. Q: The note Retrieving message is shown briefly. What is happening? A: The device is trying to re trieve a mult imedia message from the multimedia messaging centre . This note is shown if you have selected Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > Multimed ia message > Multimedia retrieval > Always a utomatic . Check that the settings for multimedia messag ing are defined correctly and that there are no mistakes in phone numbers or addresses. See "Multimedi a message settings", p. 69 . Q: How can I end the data connection when the device starts a data connection again and again? A: The device may be trying to retrieve a multimedia message from the multimedia message ce ntre. To stop the device from making a data connection, select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > Multim edia message > Multimedia re trieval > Manual to ha ve the multimedia messaging centre sa ve messages to be retrieved later, or Off to ignore all incoming multimedia m essages. If you select Manual , you receive a notification when there is a new multimedia message that you ca n retrieve in the multimedia message ce ntre. If you s elect Off , the device does not make any network connection s related to multimedia messaging. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 135
To set the device to use a pa cket data connection only if you start an applicati on or action that needs it, se lect Menu > Tools > Sett ings > Connection > Packet data > Packet data connection > When needed . If this does not help, s witch th e device off, and switch it on again. Q: How do I save battery p ower? A: Many features in your de vice increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life time. To save battery power, do the following: ⢠Switch off Bluetooth when you do not need it. ⢠Stop the back ground scans fo r WLAN. Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connec tion > Wireless LAN > Show WLAN av ailability > Never . You can still manually scan for available WLAN networks and conn ect to WLAN networks as usual. ⢠Set the device to use a packet data connection only if you start an application or action that needs it. Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Conn ection > Packet data > Packet data connection > When needed . ⢠Prevent the device from automatically downloadin g new maps in the Maps application. Select Menu > GPS > Maps and Options > Settings > Internet > Connection > Offline . ⢠Change the time-out after which the backlig ht is switched off. Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Display > Light time-out . ⢠Close the applications you do not use. Press and hold the home key. Scroll to the application, and press the backspace key to c lose the application. Product and safety information Enhancements Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and accessories approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The use of any other types may invalida te any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. In pa rticular, use of unapproved chargers or batteries may pres ent a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard. For availability of approved accessories, please check with your dealer. When you disconnect the power cord of any accessory, grasp and pull the plug , not the cord. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 136
Battery Battery and charger information Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. Th e battery intended for use with this device is BL- 4U. Nokia may make additional battery models av ailable for this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from the following chargers: AC-5. The exact charger model number may vary depending on the type of plug. The plug variant is identified by one of the following: E, EB, X, AR, U, A, C, K, or UB. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times, but it will eventually wear out. When th e talk and standby times are noticeably shorter tha n normal, replace the battery. Use only N okia approved batteries, an d recharge your battery on ly with Nokia ap proved chargers desig nated for this device. If a battery is being used for the first time or if the battery has not been us ed for a prolonge d period, it may be nec essary to connect the charger, then disconn ect and reconnect it to begin charging the ba ttery. If the battery is complet ely discharged, it may take severa l minutes before t he charging indicator appears on the displa y or before any calls can be made. Safe removal. Always switch th e device off and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. Proper charg ing. Unp lug the ch arger from the electrical plug and the device when not in use. Do not leave a fully charged battery connected to a charge r, since overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left un used, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time . Avoid extreme temperatures. Always try to keep the battery between 15ðC and 25ðC (59ðF and 77ðF). Extreme temperatures reduce the capacity and lifetime of the ba ttery. A device with a hot or cold battery ma y not work temporarily. Battery performance is particularly limited in temperatures well below freezing. Do not short-circuit. Accident al short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connection of the positive ( ) and negative (-) terminals of the battery. (These look like metal strips on the battery.) This might happ en, fo r example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the connecting obje ct. Disposal. Do not dispose of batt eries in a fire as they m ay explode. Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. Leak. Do not dismantle, cut, open, crush, bend, puncture, or shred cells or batteries . In the event of a battery leak, prevent battery liquid contact with skin or eyes. If this happens, flush the affected areas immediately with water, or seek medical help. Damage. Do not modify, remanu facture, attempt to insert foreign objects into the battery, or immerse or expose it to water or other liquids. Batt eries may explode if damaged. Correct use. Use the battery on ly for its intended purpose. Improper battery use may result in a fire, explosion, or other hazard. If the device or battery is dropped, especially on a é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 137
hard surface, and you believe the battery has been damaged, take it to a service centre for inspection before continuing to use it. Never use any ch arger or battery that is damaged. Keep your battery out of the reach of small children. Nokia battery authentication guidelines Always use original Nokia batteries for your safety. To check that you are get ting an origin al Nokia battery, pu rchase it from a Nokia authorised service centre or dealer, and inspect the hologram label using the following steps: Authenticate hologram 1. When you look at the hologram on the label, you should see the Nokia connecting hands s ymbol from one angle and the Noki a Original Enhancements logo when looking from another angle. 2. When you angle the hologram left, right, down and up , you should see 1, 2, 3 and 4 dots on each side respectively. Successful completion of the steps is not a total assurance of the au thenticity of the battery. If you cannot confirm authenticity or if you have any reason to believe that your Nokia battery with the hologram on the label is not an authentic Nokia battery, you should refrain from using it, and take it to the nearest N okia authorised service centre or dealer for assistance. To find out more about origin al Nokia batt eries, see www.nokia.com/battery. Taking care of your device Your device is a product of su perior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The following suggestions will help you protect your warranty coverage. ⢠Keep the device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that w ill corrode electronic circuits. If your device does get wet, remove the battery, and allow the device to dry completely before replacing it. ⢠Do not use or store the device in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving parts and electronic components can be damaged. ⢠Do not store the device in high or cold temperature. High temperatures can shorten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plast ics. When the device warms to its normal temperature from a cold temperature, moisture can fo rm inside the device and damage electronic circuit boards. ⢠Do not attempt to open the dev ice other than as instructed in this guide. ⢠Do not drop, knock, or shake the device. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards and fine mechanics. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 138
⢠Do not use ha rsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the device . Only use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clean the surface of the device. ⢠Do not paint the device. Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operation. ⢠Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauth orised antennas, modifications, or attachments could da mage the device and may violate regulations governing radio devices. ⢠Use chargers indoors. ⢠Backup all data you want to keep, su ch as contacts and calendar notes. ⢠To reset the devi ce from time to time for op timum performance, power off the device and remove the battery . These suggestions a pply equally to your device, battery, charger, or any accessory. Recycle Always return your used elec tronic products, batteries, and packaging materials to dedicated collection points. This w ay you help prevent uncontrolled waste disposal and promote the recycling of materials. Check product environmental information and how to recycle your Nokia products at www.nokia.com/werecycle, or nokia.mobi/ werecycle. The crossed-out wheeled-bin symbol on your product, battery, literature, or pa ck aging reminds you that all electrical and electronic products, batteries, and accumulators must be taken to s eparate collection a t the end of their working life. Th is requirement applies in the European Union. D o not dispose of these produ cts as unsorted municipal waste. For more environmental information, see the product Eco-Declarations at www.nokia.com/envi ronment. Additional safety information Small children Your device and its accessories are not toys. They may contain small parts. Keep them out of the reach of small children. Operating environment This device meets RF exposure guidelines in the normal use position at the ear or at leas t 2.2 centimetres (7/8 inch) away from the body. Any carry case, belt clip, or holder for body- worn operation should not cont ain metal and should position the device the above-stated dis tance from your body. To send data files or messages requires a quality connection to the network. Data files or mess ages may be delayed until such a connection is available. Follow the separation distance instructions until the tran smission is completed. Parts of the device are magnetic. Meta llic materials may be attracted to the device. Do no t place credit cards or other magnetic st orage media near th e device, because information stored on them may be erased. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 139
Medical devices Operation of radio transmitting equipm ent, including wireless phones, may interf ere with the function of inadequately protected medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine whether they are adequately shielded from external RF energy. Switch off your devi ce when regulations p osted instruct you to do so. Hospitals or h ealth care facilities may use equipment sensitive to external RF energy. Implanted medical devic es Manufacturers of medical devices recommend a minimum separation of 15.3 centimetres (6 inches) between a wireless device and an implanted medica l device, such as a pacemaker or implanted cardioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential interference with the medical device. Persons who have such devices should: ⢠Always keep the wireless device more than 15.3 centimetres (6 inches) from the medical device. ⢠Not carry the wireless devi ce in a breast pocket. ⢠Hold the wireless device to the ear opposite the medical devic e. ⢠Turn the wireless device off if there is any reason to suspect that interference is taking p lace. ⢠Follow the manufacturer dire ctions for the implanted medical device. If you have any questions about u sing your wireless device with an implanted medical device, consult you r health care provider. Hearing aids Some digital wireless devices may interfere with some hearing aids. Vehicles RF signals may affect improper ly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injection, electronic antilock braking, electronic speed control, an d air bag systems. For more information, check with the manu facturer of your vehicle or its equipment. Only qualified personnel should service the device or install the device in a vehicle. Fau lty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate yo ur warranty. Check regularly that all wireless device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or exp los ive materials in the same compartment as the device, its p arts, or accessories. Remember that air bags inflate wi th g reat force. Do not place your device or accessories in the air bag deployment area. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an airc raft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft and may be illegal. Potentially explosive environments Switch off your device in any ar ea with a potentially explos ive atmosphere. Obey all posted instructions. Sparks in such é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 140
areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or death. Switch off the device at refuelling points such as near gas pumps at service s tations. Observe rest rictions in fuel depots, s torage, and dis tribution areas; chemical plants; or where blasting operations ar e in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They includ e areas where you would be advised to turn off your vehi cl e engine, below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facilities and where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust, or met al powders. You should che ck with the m anufactur ers of vehicles using liquefied petr oleum gas (such as propane or butane) to determine if this device can be safely used in their vicini ty. Emergency calls Important: This device operates using radio signals, wireless networks, landline ne tworks, and user-pro grammed functions. If your device suppo rts voice calls over the internet (internet calls), a ctivate both t he internet call s and the cellular phone. The device ma y attempt to make emergency calls over both the cellular networks and through your internet call provider if both ar e activated. Connection s in all conditions cannot be guaran teed. You should never rely solely on any wireless device for essential communications like medical emergencies. To make an emergency call: 1. If the device is not on, switch it on. Check for adequate signal strength. De pending on your device, you may also need to complete the following: ⢠Insert a SIM card if your device uses one. ⢠Remove certain call restrict ions you ha ve activated in your device. ⢠Change your profile from Offline or Flight profile to an active profile. 2. Press the end key as many ti mes as needed to clear the display and ready the device for calls. 3. Enter the official emergency number for your present location. Emergency numbe rs vary by location. 4. Press the call key. When making an em ergency call, give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireless device may be the only means of communication at the scene of a n accident. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. Certification information (SAR) This mobile d evice meets guidelines f or exposure to radio waves. Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed not to exceed the limi ts for exposure to radio waves recommended by international guidelines. These guidelines were developed by the indepe ndent scientific organisation ICNIRP and include safe ty margins designed to assu re the protection of all persons, re gardless of age and health. The exposure guidelines for mo bile devices employ a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the IC NIRP guid elines is 2. 0 watt s/ kilogram (W/kg) average d over 10 grams of tissue. Tes ts for SAR are conducted us ing standard operating p ositions with é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 141
the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The actual SAR level of an operating device can be belo w the maximu m value because the device is designed to use only the power required to reach the network. Tha t amount ch anges dep ending on a number of factors such as how close you are to a network base station. The highest SAR value under the ICNIRP guidelines for use of the device at the ear is 1.37 W/kg. Use of device accessories may re sult in different SAR values. SAR values may vary dependin g on nat ional reporting and testing requirements and the network band. Additional SAR information may be provided under product information at www.nokia.com. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 142
Index Symbols/Numbers 3-D ringing tones 37 802.1x security settin gs 126 A access points creating 124 VPN 117 activation keys 115 Active n otes 95 settings 95 alarm clock 99 alert ton es 120 altitude calibrat ion 93 animated screen saver 36 antennas 18 application set tings 129 application s common actions 22 installing 113 modifying installations 114 attachments e-mail 59 multimedia messages 64 sound cl ips 64 audio files details 46 sending 46 autolock period 122 B background image 36 backing up data 112 barcodes 118 battery charge level 23 charging 16 inserting 15 blogs 51 Blueto oth authorising devices 104 pairing 104 passcode 104 receiving data 103 security 104 sending data 103 bookmarks 51 browsing intranet 52 offline 51 web 50 C cable 101 cache emptying 51 Calculator 95 Calendar settings 31 calendar entries creating 31 viewing 31 calendar key 30 calendar views changing 30 call barring 78 net calls 78 call divert 77 caller ID 123 calls answering 73 barring net calls 78 call waiting 123 caller ID 123 conference call 73 fixed dialling 110 making 73 making a call from Log 83 making a net call 76 muting the ringing ton e 73 net call alert 123 PTT 81 rejecting 73 é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 143
rejecting with text message 123 selecting type 12 3 settings 123 speed dialling 77 voice commands 80 voice dialling 80 voice ma il 79 camera capturing images 38 image settings 39 playing videos 3 9 scenes 38 sequence mode 39 toolbar 38 video clips 39 video set tings 40 viewing images 39 car kit remote SIM access 105 cell broadcast 68 settings 71 certificates details 111 settings 111 charging the battery 16 Clock alarms 99 settings 99 world clock 99 computer connections 101 See also data connections conference calls 73 configuration messages 128 connection methods Bluetooth 103 data cable 101 infrared 102 modem 107 connections ending 108 GPRS settings 52, 53 PC connection 54 WLAN settings 53 connectors 12 contact groups adding ringing tones 3 3 creating 32 making conference calls 32 contacts adding 32 adding ringing tones 3 3 searching 32 settings 33 contacts directories managing 33 contacts key 30 converting currencies 97 measurements 97 currency conversions 97 D data connections PC connectivity 101 date settings 121 decrypting device memory and memory card 110 destination removing 93 setting 93 Device manager 9 display changing the look 36 indicators 23 settings 119 display rotati on 13 settings 119 DTMF tones 78 E e-mail 58 automatic retrieval settings 71 connecting to mailbox 59 connection settings 70 creating folders 60 deleting 60 POP or IMAP 58 replying 59 retrieval settings 71 sending 60 setting up 58 user settings 70 writing 60 e-mail key 30 e-mail key se ttings 122 EAP plug-in se ttings 127 é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 144
using an EAP plug-in 127 encrypting device memory and memory card 110 ending internet connections 51 network connections 108 enhancements remote SIM access 105 settings 121 equaliser 43 F feeds 51 File manage r 9 6 files downloading 44 flash files 46 sending 96 fixed dialling 110 free memory 25 G Gallery 44 GPRS access point settings 52 advanced access point settings 53 settings 124 H headset connecting 17 home key 29 home screen 28 settings 36, 120 switching 29 HSDPA (high-sp eed downlink pa cket access) 101 I IM application settings 67 blocking users 67 groups 66 settings 65 starting a conversa tion 66 images adding to contacts 45 display background 45 rotating 45 sending 45 sharing online 43 zooming 45 indicators 23 infrared 102 inserting battery 15 memory card 16 SIM card 15 installation log 113 installing applications 113 internet 50 ending connections 51 internet calls 7 6 Internet radio listening 48 saving stations 49 searching 48 settings 49 intranet browsing 52 J jad files 113 jar files 113 Java applications 113, 114 K key store 112 keyguard 14 keypad lock settings 122 locking 14 tones 120 keys 12 activation keys 115 shortcuts 120 WEP keys 126 é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 145
L landmarks categories 94 creating 93 editing 94 receiving 9 4 sending 94 language changing 27 settings 120 lock code 109, 122 locking device 109 device autolock 122 keypad 14, 122 Log 82 adding numbers to Contacts 83 deleting 83 making a call 83 sending messag es 83 settings 83 transfer log 22 logos welcome logo 119 M Mail for Exchange 58 mailboxes connecting 59 creating 58 making a call 73 Maps 85 browsing 85 changing views 86 display elements 86, 90 downloading maps 86 driving routes 90 Favourites 88 finding locations 87 navigating 90, 91 organising p laces 88 organising rou tes 88 planning routes 91 positioning 87 saving places 88 saving routes 88 sending places 89 shortcuts 92 synchronising 8 9 traffic information 90 viewing location details 88 voice guidance 89 walking routes 91 measurements converting 97 measuring syst em changing 93 memory 25 memory card backing up data 112 formatting 25 inserting 16 locking 109 microSD 25 passwords 109 setting password 25, 96 unlocking 25 menu 20 message reader 56 selecting voice 56 messages 55 call rejection messages 123 cell broadcast settings 71 configuration messages 128 other settings 71 sending sound clips 64 service messages 68 text message settin gs 69 Messaging folders 55, 56 microSDHC 25 modem 5 4, 107 multimedia messages attachments 64 creating 62 creating presentations 63 forwarding 64 receiving 63 replying to 63 sending 62 sending options 65 settings 69 multitasking 33 Music player Music Store 42 playing 42 playlists 42 é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 146
Music Store 42 N net calls 76 alert settings 123 barring 78 connecting 76 making a call 76 profiles 7 5, 128 settings 128 network settings 123 Nokia Ovi Player 4 3 Nokia support information 9 Notes 100 notification light 120 O One-touch keys 12 1 operator selecting 123 original settings 122 Ovi Store 33 Ovi Suite 27 P packet data access point settings 52 advanced access point settings 53 restricting 128 settings 124 pairing devices 104 passcode 104 passwords memory card password 25, 96 PDF reader 97 personalisatio n 36 changing lan guage 120 display 119 home screen 120 tones 120 picture messages forwarding 62 viewing 61 PIN code changing 122 playing messages 56 recordings 4 4 video and audio 45 podcasting 40 directories 41 searching 41 settings 41 position ing settings 85 predictive text input 26, 120 presentati ons 63 printer set tings 98 printing 98 profiles creating 35 customising 35 net call profile 7 5, 128 selecting ringing tones 35 PTT contacts 82 created calls 81 creating a channel 82 exiting 82 logging in 81 making a call 81 settings 81 R radio listening to 47 saved stations 48 settings 48 viewing visual content 47 RealPlayer playing media clips 45 sending files 46 settings 46 viewing clip details 46 recorder playing recordings 44 recording a sound clip 44 settings 44 recording sound clips 4 4 remote configurat ion 9 remote lock 109 remote synchronisation 116 restoring origi nal settings 122 é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 147
ringing tones 120 3-D 37 contacts and contact g roups 33 in profiles 35 vibrating alert 120 S satellite si gnal strength 93 saving current position 93 files 22 settings 22 screen saver 36, 119 scroll key lights 14 search modes switching 32 searching available WLANs 108 security Bluetooth 104 device and SIM card 122 Java application 114 memory card 109 security module 112 sending files 22, 96 using Bluetooth 103 videos 74 service commands 68 service messages 68 settings 71 session initi ation protoc ol See SIP settings Active notes 9 5 advanced WLAN 125 application installations 114 applications 129 Calendar 31 calls 123 camera 39 cell broadcast 71 certificate 111 clock 99 contacts 33 date 121 display 119 e-mail connection 7 0 e-mail key 122 e-mail retrieval 71 e-mail user 70 EAP plug-ins 127 enhancements 121 GPRS 52, 5 3, 124 home screen 120 IM 65 Internet radio 49 Java application security 114 keypad lock 122 language 120 Log 83 multimedia messages 69 net call 128 network 123 packet data 124 podcasting 41 positioning 85 print er 98 PTT 81 radio 48 RealPlayer 46 recorder 44 restoring 122 service messages 71 SIP 127 slide 121 text messages 69 time 121 tones 120 voice commands 80 web 5 1 WEP security 125 WLAN 12 5 WLAN access point 53, 54 WLAN security 125 Settings w izard 19 shortcuts 92, 13 0 keys 120 signal strength 23 silencing alarms and incoming calls 1 3, 120 SIM access profile 105 SIM card inserting 15 text messages 61 SIP creating profiles 127 editing profiles 127 é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 148
editing proxy servers 128 editing registration servers 128 settings 127 sis files 113 sisx files 113 slide opening and closing 14 settings 121 software packages installation settings 114 installing 113 software upda tes 10 sound clips recording 4 4 sending 64 Speech 56 speed di alling 77 standby mode settings 120 support 9 switching device on and off 19 Symbian applications 113 synchronisati on 22 settings 116 synchronisation profiles 116 synchronisin g applications 116 T tabs 22 text changing size 119 letter mode 26 number mode 26 predictive input 26 traditional input 26 text mess ages messages on SIM card 61 sending 60 sending options 6 1 settings 69 writing 60 themes changing 36 downloading 37 time settings 121 tones 120 settings 120 toolbar camera 38 traditional te xt input 26 Transfer log 22 transferring d ata 22 transferring mu sic 43 trip destinatio n 93 trip meter 93 troublesho oting 134 U updates 10 UPIN cod e changing 122 USB data c able 101 V vibrating alert 1 20 video playing 39 video calls making a call 74 switching to voice call 74 video clips details 46 playing 45 sending 46 video sharin g 7 4 receiving invitations 75 virtual private network access points 117 use in applications 118 Voice aid 7 9 voice commands changing profiles 80 launching an application 80 settings 80 voice mail calling 79 changing number 79 voice over IP 76 VoIP 76 volume 25 VPN access points 117 use in applications 118 é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 149
W wallpaper 45 warning tones 120 Web connection security 5 0 web settings 51 weblogs 51 Welcome applicati on 19 welcome note 119 WEP keys 126 security settin gs 125 wireless keyb oard 100 WLAN 802.1x security settings 126 access point settings 53 access points 106 advanced access point settings 54 advanced settings 125 availability 106 MAC address 10 6, 125 searching for networks 108 security settin gs 125 settings 125 WEP keys 126 WPA security set tings 126 WLAN wizard 106 world clock 9 9 WPA security sett ings 126 writing language 27 Z Zip manager 97 é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 150
DECLARATIO N OF CONFORMI TY Hereby, NOKIA CORPORATION decl ares that this RM-343 product is in co mpliance with the essential req uirements and other relev ant provisions of Directive 1999/ 5/EC. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be found at http://www.nokia.com/phones/ declaration_of_conformity/. é 2010 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, Eseries, E66, Ovi, and Vi sual Ra dio are trademarks or regist ered trademarks of Nokia C orporatio n. Nokia tune is a sound mark of Nok ia Corporation. Other product and company names mentioned herein ma y be trademarks or tradena mes of their respective owners. Reproduction, transfer, di stribution , or storage of par t or all of the contents in this document in any form without t he prior written permission of Nokia is prohib ited. Nokia operates a policy of continuo us development. Nok ia reserves the right to make chang es and improvements to any of the prod ucts descri bed in th is document without prior notice. This product inclu des software licensed fro m Symbian Software Ltd é1998-2009. Sy mbian and Sy mbian OS are tradema rks of Symbian Ltd. Java and all Java-based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. This product is licensed under the MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio License (i) for personal and noncommercial use in conne ction with information wh ich has been encoded in compli ance with the MPEG-4 Visual Standard by a cons umer engaged in a personal and no ncommercial activity and (ii) f or use in connection with MPEG-4 video provided by a licensed video provider. No l icense is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional informatio n, including that related to promotional , internal, and commercial uses, ma y be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC. See http: //www.mpegla.com. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERM ITTED BY APPL ICABLE LAW, UNDER NO CI RCUMSTANCES SHALL NOK IA OR ANY OF ITS LICENSOR S BE RESPONSIBLE FO R ANY LOSS OF D ATA OR INCOME OR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUE NTIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES HOWSOEVER CAUSED. THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT AR E PROVIDED "AS IS". EXCEPT AS RE Q U I RE D B Y A P PL I C A B L E L A W , N O W A RR A N T I E S OF A N Y K I N D, E I T H E R E X P RESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITE D TO, THE IMP LIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT ABILITY AND FITNE SS FOR A PARTICULA R PURPOSE, A RE MADE IN RELATI ON TO THE ACCURACY, RELIABILITY OR CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT . NOKIA RE SERVES THE RIGHT TO REVISE THIS DOCU MENT OR WITHDRA W IT AT ANY TI ME WITHOUT PR IOR NOTICE. Reverse engineering of software in the de vice is prohibited to the extent permitted by a pplicable law. Insofa r as this user gu i de contains any limitati ons on Nokia's representations, wa rranties, damages a nd liabilities, such limi tations shall l ikewise limit any represe ntations, warra nties, da mages and liabilities of Nokia's l icensors. The third-party applications provided wit h your device may have been created and may be owned by persons or entities n ot affili ated with or related to Nok ia. Nokia does not own the copyrights or intellectual property rights to the third-party a pplications. As such, No kia does not take a ny r esponsibility for en d-user support, functionality of the applications, or the information in the applications or these materia ls. Nokia does not provide a ny warran ty for th e third-party applications. BY USING THE APPL ICATIONS YOU ACKNOW LEDGE THAT THE A PPLICATIONS ARE PROV IDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY K IND, EXPRES S OR IMPLIE D, TO THE MAXIMUM
EXTENT PERMITTED B Y APPLICABLE LAW. YOU FU RTHER ACKNOWLEDGE THAT NEITHER NOKIA NO R ITS AFFILIATES MAKE AN Y REPRESENTAT IONS OR W ARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, IN CLUDING B UT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF TITLE, MERC HANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPO SE, OR THAT THE APP LICATIONS WILL NOT INFRING E ANY THIRD-PARTY PATENTS, COPYRIGH TS, TRADEMARKS, OR OTHER RIGHTS. The availability of p articular products an d ap plications and services for these prod ucts may vary by region. Please check with your Nokia dealer for details and availabili ty of language options . This device may con t ain commodities, technology or softwa re subject to export laws and regul ations from th e US and other co untries. Diversion contrary to law is prohibited . FCC/INDUSTRY CA NADA NOTICE Your device may cause TV or radio interferen ce (for example, when usin g a telephone in clos e proximity to receiving equipment). The FCC or Indu stry Canada can require you to stop using your telephone if such inter ference cannot be elimina ted. If you require assistance, contact yo ur local service facility. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the follo wing two conditions: (1) This dev ice may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, includi ng interference that may cause und esired operation. Any changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by Nokia co uld vo id the user's authority to operate this equipment. /Issue 5 EN
Contents Safety................. ................... .............. ............... ..7 About your device......................... ................................ .............7 Network services................................. .................... ..................8 Battery removing........ ....................................... ........................8 Find help......... ............ ............... .............. .............9 Support.......................................................................................9 Remote configuration...............................................................9 Update software using your PC..............................................10 Further information................................. .................... ...........10 E66 in brief................................ ........................ .11 Key features....................................... ......................... .............11 Keys and parts........ ......................... ............................. ............12 Key moves............................................ ................................ ....13 Set up your device..............................................15 Insert the SIM card and battery... ................................... ........15 Charge the battery..... .............................. ........................... .....16 Insert the memory card....................................................... ...16 Eject the memory card............................................................17 Connect the headset....... .......................... ........................ .......17 Attach the wrist strap..................... ..................... ................ ...17 Antennas......... .................... .................... ..................... .............18 Get started............. ............ ................. ................ 19 First start-up..... ................... .................. .................. ............... ..19 Welcome.......... .................................... ................................. ....19 Settings wizard.................... ....................................................19 Home screen......................... ............................. ......................2 0 Menu.........................................................................................20 Transfer content from other dev ices ........................ ............21 Common actions in several a pplications........... ....................22 Display indicators.............................................................. ......23 Volume control........................... .............................. ...............25 Memory.............................. ...................................... .................25 Write text............................................ .................................... .26 Nokia Ovi Suite......... ................................... .............................27 New from Eseries........ ......... ........ ........... .......... .28 Access tasks quickly................. ......................................... .......28 Home screen......................... ............................. ......................2 8 One-touch keys............................................................. ...........29 Nokia Calendar for Eseries................................................. .....30 Nokia Contacts for Eseries.. ................... .................... ..............32 Multitasking........................................................ .....................33 Open Ovi............................................................. ......................33 About Ovi Store........................................................................ 33 Personalisation.............................. ....................35 Profiles............................ .................................... ......................35 Select ringing tones.. ................... .................... .................. ......35 Customise profiles...................................................................35 Personalise the home screen..................... ............. ...............3 6 Change the display theme......................................................36 Download a theme..................................................................37
3-D ringing tones............. ..................................... ...................37 Media.......... ......................... .................. .............38 Camera....................... ..................................... ..........................38 Nokia Podcasting......... ................................................... .........40 Music player......... .................. .................. ................... ..............42 Share online.............................................................................43 Recorder................................................ ...................................44 Gallery................................................ .......................................44 RealPlayer............... .................................. ................................45 Flash player..............................................................................46 Radio................................. ............................................. ...........47 Internet radio............ ..................... ..................... .....................48 Internet..............................................................50 Web..................... ..................................................... .................50 Browse the intranet ........................................... ....................52 Internet access points..................... ........................................52 Connect PC to web...................................................................54 Messaging................... ............... ............. ...........55 Messaging folders............. ....................................... ................55 Organise messages... .................................. .............................56 Message reader........................ ................................................56 Speech............. .................... ...................... ..................... ...........56 E-mail messages......................................................................56 Text messages. .................. ................... ............... ................... ..60 Multimedia messages ............. ................. .............. .............. ...62 Instant messaging. ................................................. .................65 Special message types............................... ...................... .......67 Cell broadcast..................... .................................... ..................68 Messaging settings. .................................................................68 Phone............................................ .....................73 Voice calls...................................................... ...........................73 Video calls............. .................... ...................... .................... ......74 Net calls....................................................................................75 Speed dialling................................................... .......................77 Call divert.............. ........................... ......................... ................77 Call barring............................................................................... 78 Bar net calls................... ............................................... ............78 Send DTMF tones........... .............................. ............................. 78 Voice mail............................. ....................................................79 Voice aid...................................................................................79 Voice commands....... ........................ ....................... ................79 Push to talk............................................ ..................................81 Log................................................. ...........................................82 Travelling.............................................. .............84 About GPS and satellite signals..............................................84 Positioning settings ......................... ....................... ................85 Maps............................. ........................................... ..................85 GPS data.......... ......................... ............................ .....................93 Landmarks................ .................................... ............................93 Noki a Of fic e Too ls... ........... ........... ........... ........ ..95 Active notes.................... ................................. ......................... 95 Calculator..... .......................... ........................... ........................95 File manager.................................................................... ........96 Quickoffice....................... ............................. ........................... .96 Converter..................................................................................97 Zip manager.............................................................................97 PDF reader................................................................................97 Printing................ .................................. ...................................98 Clock............................................. .............................................99
Notes............... ............................... .................................. .........99 Nokia Wireless Keyboard......................................................100 Connectivity............. ............. ......... .......... ........101 Fast downloading........... ...................... .............................. ...101 PC connections........ ................................... ............................101 Data cable............... .................. ......................... .....................101 Infrared................. ..................... ...................... ..................... ..102 Bluetooth...... .................... .................. ................... .................102 SIM access profile..................... ................. ..................... .......105 Wireless LAN........... ................... ............... ................... ...........105 Modem.......................... ................................... .......................107 Connection manager.......... ...................................................108 Security and data management.. ................. ....109 Lock the device......................................................................109 Memory card security.................... ........................................109 Encryption..............................................................................110 Fixed dialling......... .................. .................. ................... ..........110 Certificate manager... ........................... .............................. ...111 Security modules...................................................................112 Back up data................................................. .........................112 Application manager... ...................... ....................... .............112 Activation keys......... ........................ ................... ...................115 Data synchronisation........................................................ ....116 Mobile VPN........................................................... ..................117 Barcode reader...................................... ................................118 Settings.............................. ......................... .....119 General settings........ ......................... ............................ ........119 Telephone settings........ ....................... .............................. ...122 Connection settings.... ..................... .................... ..................123 Application settin gs........................ ....................... ...............129 Shortcuts................................................ ..........130 General shortcuts................................. ................. ................130 Glossary................................. ...........................131 Troubleshooting.............. .......... ........ ......... .....134 Product and safety informatio n.......................136 Index............................................ ....................143
Safety Read these simple guidelines . Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete user guide for further information. SWITCH ON SAF ELY Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COM ES FIRST Obey all local laws. Always keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safe ty. INTERFERENCE All wireless devices may be suscepti ble to interference, which coul d affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN RESTRICTED ARE AS Follow any restrictions. Switch the device off in aircraft, near medical eq uipment, fuel, chemicals, or blasting areas. QUALIFIED SERVI CE Only qualified personnel ma y install or repair this product. ACCESSORIES AN D BATTERIES Use only approved accessories and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. WATER-RESIST ANCE Your device is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. About your device The wireless device described in this guide is approved for use on the (E)GSM 850, 900, 1800, and 1900 networks, and UMTS 900/2100 HSDPA networks. Contact your service provider for more info rmation about networks. Your devic e supports s everal connectivi ty methods and like computers may be expose d to viruses and other harmful content. Exercise caution with messages, connect ivity requests, browsing, and downloads. Only install and use services and software from trustworthy sources that offer adequate security and prot ection, such as applica tions that are Symbian Sign ed or have pass ed the Java Verified⢠testing. Consider installing antivirus and other security software on your device and any connected computer. Your device ma y have preins talled bookmar ks and links for third-party internet s ites and may allow you to a ccess third- party sites. These are not affi liated with Nokia, and Nokia does not endorse or assume liability for them. If you access such sites, take pr ecautions for security or content. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 7
Warning: To use any features in this device, other than the alarm clock, the device mu st be switched on. Do not switch the device on when wireless device use may cause interference or danger. When using this device, obey all laws and respect local customs, privacy and legitimate rights of others, including copyrights. Copyright protect ion may prevent some images, music, and other co ntent from being copied, modified, or transferred. Make back-up copies or keep a written record of all important information stored in your device. When connecting to any other de vice, read its user guide for detailed safety in structions. Do not connect incompatible products . The images in this guide may di ffer from your device display. Refer to the user guide for ot her important information about your devi ce. Network services To use the device you must have service from a wireless service provider. Some features are not available on all networks; other features may require that you make specific arrangements with your serv ice provider to use them. Network services involve tran smission of data. Check with your service provider for detai ls about fees in your home network and when roaming on other networks. Your service provider can explain wha t charges will a pply. Some networks may have limitations tha t affect how you can use some features of this device requ iring netwo rk su pport such as support for specific technologies like WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/ IP protocols and language- dependent charact ers. Your service provider may ha ve requested that certain features be disabled or not ac tivated in your device. If so, these features will not appear on your devi ce menu. Your device may also h ave customized it ems such as menu names, menu order, and icons. Battery removing Switch the device off and di sconnect the charger before removing the battery. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 8
Find help Support When you want to learn more about how t o use your product or you are unsure how your device should funct ion, go to www.nokia.com/support , or using a mobile device, nokia.mobi/s upport. You can als o select Menu > Help > Help in your device. If this does not resolve your issue, do one of the following: ⢠Switch off the device, and remove the battery. After about a minute, replace the battery, an d switch on the device. ⢠Restore the original factory settings. ⢠Update your device software. If your issue remains unsolv ed, contact Nokia for repair options. Go to www.nokia.com/repair. Before sending your device for repair, always back up the data in your device. Remote configuration Select Menu > Tools > Device mgr. . With Device manager, you can manage settings , data, and software on your device remotely. You can conn ect to a server, and receive config uration settings for your device. You may receive server profiles and different configuration set tings from your service providers or company information management department. Configuration settings may in clude connection and other setting s used by differe nt a pplications in your device. The available options may vary. The remote configuration con nection is usually started by the server when the device sett ings need to be updated. To create a new server profile, select Options > New server profile . You may receive these settings from your service provider in a configuration message. If not, define the following: ⢠Server name â Enter a name for the configuration server. ⢠Server ID â Enter the unique ID to identify the configuration server. ⢠Server password â Enter a passwor d to identify your device to the server. ⢠Session m ode â Select the preferred connection type. ⢠Access point â Select the a ccess point to use for the connection, or create a new access point. Yo u can also choose to be asked for the access point every time you start a connecti on. This settin g is available only if you have selected Internet as the bearer type. ⢠Host address â Enter the web address of the configuration server. ⢠Port â Enter the port number of the server. ⢠User name â Enter your user ID for the configuration server. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 9
⢠Password â Enter your password for the configuration server. ⢠Allow configuratio n â Select Yes to allow the server to initiate a configuration session. ⢠Auto-accept all requests â Select Yes if you do not want the server to ask for your conf irmation when it initiates a configuration session. ⢠Network auth entication â Select whether to use http authentication. ⢠Network us er name â Enter your user ID for the http authentication. This setting is available only if you have selected Network au thenticatio n to be used. ⢠Network passw ord â Enter your password for the http authentication. This setting is available only if you have selected Network au thenticatio n to be used. To connect to the server and receive configuration settings for your device, select Optio ns > Start configuration . To view the configuration log of the selected profile, select Options > View log . Update software using your PC Nokia Software Updater is a PC application that enables you to update your device software. To update your device software, you need a compatible PC, broadband internet access, and a compatible USB data cab le to conn ect your device to the P C. To get more information and to download the Nokia Software Updat er application, go to www. nokia.com/ softwareupdate. Further information Instructions in yo ur device To read instructions for th e current view o f the open application, select Options > Help . To browse the help topics and conduct searches, select Menu > Help > Help . You can select categories for which you want to see instructions. Select a category, such as Messaging, to see wha t instructions (help topics) are available. While you are reading the topic, scroll left or right to see the other topics in that category. To switch between the applic ation and help, pr ess and hold the home key. Tutorial The tutorial provides you info rmation about your device and shows you how to use it. Select Menu > Help > Tutorial . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 10
E66 in brief Model number: Nokia E66-1 (RM-343). Hereinafter referred to as Nokia E66. Key features Your new E series device helps you manage your busin ess and personal information in and ou t of office. Some of the key features are highlighted here: Switch from business to personal mode. Browse the internet, find blogs and receive news feeds with Web . Listen to mus ic with Music player . Get podcasts to your device with Podcasting . Find points of int erest with Maps . Access your e-mail while on the move. Stay up-to-date and plan y our meetings with Calendar . Manage your business partners a nd free time friends with the new Contacts application. Make calls using voice ov er IP services with Internet tel. . Connect to WLAN with WLAN wiz. . View documents , spreadsh eets, and presentations with Quickoffice . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 11
Keys and parts 1 â Power key 2 â Earpiece 3 â Light s ensor 4 â Selection key. Press the selection key to perform the function shown above it on the display. 5 â Call key 6 â Press the key for a few seconds to switch on Bluetooth connectivity. When writing te xt, press the key and select More symbols to access speci al characters. 7 â Microphone 8 â Camera (video calls only) 9 â Scroll key. Press the scroll key to enter a selection, to scroll left, right, up, and down on the display. A long press left, right, up, or down accelerates the scrolling. 10 â End key. Press the end key to reject a call, end acti ve calls and held calls, and with a long keypress, end data connections. 11 â Backspace key. Press the key to delete items. 12 â Shift key. When writing text, pres s and hold the key and select the text with the scroll key. Press this key for a few seconds to toggle between the Silent and General profiles. 13 â Charger connector 1 â Volume up key é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 12
2 â Voice key. Press the voice key to mute and unmute the active call. This key is also used in the Voice commands and Push to talk applications . 3 â Volume down key 4 â Capture key 5 â Release button 6 â Headset connector 7 â Micro-USB port 8 â Infrared port 1 â Home key 2 â Contacts key 3 â Calendar key 4 â E-mail key Key moves Your device rotates the display automati cally when you move it and responds to tapping an d turning. Scroll key lights notify you of events, and the slide enables answering and ending calls and locking the keypad. Automatic display rotation In all applications, the scr een rotates automatically from portrait to landscape when you tu rn the device to the left. For example, if you are browsing the web and turn the device to the left, the image rot ates accordingly an d changes to full screen. To display the cont rol and status pan es, press either selection key. The image changes to full screen in RealPlayer, browser, and image viewer. To turn off the automatic disp lay rotation or changin g to full screen, select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > General > Personalisation > Display > Display rotation or Turn to full view . Silence the device To set calendar and clock alarms t o snooze and to silence incoming calls, turn th e device face down. You can also silence the device by tapping it twice. To turn on silencing by tapping , select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Tones > Tap to silence > On . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 13
To turn off silencing by tapping or turning, select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Tones > Tap to silence or Turn to silence . Scroll key lights When you receive a message or miss a call, the scroll key starts blinking to indicate the event. When t he display light turns off, the scroll key starts blinking slowly. To set the length of time for bl inking for missed events or to select of which events you wa nt to be notified, select Menu > Tools > Settings > Gen eral > Perso nalisation > Notification light . To turn off slow blinking, select Menu > Tools > Profiles and a profile. Select Pe rsonalise > Breathing light . Slide function When the device or keypad is locked, calls may be poss ible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. To open or close the full-siz e keypad, push the slide up or down. To lock the keypad, close the slide. To unloc k the keypad, open the slide. Tip: To unlock the keypad without opening the slide, press the le ft and then the right selection key. To answer a call, open th e slide. To end the call, close the slide, unless you have a headset connected to the device, or you select Options before closing the keypad. To change the slide sett ings, select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Slide handling . The keypad of your device locks automati cally to prevent the keys from being accidentally pressed. To change the period after which the keypad is locked, select Menu > Tool s > Settings > Genera l > Security > Phone and SIM card > Keypad autolock period . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 14
Set up your device Set up your E66 followi ng these instructions. Insert the SIM card and battery 1. With the back of the device facing you, press the release buttons (1) and slide the back cover off (2). 2. If the battery is inserted, li ft the battery in the direction of the arrow to remove it. 3. Insert the SIM card. Make sure that the contact area on the card is facing the connectors on the device and that the bevelled corner is facing the top of the device. 4. Insert th e battery. Align th e contacts of the battery with the corresponding connectors on the battery compartment and insert in the direction of the arrow. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 15
5. Slide the back cover back to place. Charge the battery 1. Connect a compatible charger to a wall outlet. 2. Connect the power cord to the device. If the battery is completely discharged, it may take a while befo re the charging indicator starts scrolling. 3. When the battery is fully charged, disconnect the charger from the device, then from the wall outlet. Your battery has been precha rged at the factory, but the charging levels may vary. To reach the full operation time, charge the battery until it ha s been fully charged according to the battery level indicator. Tip: If you have old compatible Nokia chargers, you can use them with the Nokia E66 by atta ching the CA-44 charger adapter to the old charger. The ad apter is available as a separate enhancem ent. Insert the memory card Use a memory card to save the memory on your device. You c a n a l s o b a c k u p i n f o r m a t i o n f r o m y o u r d e v i c e t o t h e m e m o r y card. Memory card may already be in serted in your device. Memory cards are also availa ble as separate enhancements. 1. With the back of the device facing you, press t he release buttons (1) and slide the back cover off (2). é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 16
2. Insert the memory card in the slot with the conta ct area first. Make sure that the contact area is fa cing the connectors on the device. 3. Push the card in until it locks into place. 4. Close the back cover. Eject the memory card Important: Do not remove the memory card during an operation when the card is being accessed. Doing so may damage the memory card and the device, and corrupt data stored on the card. 1. Press the power key brie fly, and select Remove memory card . 2. Press the release buttons and slide off the back cover. 3. Press the end of the memory card to release it from the memory card slot. 4. Close the back cover. Connect the headset Warning: When you use the headset, your abilit y to hear outside sounds may be affected. D o not use the headset where it can endanger your safety. Connect the compatible headse t to the headset conn ector of your device. Attach the wrist strap Thread the wrist strap as sh own, and tighten it. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 17
Antennas Your device may have internal and external antennas. Avoid touching the antenna a rea unnecessarily while the antenna is transmitting or receiving. Co ntact wi th antennas affects the communication quality and may cause a higher power level during operation and may reduce the battery life. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 18
Get started Learn how to get sta rted with your device. First start-up 1. Press and h old the power key. 2. If the device asks for a PIN code or lock code, enter the code, and select OK . 3. When prompted, enter the country in which you are located and the current date and time. To find your country, enter the first letters of the country name. It is important to select the correct country, because scheduled calendar entries may change if you change the country la ter and the new coun try is located o n a different time zone. The Welcome application opens. 4. Select from the various options, or Exit to close the application. To configure the various settings in your device, use the wizards available on the home screen and in the Settings wizard ap plication. When you switch the device on, it may recognise the SIM card provider and configure some settings automa tically. You can al so contact your service provider for the correct settings. You can switch the device on without inserting the SIM c ard. The device starts up in the offline mode, and you cannot use the network-dependen t phone functions. To switch the device off, press and hold the powe r key. Welcome When you switch on your de vice for the first time, the Welcome application opens. Select from the following: ⢠Tutorial provides information about your device and shows you ho w to use it. ⢠Switch enables you to transfer content, such as contacts and calendar ent ries, from a compatible No kia device. See "Transfer content between devices" , p. 22 . ⢠E-mail se ttings h elps you configur e e-mail settings. ⢠Sett. wizard help s you configure various settings. See "Settings wizard" , p. 19 . To open the Welcome application later, select Menu > Help > Welcome . The available options ma y vary. Settings wizard Select Menu > Tools > Sett. wizard . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 19
Settings wizard configures your device for settings based on your network operator information. To use these se rvices, you may have to contact your service provider to activate a data connection or other services. The availability of the differe nt settings items in Set tings wizard depends on the feature s of the devi ce, SIM ca rd, wireless service provider, and th e availabi lity of the data in the Settings wizard da tabase. If Settings wizard is not available from your service provider, it may not appear in th e menu of your device. To start the wizard, select Start . When you use the wizard for the first time, you are gu ided through the set tings configuration. If there is no SIM card inserte d, you need to select the home country of your service provider, and your service provider. If the country or service pr ovider suggested by the wizard is not correct, se lect the correct one from the list. If the settings configu ration is interrupted, the settings are not defined. To access the main view of the Se ttings wizard aft er the wizard has finished the settings configuration, select OK . In the main view, select from the following: ⢠Operato r â Configure operator-s pecific settings such as MMS, internet, WAP, and streaming settings. ⢠E-mail setup â Configure e-ma il settings. ⢠Push to talk â Configure push -to-talk settings. ⢠Video sharing â Configure video sharing settings. If you are not able to use Settings wizard, vis it the Nokia phone settin gs web site. Home screen From the home screen you can qu ickly access features t hat you use the most, and see at a glance any missed calls or new messages. You can define two separate home screens for different purposes, such as one screen to show your business e-mail and notifications, and a nother to s h o w y o u r p e r s o n a l e- m a i l . This way, you do not h ave to see business-related messages outside office hours. Menu Select Menu . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 20
The menu is a starting point from which you can open all applications in the device or on a memory card. The menu contains appl ications and folders, which are groups of similar applications. All applications you install in the device yourself are by default saved in the Installations folder. To open an application, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To view the applications in a list, select Options > Change Menu view > List . To return to the grid vi ew, select Options > Change Menu view > Grid . To view the memory consumpt ion of different applications and data stored on the device or memory card and to check the amount of free memory, select Optio ns > Memory details . To create a new folder, select Options > New folder . To rename a new folder, select Options > Rename . To rearrange the folder, scroll to the applica tion you want to move, and select Options > Move . A check mark is placed beside the application. Scroll to a new location, and select OK . To move an application to a different folder, scroll to the application you want to move, and select Options > Move to folder , the new folder, and OK . To download applications from the web, select Options > Download applications . To switch between several open applications, press and hold the home key. Select an ap plication, and pres s the scroll key to switch to it. Leaving applications running i n the background increases the de mand on battery power and reduces the battery life. Transfer content from other devices Select Menu > Tools > Switch . You can transfer content, such as contac ts, from a compatible Nokia device to your new Eseries device using different connectivity methods . The type of content that can be transferred depends on the devi ce model. If the other device supports synchronisation, you can also synchronise data between the two devices or send data from this device to the other device. When you transfer data from your previous device, it may require you to insert the SIM card. Your new Eseries device does not need a SIM card when transferring data. Content is copied from the memo ry of the other device to the corresponding location in your device. Copying time depends on the amount of data to be transferred. You can al so cancel and continue later. The necessary steps for data transfer may var y depending on your device, and whether you have interrupted data transfer earlier. The items that you ca n transfer vary depending on the other device. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 21
Transfer content between devices To connect the two devices, follow t he instructions on the display. For some device models, the Switch application is sent to the o ther device as a message. To install Switch on the other device, open th e message, and follow the instructions on the display. On your new Eseries device, select the content you want to copy from th e other device. After the data transfer, you ca n save the shortcut with the transfer settings to the main view to repe at the same transfer later. To edit the shortcut, select Op tions > Shortcut settings . View transfer lo g A transfer log is shown after every transfer. To view the transfer details, scroll t o the transferred item in the log, and select Options > Details . To view the log of a previous transfer, scroll to a transfer shortcut, if available, in the main view, and select Options > View log . Any unresolved transfer conflicts are also displayed in the log view. To start solving conflicts, select Options > Solve conflicts . Synchronise, retrieve, and send data If you have previously transferred da ta to your device with the Switch application, select fr om the following icons in the Switch main view: Synchronise data with a compatible device if the other device supports synchronisation. With synchronisation, you can keep the data up-to- date in both devices. Retrieve data from the other device to your new Eseries device. Send data from your new Eseries device to your other device. Common actions in several applications You can find the following ac tions in severa l applications: To change the profile, or switch off or lock the device, press the power key briefly. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 22
If an applicati on consists of several tabs (see figure), open a tab by scrolling right or left. To save the settings th at you have configured in an applicati on, select Back . To save a file, select Options > Save . There are different saving options depending on the application you use. To send a file, select Options > Send . You can send a file in an e- mail or multim edia message, or using different connectivity methods. To copy, press and hold th e shift key, and select the text with the scroll key. Press and hold the shift key, and select Copy . To paste, scroll to where you want to paste the text, press and hold the shift key, and select Paste . This met hod may not work in applications that ha ve th eir own copy and paste commands. To select different items, s uch as messages, files, or contacts, scroll to the item you want to select. Select Op tions > Mark/ Unmark > Mark to select one item or Options > Mark/ Unmark > Mark all to select all items. Tip: To select almost all items, first select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark all , then select the items you do not want, and Options > Mark/Unmark > Unmark . To select an object (for ex ample, an attachment in a document) scroll to the object so that square ma rkers appear on each side of the object. Display indicators The device is being used i n a UMTS network (network service). The battery charge level. The higher the bar, the stronger the charge in the battery. You have one or more unread messages in the Inbox folder in Messaging. You have received new e-mail in th e remote mailbox. There are messages waiting to be sent in the Outbox folder in Messaging. You have one or more missed phone calls. The keys of the device are locked. An alarm is active. You have selected the Silent profile, and the device does not ring for an incoming call or message. Bluetooth is active. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 23
Data is being transm itted using Bluetooth connectivity. When the indica tor is blinking, your device is tryi ng to conn ect with another dev ice. An infrared connection is activ e. If the indi cator blinks, your device is trying to connect to t he other device, or the connection has been lost. A GPRS packet data connec tion is available (network service). If the icon is , the connection is active. If the icon is , the connection is on hold. An EGPRS packet data connection is available (network service). If the icon is , the connection is active. If the icon is , the connection is on hold. A UMTS packet data connect ion is available (network service). If the icon is , the connection is active. If the icon is , the connection is on hold. High-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) is supported and available (network service). T he icon may vary between region s. If the icon is , the connection is active. If the icon is , the connection is on hold. You have set the device to scan for WLANs, a nd a WLAN is availa ble. A WLAN connection is active in a network that does not have encryption. A WLAN connection is active in a network that has encryption. Your device is connected to a computer with a USB data cable. The second phone line is being used (network service). All calls are forwarded to another number. If you have two phone lines, a number indicates the active line. A headset is connected to the devi ce. The connection to a headset with Bluetooth connectivity has been lost. A hands-free car kit is connected to the devi ce. A loopset is connected to the device. A text phone is connected to the device. Your device is synchronising. You have an ongoing pu sh-t o-talk connection. Your push-to-talk connection is in the do not disturb mode, because the ringing ty pe setting of your device is set to Beep once or Si lent , or you have an incoming or ongoing phone call. In this mode, you cannot make PTT calls. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 24
Volume control To adjust the earpiece volume during a phone call or the volume of the media applica t ions, use the volume keys. Memory There are two types of memory into which you can save data or install applications: devi ce memory and memory card. Free memory To see how much memory is currently in use, how much free memory remains, and how much memory is cons umed by each data type, select Menu > Options > Memory details > Phone memo ry or Memory card . Tip: To ensure that y ou have adequate memory, transfer data regularly to a memory card or computer, or use File manager to delete files you no longer need. After you install applications to a compatible memory card, installation files (.si s , . s i s x ) r e m a i n i n t h e d e v i c e m e m o r y . T h e files may use large amounts of memory and prevent you from storing other files. To mainta in sufficient memory, use Nokia PC Suite to back up inst allation files to a compatible PC, then use the file manager to remove the installation files from the device memory. If the .sis file is a message attachment, delete the message from the Messaging inbo x. Memory card Select Menu > Tools > Memory . If you cannot use a memory card in your device, you may have the wrong type of memory card, the card may not be formatted for your device, or the card has a corrupted file system. Your Nokia device supports the FAT16 and FAT32 file system for memory cards. MicroSDHC This device uses microSD and microSDHC me mory cards. To ensure interoperabili ty, use only compatible memory cards with this device. Check the compatibility of a memory card wi th its manufacturer or provider. Other memory cards than microSD and microSDHC cards are not compatible with thi s device. Using an incompatible memory card may dama ge the memory card as well as the device, and data stored on the incompatible card may be corrupted. Use a memory ca rd To format a memory card for your device, select Op tions > Format memory card . When a memory card is formatted, all data on th e card is lost per manently. Consu lt your retailer to find out if you must format the memory card before you can use it. To change the name of the memory card, select Options > Memory card name . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 25
Write text The input methods provided in the device m ay vary according to different sales markets. Traditional text input is shown on the top right of the display when you are writing text using traditional text input. and indicate the selected case. indicates that the first letter of the sentence is writt en in uppercase and all the other letters are automati cally written in lowercase. indicates the number mode. To write text with the keypad, press a number key 2-9 repeatedly until the desired chara cter appears. There are more characters available for a n umber key than are printed on the key. If the next let ter is located on the same key as the present one, wait until the cu rsor appears, and enter the letter. To insert a number, press and hold the number key. To switch between the upper a nd lower case mode and the number mode, press # . To erase a character, press the backsp ace key. Press and hold the backspace key to erase more than one character. To access the most common punctuation marks, press the 1 key. Press 1 repeatedly to re ach the desired punctuation mark. To add special characters, press * . Scroll to the desired character and press the scroll key. To insert a space, press 0 . To move the cur sor to the next line, press 0 three times. To switch between the different character cases, press # . Predictive text input 1. To activate predict ive text input, press # twice quickly. This activates predictive text input for all editors in the device. The indicator is shown on the display. 2. To write the desired word, press 2-9 . Press each key only once for one letter. 3. When you have finished writing the word and it is correct, scroll right to confirm it, or press 0 to add a space. If the word is not correct, press * repeatedly to view the matching words the dict ionary has found. If the ? character is shown after the word, the word you intended to write is not in the dictionary. To add a word to the dictionary, select Spell , enter the word (up to 32 letters) using traditional tex t input, and select OK . The word is added to the dictio nary. When the dictionary is full, the new word replaces the oldest added word. Write the first half of a compound word; to confirm it, scroll right. Write the last part of t he compound word. To complete the compound word, press 0 to add a space. To switch predictive text input off for all editors in the device, press # twice quickly. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 26
Change the writing language When you are writing text, you can change the writing language. For example, if you p ress the 6 key repeatedly to reach a specific character, ch anging the writing langua ge gives you access to characters in a different order. If you are writing text using a non-Latin alphabet and w ant to write Latin characters, fo r example e-mail or web addresses, you may need to ch ange the writing la nguage. To change the writing lan guage, select Option s > Writing language , and a writing langu age that uses L atin characters. Nokia Ovi Suite Nokia Ovi Suite is a set of applications that you can install to a compatible PC. Ov i Suite grou ps all available applications in a launcher window from which you can open the applications. Ovi Suite may be included on a memory card, if provided with yo ur device. You can use O vi Suite to synchr onise contacts , calendar, and to-do and other notes between your device and a compatible PC application. You can also use Ovi Suite to transfer bookmarks between your device and compatible browsers, and transfer images and video clips between your device and a compatible PC. Pay attention to synchronisation settings. Data deletion as part of normal synchronisation process is determined by the settings selected. To use Ovi Suite, you need a PC that runs Microsoft Windows XP (SP2 or newer) or Windows Vista (SP1 or newe r), and is compatible with a USB data cable or with Blue tooth connectivity. Ovi Suite is not compatible with Appl e Macintosh computers. For further information on Ovi Su ite, see the built-in help, or go to www.nokia.com/support . Install Nokia Ovi Suite 1. Ensure the memory card is inserted in your Nokia E66. 2. Connect the USB cable. Your PC rec ognises the new device and installs the necessary driv ers. This can take several minutes to complete. 3. Select Mass storage a s the USB connection mode in your device. Your device is displayed in the Wind ows file browser as a Removable Disk. 4. Open the root of the memory card drive with the Windows file browser, and select the Ovi Suite installation file. 5. The installation is starte d. Follow the instructions. Tip: To update Ovi Suite, or if you have problems when installing Ovi Suite from the memory card, copy the installation file to your PC , and install from your PC. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 27
New from Eseries Your new Eseries device contains new versions of the Calendar and Contac ts applications, as well as a new h ome screen. Access tasks quickly Whenever you see the icon on the home screen, or in the Contacts or Calendar applications, scroll right to access a list of availa ble actions. To close th e list, scroll left. When you navigate in thes e applications, to go back to the previous level, scroll left. Home screen From the home screen you can quickly access feat ures that you use the most, and see at a glance any missed calls or new messages. Navigate in the home screen To access the home screen, press the home key briefly. The home screen consists of: ⢠application shortcuts (1) To access an application quickly, scroll to its shortcut and pr ess the scroll key. ⢠information area (2) To check an item displayed in the information area, scroll to th e item and press the scroll key. ⢠notifications (3) T o view the notifications, scroll to a box. Each box is only visible if there are items in it. To hide the boxes, press the backspace key. Work on the home screen 1. To search for contacts in the home screen, start entering the contact's name. When ente ring the characters, press each key once. For example, to enter "Eric", press 3742 . The device suggests matching contacts. To switch between the alph abetic and number modes , select Optio ns > Alpha mod e or Number mode . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 28
2. In the list of suggested co ntacts, scroll to the desired contact. This feat ure may not be available in all languages. To call the contact, press the ca ll key. To set off the contact search, select Option s > Contact search off . To check your received messages, scroll to the message box in the notification area. To read a message, scroll to it and press the scroll key . To access othe r tasks, scroll righ t. To view your missed calls, sc roll to the calls box in the notification area. To return a ca ll, scroll to a call and press the call key. To send a text messag e to a caller, scroll to a call, scroll right and select Send text msg. from the list of available actions. To listen to your voice mail, scroll to the voice mail box in the notification area. Scroll to the desired voice mailbox and press the call key to call it. Switch home screens You can define t wo home screen modes for different purposes, such as one mode to show your business e-mail and notific ations, and an other to show your personal e-mail. This way, you do not ha ve to see busine ss-related messages outside office hours. Your operator may have set you a third home screen with operator-specific items. To change from one home screen mode to another, scroll to and press the scroll key. One-touch keys With the One-touch keys you can a ccess applications an d tasks quickly. Each key has been as signed an application and a task. To change thes e, select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > One-touch keys . Your network operator may have assig ned applications to t he keys, in which case you cannot change them. 1 â Home key 2 â Contacts key 3 â Calendar key 4 â E-mail key Home key To access the home screen, press the home key briefly. Press the home key briefly again to access the menu . To view the list of active appl ications, press the home key for a few seconds. When the lis t is open, press the home key briefly to scroll the list. To open the selected application, press the home key for a few seconds, or press the scroll key. To close the selected applic ation, press the backsp ace key. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 29
Leaving applications running in the background increases the demand on battery power an d reduces the battery life. Contacts key To open the Contacts app lication, press the cont acts key briefly. To create a new contact, press t he contacts key for a few seconds. Calendar key To open the Calendar applic ation, press the calendar key briefly. To create a new meeting entry, press the calendar key for a few seconds. E-mail key To open your default mailbox, press the e-mail key briefly. To create a new e-mail message, press the e-mail key for a few seconds. Nokia Calendar for Eseries Select Menu > Office > Calendar . Create and view scheduled ev ents and appo intments , and switch between differe nt calendar views. Calendar views You can switch between the following views: ⢠Month view shows the current month and th e calendar entries of the selected day in a list. ⢠Week view shows the events for the selected week in seven day boxes. ⢠Day view shows the events for the selec ted day grouped into time slots according t o their starting time. ⢠To-do view shows all to-do items. ⢠Agenda view shows the events for the selected day in a list. To change the view, select Option s > Change view and th e desired view. Tip: To open the week view, scroll to a week number and press the scroll key. Tip: To switch between views, press * . To move t o the nex t or the pr evious day in month, week, day, and agenda views, scroll right or left. To change the default view, select O ptions > Settings > Default view . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 30
View calendar information In the month view, calendar entries are marked with a triangle. Anniversary entries are also marked with an exclamation mark. The entries of the selected day are shown in a list. To open calendar entries, open a calendar view, scroll to an entry, and press the scroll key. Create calendar entries You can create the following types of calendar entries: ⢠Meeting entries remind you of events that ha ve a specific date and ti me. ⢠Memo entries are related to the whole day but not to a specific time of the day. ⢠Anniversary entries remi nd you of birthdays and special dates. They refer to a cert ain day but not a specific time of the day. Anniversary entries are repeated every year. ⢠To-do entries remind you of a task tha t has a due date but not a specific time of the day. To create a calendar entry, scroll to a date, select Options > New entry and the entry type. Tip: To create a meeting entry, start entering the subject. Create meeting, memo, anniversary, or to-do entries 1. Enter the subject. 2. For meeting entries, enter the start and end times, or select All-day event . 3. For meeting and memo entries, enter the start and end dates. For annivers ary entries, enter the date and for to- do entries, enter the due date. 4. For meeting entries, enter the location. 5. For meeting, anniversary, and to-do entries, you can se t an alarm. 6. For recurring meeting entrie s, set the recurrence time. 7. For to-do entries, set the priority. To set the priorit y for meeting entries, select Options > Prior ity . 8. For memo, a nniversary, and to-d o entries, define how the entry is handled during synchronisation. Select Private to hide the entry from viewers if the calendar is available online, Public to make the entry visible to viewe rs, or None to not copy the entry to yo ur computer. 9. Enter a description. To send the entry, select Options > Send . Calendar settings Select Options > Settings . To change the alarm tone, select Calendar alarm tone . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 31
To change the view displayed when you open the calendar, select Default view . To change the first day of the week, select Week star ts on . To change the week view title, select Week view title and Week number or We ek dates . Nokia Contacts for Eseries Select Menu > Communic. > Contacts . Save and update contact in formation, such as phone numbers, home addresses, or e-mail addresses of your contacts. You can add a personal ringing ton e or a thumbnail image to a contact. Y ou can also create contact groups, w hich allow you to communicate with s everal contacts at the s ame time, and send c ontact infor mation (bus iness cards) to o r receive it from compatible devices. Whenever you see the icon, scroll right to access a list of available actions. T o cl ose the list, scroll left. Add contacts Select Options > New contact , and enter the conta ct's information. To copy a contact's information from the memory card, select Options > Copy > From memory card . Contact groups Select each contact you want t o add to the contact grou p, press # to mark it, select Opt ions > Group > Add to group > Create new group > Group name , and enter a name for the group. If you want to make conference calls to the group, define also the following: ⢠Conf. service number â Enter the conf erence call service number. ⢠Conf. servi ce ID â Enter the conference call ID number. ⢠Conf. servi ce PIN â Enter the conference call PI N code number. To make a conference call to the group, select the group, Options > Call > Call conf. se rvice , and from the list of available actions. Search for contacts To search for contacts, st art entering the contact's name i n the search field. To switch to the predictive search mode, select Options > Activate predict. search . To search for contacts in the predictiv e search mode, enter the beginning of the cont act's name in the search field. To move to the next hit with th e same alphabet ical combination of letters, press * . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 32
Manage contacts directories To change the conta cts directory, scroll to the top of th e names list, pres s the scroll key, and select from the list of available directories. To organise contacts directories, select Options > Organise contact lists and a directory. Scroll up to move it to the desired place. Add ringing tones for contacts You can set a ringing ton e for a contact or contact grou p. The ringing tone sounds when the contact calls you. To add a ringing tone for contacts, open a contact, select Options > Ringing tone and a ringing tone. To add a ringing tone for contact groups, select a contact group, Options > Group > Ringing tone and a ringing tone. To remove the assigned ringing tone, select Default tone from the list of ringing tones. Change contacts settings Select Options > Settings . To change the way the contacts' names a re displayed, select Name display . To select which contacts dire ctory opens when you open the Contacts application, select Default contact list . Multitasking You can have several a pplicat ions open at the same time. To switch between activ e applicat ions, press and hold the home key, scroll to an application, and press the scroll key. To close the selected application, press the backspace key. Example: When you have an active phone call and want to check your calendar, press th e home key to access the menu, and open the Calend ar application. The phone call remains active in the background. Example: When you are writing a message and want to check a web site, press the home key to access the menu, and open th e Web application. Select a bookmark or enter the web address manu ally, and select Go to . To return to your message, pres s and hold the home key, scroll t o the message and press the scroll key. Open Ovi Ovi is your door to different Nokia services. For a tour and more information, see www.ovi.com. About Ovi Store In Ovi Store, you can download mobile games, applications, videos, im ages, and ring ing tones to your device. So me of the items are free of charge; others you need to purchase using your credit card or through your phone bill. Ovi Store offers é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 33
you content that is compat ible with your mobile device and relevant to your ta stes and location. The content in Ovi Store is sorted into the following categories: ⢠Recommended ⢠Games ⢠Personalisation ⢠Applications ⢠Audio & video é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 34
Personalisation You can personalis e your devi ce by adjusting the various tones, background im ages, an d screen s avers, for example. Profiles Select Menu > Tools > Profiles . You can adjust and customise th e ringing tones, alert tones, and other device tones for diffe rent events, environments, or caller groups. The profile currently in use is shown at the top of the display on the home sc reen. However, if the active profile is General, only today's date is shown. To create a new profile, select Options > Create new , an d define the settings. To customise a profile, select a profile and Optio ns > Personalise . To change a profile, select a profile and Options > Activate . The Offl ine profile prevents your device from accidentally switching on, send ing or receiving messages, or using wireless LAN, Bluetooth, GP S, or FM radio; it also closes any internet connecti on that may be in operati on when the profile is selected. The Offline profile does not prevent you from establishing a wireless LAN or Bluetooth connection at a later time, or from restart ing the GPS or FM radio, so comply with any applicable safety requi rements when establishing and using these features. To delete a profile that you created, select Options > Delete profile . You cannot delete the predefined profiles. Select ringing tones To set a ringing tone for a profile, select Options > Personalis e > Ringing ton e . Select a ringing tone from the list, or select Download sounds to open a bookmark folder containing a list of bookmark s for downloading tones using the browser. Any downloaded tones are saved to Gallery. To play the ringing tone for a selected con tact group only, select Option s > Personali se > Alert for , and select the desired group. Phone calls comi ng from outside that group have a silent alert. To change the message ton e, select Options > Personalis e > Message alert tone . Customise profiles Select Options > Personali se , and define the following: ⢠Ringing tone â Select a ringing tone from the list, or select Download sounds to open a bookmark folder containing a list of bookmarks for download ing tones using the browser. If you ha ve two alternate phone li nes in use, you can specify a ringin g tone for each line. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 35
⢠Video call tone â Select a r inging tone for video calls. ⢠Say caller's name â When you select this option and someone from your contacts list calls you, the device sounds a ringi ng tone that is a combination of the spoken name of the contact and the selected ring ing tone. ⢠Ringing type â S elect how you want th e ringing tone to alert. ⢠Ringing volume â Select the volume level of the ringing tone. ⢠Message alert tone â Select a tone for received text messages. ⢠E-mail alert tone â Select a tone for received e-mail messages. ⢠Vibrating alert â Set the device to vibrate when you receive a call. ⢠Keypad to nes â Set the volu me level of the device keypad t ones. ⢠Warning tones â Turn the warning tones on or off. This setting also affect s the tones of some ga mes and Java applications. ⢠Alert for â Set the device to ri ng only upon calls from phone numbers that belong to a selected contact group. Phone calls coming from outside that group have a silent alert. ⢠Profile na me â You can give a name to a new profile or rename an existing profile. The General and Offline profiles cannot be renamed. Personalise the home screen Select Menu > Tools > Modes . T o c h a n g e t h e n a m e o f t h e current h ome screen, select Mode name . To select which applications and notifications you want to see on the home screen, select Home screen applications . To change the theme of the ho me screen currently in use, select Theme . To change the background image of the home screen currently in use, select Wallpaper . To change from one home screen to another, select Switch mode . Change the display theme Select Menu > Tools > Them es . To change the theme used in all applications, select the General folder. To change the theme used in the main menu, select the Menu view folder. To change the theme for a particul ar application, select the application-specific folder. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 36
To change the background image of the home screen, select the Wallpaper folder. To select an animation for the screen saver, select the Power saver folder. Download a theme To download a theme, select General or Menu view > Download themes . Enter the link from which you wan t to download your theme. Once the theme is downloaded, you can preview, activate, or edit it. To preview a theme, select Options > Preview . To start using the selected theme, select Options > Set . 3-D ringing tones Select Menu > Media > 3-D tones . To enable 3-D sound effects for ringing tones, select 3-D ringing tone effects > On . Not all ringing tones support 3â D effects. To change the 3âÂÂD effect th at is applied to the ringing tone, select Sound trajectory and the desired effect. To select the speed at which sound moves from one direction to another, select Trajectory sp eed . This setting is not available for all effects. To adjust the amount of echo, select Reverberation and the desired effect. To listen to the ringing to ne with the 3âÂÂD effect, select Options > Play tone . To adjust the volume of the ringing tone, select Menu > Tools > Profiles > Options > Personalise > Ringin g volume . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 37
Media Your device contains a variet y of media applicat ions for both business and leisure time use. For more information, see the extended user guide on the web. Camera Select Menu > Media > Camera . Capture an image Your device supports an image capture resolution of up to 2048 x 1536 pixels. The image re solution in this guide ma y appear different. To capture an image, use the display as a viewfinder and press the scroll key. T he device saves the image in Galle ry. To zoom in or out before capt uring an image in the landscape mode, scroll up or down. This f u nction is availa ble only when the toolbar is not shown. The toolbar provides you with shortcuts to different items and settings before and af ter capturing an image or recording a video. Scroll to a toolbar item and press the scroll key. Switch between the vide o mode and the image mode. Select the scene. Select the flash mode (images only). Activate th e self-timer (ima ges only). Activate th e sequence mode (images only). Select a colour effect. Show or hide the viewfinder grid (images only). Adjust the white balance. Adjust the exposure compensation (images only). The available options vary de pending on the capture mode and view you are in. The settings return to the default after you close the camera. Scen es A scene helps you to find the ri ght colour and lighting settings for the current environment. Th e settings of each scene have been set according to a ce rtain style or environment. To change the scene, select Scene modes in the toolbar. To make your own scene, scroll to User defined , a nd select Options > Change . To copy the settings of another scene, select Based on scene mode and the desired scene. To activate your own scene, scroll to User define d , press the scroll key, and select Select . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 38
Capture images in a sequenc e To capture several images in a sequence, if enough memory is available, select Switch to sequen ce mode in the toolbar and press the scroll key. The captured images are shown in a grid on the display. To view an image, scroll to it and press the scroll key. If you used a time interval, only the last image is shown on the display, and the other images ar e available in Gallery. To send the image, select Options > Send . To switch off the sequence mode, select Switch to norm al mode in the toolbar. View captured image The image you ca ptured is automatically saved in G allery. If you do not want to keep the image, select Del ete from the toolbar. Select from the following toolbar items: ⢠Send â Send the image to compatible devices. ⢠Post to â S end the image to your compatible online album (network service). To use the image as the background image, select Options > Set as wallpaper . To add the image to a contact, se lect Options > Set as contact call img. > Assign to contact . Record videos 1. If the camera is in the im age mode, select the video mode from the toolbar. 2. To start recording, press the scroll key. 3. To pause recording at any time, select Paus e . Select Continue to resume recording. 4. To stop recording, select St op . The video clip is automatically saved in Galle ry. The maximum length of the video clip depends on the available memory. Play a video clip To play a recorded video clip, select Play from the too lbar. Select from the foll owing toolbar items: ⢠Send â Send the video clip to other compatible devices. ⢠Send to cal ler â Send the video clip to the caller during an active call. ⢠Post to â Send the video to an online album (network service). ⢠Delete â Delete the clip. To enter a new name for the clip, select Options > Rename video . Image settings To change the still image se ttings, select Options > Settings and from the following: é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 39
⢠Image quality â Set the image quality. The better the image quality, the more me mory the image consumes. ⢠Show captured image â To see the image after the capture, select On . To continue taking pictures immediately, select Off . ⢠Default image name â Define the default na me for the captured images. ⢠Extended digital zoom â On (continuous) allows the zoom increments to be sm ooth and cont inuous between the digital and extend ed digital zoom, and Off allows a limited amount of zoom while retaining the image resolution. ⢠Capture tone â S et the tone that sounds when you capture an image. ⢠Memory in use â Choose where to store your images. ⢠Rotate image â Rotate th e images. ⢠Restore camera set tings â To return the default values to the camera settings, se lect Yes . Video settings To change the video mode setting s, select Opti ons > Settings and from the following: ⢠Video quality â Set the quality of the video clip. Select Sharing , if you want to send the video clip using a multimedia message. The clip is recorded with QCIF resolution, in the 3GPP file format , and the size is limited to 300 kB (approximately 20 seconds). You may not be able to send video clips saved in the MPEG-4 file format in a multimedia message. ⢠Audio recording â Select Mute if you do not want to record sound. ⢠Show captured vi deo â View the first frame of the recorded video clip after the recording stops. To view the entire video clip , select Play from the t oolbar. ⢠Default video name â Define the default name for recorded video clips. ⢠Memory in use â Choose where to store your video clips. ⢠Restore came ra settings â Restore the camera settings to the default va lues. Nokia Podcasting Select Menu > Media > Podcas ting . Download podcasts to your device an d listen them. Play and mana ge podcasts Podcasting delivers audio or video content over the internet for playback on mobile devices and PCs. With the Nokia Podc asting applica tion, you can s earch, discover, subscribe, and download podcast s over the air; and play, manage, and sha re podcasts with your device. Define the connection and downloading settings before using the application. Select Options > Setti ngs > Connection and Download . To search for new podcast episodes to subscr ibe to, select Directories . To search for podcasts usin g keywords and podcast show titles, select Search . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 40
To display the avai lable episod es from the selected podcast, open the Podcasts folder and select Ope n . To download the selected episode, select Download . To play the download ed episode, select Play . To update the selected podcast or marked podcasts, for a new episode, select Options > Update . To open the web site of the podcast (network service), select Options > Open web page . Some podcasts provide the opportunity to interact with the creators by commenting and voting. To connect to th e internet to do this, select Options > View comments . Directories Select Directories . Directories help you find new podcast episodes to which to subscribe. Contents of the directories change. Select the desired directory folder to update it (network service). The colour of the folder changes, when the update is complete. To subscribe to a podcast, s croll to the podcast title and select Update . After you have subscribed to episodes of a podcast, you can download, manage, a nd play them in the podcasts menu. To add a new directory or folder, select Option s > New > Web directory or Fo lder . Select a title, URL of the .opml (outline processor markup language) file, and Done . To import an .opml file stored on your device, select Options > Import OPML file . To save a received .opml file, open the file to save the file i nto the Received folder in Directories. Open the folder to subscribe to any of the links to add to your podcasts. Search podcasts Search helps yo u find podc asts by keyword or title. The search engine uses the podcast search service you set up in Podcasting > Options > Se ttings > Connection > Search service URL . To search for podcasts, select Search , and enter the desired keywords. Tip: Search looks for podcast titles and keywords in descriptions, not specific episodes. General topics, such as football or hip-hop, usually give better results than a specific team or artist. To subscribe to selected ch annels and add them to your podcasts, select Subscrib e . To start a new search, select Options > New search . To see the details of a podcast, select Options > Description . Podcasting settings To edit the connection settings, select Options > Settings > Connection . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 41
To edit the download settings, select Options > Settings > Download . To restore the default sett ings, open the corresponding settings and select Options > Rest ore default . Music player Select Menu > Media > Music player . Music player supports files form ats such as AAC, AAC , eAAC , MP3, and WM A. Music pl ayer does not n ecessarily s upport all features of a file format or a ll the variations of file formats. You can also use Music play er to listen to podcast episodes. Podcasting is a method for deli vering audio or video content over the internet using either RSS or Atom technologies for playback on mobile devices and PCs. You can transf er music from other compatible devices t o your device. See "Transfer music from a computer" , p. 43 . Play a song or a podcast episode To add all available song s and podcasts to the music library, select Options > Refresh . To play a song or a podcast episode, select Music or Podcasts and the desired category, then scroll to the song or podcast episode and press the scroll key. To pause playba ck, press the scroll key; to resume , press the scroll key again. To stop playback, scroll down. To fast forward or rewind, pres s and hold the scroll key to the right or left. To go to the next item, scroll ri ght. To return to the beginning of the item, scroll left. To skip to the previous item, scroll left again within 2 seconds a fter a song or podcast has started. To modify the tone of the music playback, select Options > Equaliser . To modify the balance and ster eo image or to enhance bass, select Option s > Audio settings . To return to the home screen and leave the player playing in the background, press the end key. Playlists To view and manage playlists, select Music > Playlists . To create a new playlist, select Options > Create playl ist . To add songs to the playlist, select the song and Opti ons > Add to a playlist > Saved playlist or Ne w playlist . To reorder songs in a playlist, scroll to the song you want to move, and select Options > Reorder list . Nokia Music Store Select Menu > Media > Music store . In the Nokia Music Store (network service) you can search, browse, and purchase music to download to you r device. To purchase music, you need to register for the service. Nokia Music Store is not availabl e in all regions and countries. To find more music in the different categories, select Options > Find in Music store . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 42
To select the access point to use with the Music Store, select Default acc. pt. . Transfer music from a computer You can use the following me thods to tr ansfer music: ⢠To install Nokia Ov i Player to manage an d organise your music files, download the PC software from www.ovi.com, and follow the instructions . ⢠To view your device on a computer as a mass memory device where you can transfer any d ata files, make the connection with a compatible U SB data cable or Bluetooth connectivity. If you are using a USB data cable, select Mass storag e as the connection mode. A compa tible memory card must be inserted in the device. ⢠To synchronise music with Windows Media Player, connect a compatible USB data cable, and select Media transfer as the connection mode. A compatible memory card must be inserted in the device. To change the defaul t USB connection mode, select Menu > Connectivity > USB and USB connection mode . Preset frequency settings Select Menu > Media > Music player > Options > Go to Now playing > Options > Equaliser . To use a preset frequency sett i ng when playin g music, select the frequency setting you wa nt to use, and se lect Opt ions > Activate . To modify the frequency of a preset setting, select Options > Edit , select a frequency band, and scroll up or down to increase or decrease its valu e. You hear your frequency adjustmen t immediately in the playback. To reset the frequency bands to their original values, select Options > Reset to defaults . To create your own freq uency setting, select Options > New preset . Enter a name for the frequency setting. Scroll up or down to mo ve between the frequ ency bands and set the frequency on each band. Share online Select Menu > Media > Share online . You can share images and vide o clips in compatible online albums, blogs, or in other comp atible online sharing services on the web. You can u pload content, save unfinished posts as drafts and continue later, an d view the content of the albums. The sup ported content types may va ry depending on the service provider. To share files online, you must have an account with a n online image sharing service. You can usually subscribe to such a service on the web page of your service provider. Contact your service provider for more information. Share images online To upload a file from Gallery to the online service, select Menu > Gallery , select the desired file and Options > Send > Post t o web . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 43
Recorder Select Menu > Media > Record er . With Recorder, you can record up to 60 minutes of a voice memo, save the voice recording as a sound clip, and play th e sound clip. Recorder suppo rts the AMR file format. You can also press the voice key to open the Recorder application. If you ha ve logged in to push to talk, the voice key works as a push-to-talk key and does not open Rec order. Record a sound clip To record a sound clip, select Options > Record s ound clip . Select Pause to pause the recording, and Record to resume recording. When you finish recording , select Stop . The sound clip is automatically saved to th e Sound clips folder in Gallery. Play a recording To listen to the sound clip that you just recorded, select Play . The progress bar displays th e playing time, p osition, and length of the clip. Select St op to cancel the playback. To pause the playback of a recorded clip, select Pause . Playback resumes when you select Play . Recorder settings Recordings are automatically sav ed to the device memory unless you change the default lo cation. Recordings that you create or receive after you change the settin gs are affected. To change the default location of saved recordings, select Options > Settings > Memory in use . To define the recording quality, select Options > Settings > Recording quality . If you sele ct High , the sound clip you record is in waveform file format (.wav) and th e maximum length for the clip is 60 minutes. If you select MMS compatible , the sound clip you record is in adaptive multirate file format (.amr), and the maximum leng th for the clip is one minute. Gallery Select Menu > Media > Gallery . Use Gallery to access and use different types of media, including images, videos, mu sic, and sounds. All viewed images and video s, and all re ceived music and sounds are automatically saved to Ga llery. Sound clips are opened in the Music player, and video clips and streaming lin ks in the RealPlayer application. Im ages are opened in the image viewer. Work with media files and folders To open a file or a folder, select the file or folder. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 44
To create a new folder, select a file and Options > Organise > New folder . You cannot create folders within folders. To copy or move files, select a file and Options > Organise > Move to folder , New fol der , Move to me mory card , Copy to mem ory card , Copy to phon e mem. , or Move to phone mem. . To download files into Gallery using the browser, select Downl. graphics , Downld. videos , or Downld. sounds . T he browser opens, and you can choose a bookmark or enter the address for the download site. To search for a file, select Options > Find . Write the item you are searching for. Files that match th e search are displayed. View images To open an image fo r viewing, select Options > Open . To open the next or previous image for viewing, scroll right or left. To enlarge the image on the disp lay, select Options > Zoom in . To reduce the image on the display, select Zoom out . To view the image in full screen size, select Options > Full screen . To return to normal view, select Options > Norm al screen . To rotate the image, select Options > Rotate . Select Right to rotate the image clockwise by 90 degrees, or select Left to rotate the image counterclockwise by 90 degrees. Manage image files To view detailed informat ion about the image, select Options > View details . To send the image, select Options > Se nd , and the me thod for sending. To rename the image, select Options > Rename . To set the image as th e display background, select O ptions > Use image > Set as wallpaper . To add the image to a contact, select Option s > Use image > Assign to contact . The Contacts application opens, and you can select the contact for the image. RealPlayer Select Menu > Media > RealPlayer . RealPlayer plays vi deo clips an d audio files that are stored in the device memory or on a memory card, transferred to your device from an e-mail messag e or a compatible computer, or streamed to your device over the web. Supported formats include MPEG-4, MP4 (not streaming), 3GP, RV, RA, AMR, and Midi. RealPlayer does not nece ssarily support all variations of a media file format. Play video clips and stream links To play a video clip or audio file, select Options > Open > Most recent clips to play one of the six clips you most é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 45
recently played, or Saved clip to play a clip or open a web link. Select Play . To play streaming media, select a web link th at points to a clip, and select Play ; or connect to the web, browse to a video clip or audio file, and select Play . RealPlayer recognises two kinds of links: an rtsp:// URL and an ht tp:// URL that points to a RAM file. Before the content begins s treaming, y our device must connect to a web site and buffer the content. If a network connection problem causes a playback error, RealPlayer attempts au tomatically to reconnect to the internet access point. To adjust the volume during playba ck, use the volume keys. To fast-forward during play back, scroll up and hold. To rewind during play, scroll down and hold. To stop the playback or streaming, select Stop . Buffering or connecting to the streaming site stops, the playback of the clip stops, and the clip rewinds to the begi nning. To download video clips from the web, select Options > Download videos . To view the video clip in full-screen size, select Option s > Play in full screen . Full screen increas es the size of the video to cover the maximum video area possible while the aspect ratio is maintained. Send audio files and video clips To transfer a media clip to a compatible device, select Options > Send . Select the sending method. To send a media clip in side a message, create a multimedi a message, select a clip to attach and Insert object > Video clip or Sound clip . View information about a media clip To view the properties of a video or sound clip, or web link, select Option s > Clip details . Information may include for example the bit rate or the inte rnet link of a streaming file. RealPlayer settings You may receive RealP layer sett ings in a message fro m your service provider. To define the settings manually, select Options > Settings > Vid eo or Streaming . Flash player Select Menu > Media > Flash Player . With Flash player, you can view, play, and int eract with flash files made for mobile devices. Manage flash files To optimise the use of Flash Pl ayer, insert a memory card in your device. To play a flash file, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 46
To send a flash file to co mpatible devices, select Options > Send . Copyright protection may prevent the sending of some flash files. To switch between flash files saved on your device memory or memory card, scroll to the corresponding tabs. To change the flash file quality, select Option s > Quality when you are playing the fla sh file. If you select High , the playback of some flash files ma y appear uneven and slow due to their original settings. Chan ge the quality setting of such files to Normal or Low for improved playback. To organise your flash files, select Op tions > Organise . Radio Select Menu > Media > Radio . The quality of the radio broa dcast depends on the coverage of the radio station in that particular area. The FM radio depends on an antenn a other than the wireless device antenna. At tach a compatible headset or enhancement to the device for th e FM radio to function properly. Listen to the radio To search for a station, s elect or . To set the frequency manually, select Options > Manual tuning . To view available stati ons based on location, select Options > Station directory (network service). To save the current station to your station list, select Options > Save station . To select a previously saved radio station, select or . To adjust the volu me, use t he volume keys . To switch from headset use to listeni ng to the radio through the loudspeaker, select Op tions > Activate loud speaker . To return to the home screen and leave the FM radio playing in the background, select Options > Play in background . View visual content To check availability a nd cost s, and to subscribe to the service, contact your service provider. Before you can view visual content, you mus t have an internet access point defined at Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points . 1. To view available visual content for a tuned station, select Options > Start visual service . If the visual radio service ID has not been saved for the station, enter it, or select Retrieve to s e a r c h f o r i t i n t h e station directory (network service). 2. Select the location nearest to y ou from the station directory. If your device finds a station that matches the tuned frequency, its visual service ID is displayed. To view the visual content, select OK . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 47
Saved stations To open the list of your s aved stations, select Options > Stations . To listen to a saved station, select Optio ns > Statio n > Listen . To view available visu al content for a sta tion with the Visual Radio service, select Option s > Station > Start visual service . To change the station details, select Options > Station > Edit . Radio settings Select Options > Settings and from the following: ⢠Start-up t one â Select whether a tone is played when the application is started. ⢠Auto-start se rvice â Select Ye s to have the Visual Radio service start automatically when you select a sa ved station that offers the Visual Radio service. ⢠Access point â Select the access point used for the data connection. You do not need an access p oint to use the application as an ordinary FM radio. Internet radio Select Menu > Media > Internet radio . Listen to internet radio stations Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. Continuous exposure to hi gh volume may damage y our hearing. Do not hold the device near your ea r when the loudspeaker is in use, becaus e the volume may be extremely loud. To listen to a radio station on the internet, select a station from the station directory , search stations by their name from the Nokia Internet Radi o service, or select Optio ns > Add station manually . When you have found the correct station, select Listen . To stop the playback, press th e scroll key. To resume the playback, press the scroll key again. To adjust the volu me, use t he volume keys . To view station information, select Op tions > Station information (not available if you h ave saved the stati on manually). If you are listening to a station saved in your favourites, scroll left or right to listen to the previou s or next saved station. Tip: You can browse for station links with the Web application. Comp atible links are automatically opened in the Internet radio application. Search for station s To search for radio stations in the Nokia Internet Radio service by their name, select Search . Enter a station name or the first letters of it in th e search field, and select Search . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 48
To listen to the station , select Listen . To save the station to your favourites, select Options > Add to Favourites . To make another search, select Optio ns > Search again . Save stations To view and listen to your favourit e stations, select Favourites . To add a station manually t o favourites, select Opt ions > Add statio n manuall y . Enter the web address of the station and a name that you want to ap pear in the favourites list. To add the currently playing stat ion to favourites, select Options > Add to Favourites . To view station information, to move a station up or down in the list, or to delete a station from the fa vourites, select Options > Station and the desired option. To view only stations beginning with p articular letters or numbers, start entering the ch aracters. M atching station s are displayed. Internet radio settings To select the default access point to connect to th e network, select Options > Settings > Default access point . Select Always ask if you want the device to ask for the access point every time you open the application. To change the connection speed for GPRS packet data connections, select Option s > Settings > GPRS connection bit rate . To change the connection speed for 3G packet data connections, select Option s > Settings > 3G connection bitrate . To change the connection spee d for WLAN connections, select Options > Settings > Wi-Fi connection bitrate . The quality of the radio broa dcast depends on the selected connection speed. The higher the speed, the better the quality. To avoid buffering, us e the highest quality only with high speed connections. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 49
Internet With yo ur new E series device you can browse both the internet and your co mpany's in tranet, and downloa d and install new applications to your device. You can also use your device as a modem and connect your PC to the internet . Web Select Menu > Web . To browse the web (network se rvice), you need to configure the internet access point settings. If you are using a data call or GPRS connection, your wire less network must support data calls or GPRS, and the data serv ice must be activated for your SIM card. Tip: You may receive the internet access point settings from your service provider as a special text message or from the service provider's web pages. You can also enter the internet access point settings manually. See "Internet access points" , p. 52 . Check the availability of servic es, pricing, and fees with your service provider. Service providers also give you instructions on how to use their services. Connection security If the security indicator ( ) is displayed during a connection, the data transmission between the device and the internet gateway or server is encrypted. The security icon does not indicate that the data transmission between th e gateway and the content server (or place where the requested resource is stored) is secure. Th e service provider secures the data transmission between the gateway and the content server. Security certificates may be re quired for some services, such as banking services. You are noti fied if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your device. For more information, contact your service provider. Browse the web To browse the web, select a bookmark or enter the web address manually , and select Go to . Use only services that you trust and that offer adequate se curity an d protection against harmful software. Tip: When you start to enter the address, the addresses of the pages you have previously visited that match your input are displayed. To open a page, scroll to its address, and pre ss the scroll key. To move on a web page, use the scroll key, which is shown as a pointer on the page. When y ou move the pointer over a link, the pointer changes in to a hand. Press the scroll key to open the link. On a web page, new links usually appear é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 50
underlined in blue and previou sly visited links in purple. Images that act as links ha ve a blue border around them. The addresse s of the pages you visit are saved in the Aut o. bookmarks folder. Bookmarks To access the bookmarks view whi le browsing, select Options > Bookmarks . To view a bookmarked web page, select the bookmark. To browse to another web page, select Options > Go to we b address , enter the web address, and select Go to . To add a bookmark while browsing, select Options > Save as bookmark . To organise your bookmarks, in the bookmarks view, select Options > Bookmark manager . You can move and edit bookmarks, and create new folders. Clear the cache A cache is a memory location tha t is used to store data temporarily. If you have tried to access or have accessed confidential information re quiring passwords, empty the cache after each use. The info rmation or services you have accessed are stored in the cache. To empty the cache, select Opti ons > Clear privacy data > Clear cache . Feeds and bl ogs Select Menu > Web > Web feeds . Feeds usually contain headlines and articles, often about recent news or other topics. Blog is a short ening of weblog, which is a continuously updated web diary. To download a feed or blog, scroll to it, and p ress the scroll key. To add or edit a feed or blog, select Options > Manag e feed > New fe ed or Edit . End a connection To end the connection and vi ew the browser page offline, select Option s > Tools > Disconnect . To end th e connection and close the browser, select Options > Exit . Web settings Select Menu > Web > Optio ns > Settings . The web settings are divided into four groups: ⢠General contains access point, home page, an d browsing security setting s. ⢠Page contains imaging, audio, and pop-up settings. ⢠Privacy contains settings related to your privacy. ⢠Web feeds con tains settings related to web feeds and blogs. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 51
Browse the intranet Select Menu > Office > Intra net . To browse your company's i ntranet, you must create a company-specific VPN policy. Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > VP N . To connect to the intranet, op en the Intranet appli cation, select the connection method a nd Options > Connect . To define which VPN profile to use in the connection, select Options > Use other VPN poli cy . To define the settings for th e intranet connection, select Options > Settings . Internet access points An internet access point is a collection of settings, which define how the device creates a data connection t o the network. To use e-mail and mult imedia services or to browse web pages, you must first defi ne access points for these services. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to create, edit, or remove them. Set up an internet access point for packet data (GPRS) 1. Select Menu > To ols > Se ttings > Connection > Access points . 2. Select Options > New access point to create a new access point, or select an ex isting access point from the list and then Optio ns > Duplicate access point to use the access point as a basis for th e new one. 3. Define the following settings. ⢠Connection name â Enter a descript ive name for the connection. ⢠Data bearer â Select Packet da ta . ⢠Access point name â Enter the nam e for the access point. The name is usually provided by your service provider. ⢠User name â E nt er y o ur u s er n am e if r eq u ir e d b y th e service provider. User names are often case-sensitive and provided by your service provider. ⢠Prompt password â Select Yes to enter your p a s s w o r d e a c h t i m e y o u l o g i n t o a s e r v e r o r No to save the password in your device memory a nd automate the login. ⢠Password â Enter your password if required by the service provider. The password is often case-sensitive and provided by the service provider. ⢠Authenticat ion â Select Secure to send your password always encrypted, or Normal to send your password encryp ted when possible. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 52
⢠Homepage â Enter the web address of the page you want to display as the home page when you use this access point. 4. After defining the s ettings, select Options > Advanced settings to define the advanced set tings or Back to sa ve the settings and exit. Advanced internet access point settings for packet data (GPRS) Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points . After setting up a basic internet access point for packet data (GPRS), select Options > Advanced settings , and define the following advanced settings: ⢠Network t ype â Select IPv4 or IPv6 as the internet protocol type. The internet protocol defines how data is transferred to and from your device. ⢠Phone IP addres s â Enter the IP address of your device. Select Auto matic to have the network pro vide the device IP address. This se tting is shown only if you select Network t ype > IPv4 . ⢠DNS address â Select Primary DNS address and Secondary DNS address and enter their IP addresse s, if required by your service provider. Otherwise, the name server addresses are pr ovided automatically. ⢠Proxy server addres s â Enter the address of the proxy server. Proxy servers are intermediate servers used by some service providers between a browsing service and its users. These servers may provide additional security and speed up access to the service. Set up an access point for WLAN manually 1. Select Menu > To ols > Se ttings > Connection > Access points . 2. Select Options > New access point to create a new access point, or select an ex isting access point from the list and then Optio ns > Duplicate access point to use the access point as a basis for th e new one. 3. Define the following settings. ⢠Connection name â Enter a descriptive name for the connection. ⢠Data bearer â Select Wireless LAN . ⢠WLAN network nam e â To enter the service set identifier (SSID), that is, the name that identifies the specific WLAN, select Enter manually . To s elect the network from the WLANs in range, select Search for networks . ⢠Network status â Sel ect Hidden if the network you are connecting to is hidden or Publi c if it is not hi dden. ⢠WLAN network mode â If you select Infrastructure , devices can commu nicate with each other and with wired LA N devices through a WLAN access point. If you sele ct Ad-hoc , devices can send and receive data directly with each other, and no WLAN access point is needed. ⢠WLAN security mode â You mus t select the same security mode that is used in the WLAN access point. If you select WEP (wired equivalent privacy), 802.1x, or WPA/WPA2 (W i-Fi protected access), you must also configure the relevant additional settings. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 53
⢠WLAN security se ttings â Edit the security settings for the selected security mode. ⢠Homepage â Enter the web a ddress of the pa ge you want to display as the home page when you use this access point. To set up a WLAN access p oint automatically, use the WLAN wizard. Select Menu > Connectivi ty > WLAN wiz. . Advanced access point settings for WLAN Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points . After setting up a basic access point for WLAN, select Options > Advanced setting s , and define the following advanced settings : ⢠IPv4 settings â Enter the device IP and name server addresses for the IPv4 internet protocol. ⢠IPv6 setti ngs â Select or enter the name server addresses for the IPv6 internet protocol. ⢠Ad-hoc channel â The channel is usually chosen automatically. To enter the chann el number (1-11) manually, select User defined . ⢠Proxy server addres s â Enter the proxy server address. ⢠Proxy port numb er â Enter the proxy server port number. Connect PC to web You can use yo ur device to connect your PC to the web. 1. Connect the data cable to the USB connectors of your device and your PC. 2. Select Connect PC t o web . The necessary software is automatically installed from your device to the PC. 3. Accept the installation in your PC. Accept also the connection, if prompted. When the connection to the web is established, the web br owser of your PC opens. You must have administ rator rights to your PC, and t he autorun option en abled in the PC. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 54
Messaging Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging . In Messaging (network service), you can send and receive text messages, mult imedia messages , audio messages, and e - mail messages. You can als o receive web service m essages, cell broadcast messages, and special messa ges containing data, and send serv ice commands. Before sending or receiving messages, you m ay need to do the following: ⢠Insert a valid SIM card in the device and be located in the service area of a cellular network. ⢠Verify that the network supports the messaging feat ures you want to use and that they are activated on your SIM card. ⢠Define the internet access point settings on the device. See "Internet access points" , p. 52 . ⢠Define the e-mail account settin gs on the device. See "E- mail account settings" , p. 70 . ⢠Define the text message setting s on the device. See "Text message setting s" , p. 69 . ⢠Define the multimedia message sett ings on the device. See "Multimedia messa ge settings" , p. 69 . The device may recognise the SIM card provider and automatically configure some of the message settings. If not, you may need to define the settin gs manually; or contact your service provider to configure the settings. Messaging folders Messages and data receive d usin g Bluetooth connectivity or infrared are stored in the Inbox folder. E-mail messages are stored in Mailbox . Messages that you have been writing can be stored in the Drafts folder. Messages that are waiti ng to be sent are stored in the Outbox folder, and messages that have been sent, excluding Bluetooth and infr ared messages, are stored in the Sent folder. Tip: Messages are placed in Outbox, for example, when your device is outside ne twork coverage. You can also schedule e-mail messages to be sent the nex t time you connect to your remote mailbox. Note: The message sent icon or text on your device screen does not indicate that the message is received at the intended destination . To request the network to send you a delivery report of the text message s and multimedia messa ges you have s ent (network service), select Options > Settin gs > Text message or Multimedia message > Receive report . The reports are saved in the Reports fold er. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 55
Organise messages To create a new folder to or ganise your me ssages, select My folders > Options > New folder . To rename a folder, select Options > Rename folder . You can only rename folders that you have created. To move a message to anoth e r folder, select the message, Options > Move to folder , the folder, and OK . To sort messages in a specific order, select Optio ns > Sort by . You can sort the message s by Date , Sender , Subject , or Message type . To view the properties of a me ssage, select the message and Options > Message details . Message reader The message reader reads received text and multimedia messages al oud. To play a mess age, press and h o ld the left selection key when you receive a message. To start reading the next messa ge in Inbox, scroll down. To start reading the m essage again, scroll up. I n the beginning of the message, scroll up t o hear the previous m essage. To pause the reading, press th e left selection key briefly. To continue, press the left selection key briefly again. To end the reading, press the end key. Speech Select Menu > Tools > Speech . With Speech, you can set the langu age, voice, and voice properties for the message reader. Edit the voice properties To set the language for the messa ge reader, select Langua ge . To download additional languages to your device, visit the Nokia web site. To set the speaking voice, select Voice . The voice is language- dependent. To set the speaking rate, select Voice settings > Speed . To set the speaking volume, select Voice settings > Volume . To listen to a voice, open the voice tab, select the voice, and select Option s > Play voice . E-mail messages Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Mailbox . To receive and send e-mail, y ou must have a remote m ailbox service. This service may be o ffered by an internet service provider, a network service provider, or your company. Your device is compliant with in ternet standards SMTP, IMAP4 (revision 1), and POP3, and with different vendor-specific e- mail solutions. Other e-mail pr oviders may offer services with é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 56
different settings or features than those described in this us er guide. For more details, contact your service provider or e- mail service provider. You may be able to install the following e-mails to your device: ⢠Regular POP or IMAP e-mail. You need to con nect to the mailbox, and download the e-mails to your device befor e you can read them. ⢠Nokia Messaging. N okia Messaging is used with different internet e-mail providers, such has Google e-mail services. Nokia Messaging pushes the ne w e-mails t o your d evice as long as the Nokia Messag ing application is open. ⢠Mail fo r Exchan ge. Mail for Ex change is usually used for accessing work e-mails. Your company's IT department may have further instructions on how to install and use Mail for Exchange with your company's e-mail servers. Other e-mail solution s may be available. If you have defined several ma ilboxes, for example a POP or I M A P e - m a i l a n d M a i l f o r E x c h a n g e , s e l e c t o n e o f t h e m a s y o u r default mailbox. That mailbox is used every time you start composing a new e-mail messa ge. To define the default mailbox in Messaging, select Options > Settings > E-mail > Default mailbox and the mailbox. E-mail in home screen To select the mailbox that is shown in the home screen, select Menu > Tools > Settin gs > General > Personalisation > Home screen > Mode settings > Home screen applications > E-mail 1 notifi cation > Mailbox and the e-mail account. To check that th e mailbox that yo u selected can be shown in the home screen, select Menu > Tools > Settin gs > General > Personalisation > Home screen > Mod e settings > Home screen applications > Enabled applications and E-mail 1 notifi cation or E-mail 2 notification . Nokia Messaging The Nokia Messagin g service automatically pushes e-mail from your existing e-mail address to your Nokia E66. You can read, respond to, and organise your e-mails on the go. The Nokia Messaging service works wi th a number of internet e- mail providers that are often used for personal e-mail, such as Google e-mail services. The Nokia Messagin g service may be char geable. For information on possible costs, contact your service provider or the Nokia Messaging service. The Nokia Messaging service must be supporte d by your network and m ay not be av ailab le in all regions. Install the Nokia messaging applic ation 1. Select Menu > Noki a E-mail > New . 2. Read the information on the display, and select Start . 3. Select Connect to allow your device to ac cess the network. 4. Enter your e-mail address an d password. The Nokia Messagin g service can run on your device even if you have installed other e-mail applications, such as Mail for Exchange. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 57
Mail for Exchange With Mail for Exchange, you ca n receive your work e-mail to your devi ce. You can read and re ply to your e-mails, view and edit compatible attachments , view calendar information, receive and reply to meeting requests, schedule meetings, and view, add, and ed it contact inform ation. ActiveSync Use of the Mail for Exchange is limited to over-the-air synchronisation of PIM info rmation between the Nokia device and the authorised Microsoft Exchange server. Mail for Exchange can be set up only if your company has Microsoft Exchange Server. In additi on, your company's IT administrator must have activa ted Mail for Exchange for your account. Before starting to set up Mail for Exchange, ensure that y ou have the following: ⢠A corporate e-mail ID ⢠Your office network user nam e ⢠Your office network password ⢠Your network domain name (contact your company's IT departm ent) ⢠Your Mail for Exchange server name (contact your company's IT dep artment) Depending on your company's Mail for Exchange server configuration, you may need to enter other information in addition to those listed. If you do not know the correct information, contact your company's IT department. With Mail for Excha nge, the use of th e lock code may be m a n d a t o r y . T h e d e f a u l t l o c k c o d e o f y o u r d e v i c e i s 1 2 3 4 5 , b u t your company's IT administrator may ha ve set a different one for you to use. You can access and modify the Mail for Exch ange profile and settings in the Messaging setti ngs. Regular POP or IMAP e-mail Your device can download e-ma ils from a POP or IMAP e-mail account. POP3 is a version of the post office protocol that is used to store and retrieve e-mail or in ternet mail messages from a server. IMAP4 is a version of the internet me ssage access protocol that lets you access and mana ge e-mail messages while the messages are still on the e-mail server. You can then choose which messages to download to y our device. Set up POP or IMAP e-mail 1. Go to the home screen, scro ll to the e-mail wizard, and press the scroll key. 2. Select Start e-mail setup . 3. Read the information on the display, and select Start . 4. Select Yes to allow your device to access the ne twork. 5. Enter your e-mail address an d password. 6. Read the information on the display, and select OK to finalise e-mail setup. The na me of your new mailbox replaces Mailbox in the Messaging main v iew. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 58
Tip: Af ter you have set up a POP or I MAP e-mail, in the Messaging mai n view, sele ct Optio ns > Settings > E-mail and the mailbox to edit the setting s, for example a possible signature, or the name of your mailbox. Connect to a remote mailbox E-mail addressed to you is not automa tically received by yo ur device, but by your remote mailbox. To read your e-mail, you must first connect to the remote mailbox; then select the e- mail messages you wish to retrieve into your device. 1. To retrieve received e-mail messages to your device and view them, select your ma ilbox in the Messaging main view. When the device asks Connect to mailbox? , select Yes . 2. Enter your user name and password, if prompted. 3. Select Option s > Retrieve e-mail > New to retrieve new messages that you have neither read nor retrieved, Selected to retrieve only messages you select from the remote mailb ox, or All to retrieve all messages not previously retrieved. 4. To manage your e-mail offline to save in co nnection costs and work in conditions th at do not allow a dat a connection, select Options > Disconnect to discon nect from the remote mailbox. Any changes you ma ke in the remote mailbox folders while offline, take effect in your remote mailbox the next time you go online and synchronise. Read and reply to e-mail Important: Exercise caution wh en opening messages. Messages may contain ma licious software or othe rwise be harmful to your device or PC. To read a received e-mail, open it from the mailbox. To open an attachment, select Option s > Attachments . Scroll to the attachment, and press the scroll key. To reply only to the sender of an e-mail, select Opt ions > Reply > To se nder . To reply to all recipients of an e-mail, select Options > Reply > To all . Tip: If you reply to an e-mail that con tains attached files, the attachments are not included in the rep ly. If you forward the received e-mai l, the attachments are included. To forward an e-ma il, select Options > Forward . To attach a file to an e-mail messa ge, select Optio ns > Insert and the attachment you want to add. To delete an attachment from an e-mail that you are sending , select the attachment and Opti ons > Remove . To set the message priority, select Options > Sending options > Priority . To set the sending time for th e e-mail message, select Options > Sending optio ns > Send message . Select Immediately , or select When conn. avail. if yo u are working offline. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 59
To call the sender of the e-mail message, if the sender can be found in Contacts, select Options > Call . To reply to the sender of th e e-mai l with an audio message or multimedia message, select Opti ons > Create message . Write and send e-mail 1. To write an e-mail, select New message > E-mail . 2. Select Options > Add recipient to select the recipients' e-mail addresses from Cont acts, or enter the e-mail addresses in the To field. Use a semicolon to separate entries. Use the Cc field to send a copy to other recipient s, or the Bcc field t o send a bl ind cop y to reci pient s. 3. In the Subject field, enter the subject o f the e-mail. 4. Enter your e-mail message in the text area, and select Options > Send . Delete messages To free up memory space on your device, regularly delete messages from th e Inbox and Sent folders, and delete retrieved e-mail messages. To delete e-mail from the device only, and keep the original on the server, select Options > Delete > Phone (h eader remains) . To delete e-mail both from th e device and the remote server, select Options > Delete > Phone and server . To cancel the deleting, select Options > Restore . Subfolders in your remote e-mail If you create subfolders in yo ur IMAP4 mailboxes on a remote server, you can view and manage these folders with your device when you subscribe to them. You can only subscribe to folders in your IMAP4 mailboxes. To view folders in your IMAP4 mailbox, establish a connection, and select Opti ons > E-mail settings > Retrieval se ttings > Fold er subscriptions . To view a remote folder, select a folder and Options > Subscribe . Every time you go online, the subscribed folders are updated. This may take some time if the folders are large. To update the list of fold ers, select a folder and Options > Update fo lder list . Text messages Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging . Write and send text messages Your device supports text messag es beyond the limit for a single message. Longer messag es are sent as two or more messages. Your service provid er may charge accordingly. Characters with accent s, ot her marks, or some languag e options take more spa ce, and limit the number of ch aracters that can be sent in a single message. 1. To write a tex t message, select Ne w message > Text message . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 60
2. In the To field, enter a recipien t's number, or press the scroll key to add a recipient from Conta cts. If you enter more than on e number, sepa rate the numbers with a semicolon. 3. Enter the text of the message. To use a templa te, select Options > Insert > Template . 4. Select Option s > Send . Sending options for text messages To select a message ce ntre to send the message, select Options > Sending option s > Message centre in use . To have the network send you delivery reports on your messages (ne twork service), se lect Options > Sending options > Receive report > Yes . To define how long the me ssage centre resends your message (network service) if the first attempt fails , select Options > Sending option s > Message validity . If the recipient cannot be reached wi thin the validity period, the message is delet ed from the message centre. To convert the message t o another format, select Op tions > Sending o ptions > M essage sent as > Text , Fax , Paging , or E-mail . Change this option only if you are sure that your message centre is able to convert text messages into these other form ats. Contact y our service provider. Text messages on the SIM card Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > SIM messages . Text messages may be stored on your SIM card. Before you can view SIM messages, you must copy the messages to a folder in the device. After copying the messages to a folder, you can view them in the folder or delete them from the SIM card. 1. Select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark or Mark all to mark every message. 2. Select Options > Copy . 3. Select a folder and OK to begin copying. To view SIM card messages, open the fo lder where you copied the messages, and open a message. View picture messages The appearance of a pictu re message may vary depen ding on the receiving device. To view a picture message, op en the message from the Inbox folder. To view information about the picture message, select Options > Message details . To save a message in a different folder, select Optio ns > Move to folder . To add the sender of the message to Contac ts, select Options > Save to Contacts . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 61
Forward picture messages 1. To forward the message, open the message from the Inbox folder and select Options > Forward . 2. In the To field, enter a recipien t's number, or press the scroll key to add a recipient from Conta cts. If you enter more than on e number, sepa rate the numbers with a semicolon. 3. Enter the text of your messa ge. To use a template, select Options > Insert > Template . 4. Select Option s > Send . Multimedia messages Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging . Only devices that have compat ible features can receive and display multimedia m essages. The ap pearance of a message may vary depending on the receivi ng device. A multimedia message (MMS) ca n contain text and objects such as images, sound clips, or video clips. Before you can send or receive multimedia messages on your de vice, you must define the multimedia message settings. Your devi ce may have recognised the SIM ca rd provider and automatically configured the multimedia message settings. If not, use Settings wizard, or contact yo ur service provider for the correct settings. See "Multimedia message settings" , p. 69 . Create and send multimedia messages Important: Exercise caution wh en opening messages. Messages may contain ma licious software or othe rwise be harmful to your device or PC. 1. To create a new message, select New messa ge > Multimedia me ssage . 2. In the To field, enter a recipient's number or e-mail address, or press the scr oll key to add a recipient from Contacts. If y ou enter mor e than one num ber or e-mail address, separ ate them with a semicolon. 3. In the Subject field, enter a subject for the message. To change the fields that are visible, select Options > Address fields . 4. Enter the text of the message, an d select Options > Insert object to add media objects. You can add objects such as Image , Sound clip , or Video clip . The wireless ne twork may limit th e size of MMS me ssages. If the inserted picture exceed s this limit, the device may make it smaller so that it can be sent by MMS. 5. Each slide of your message can contain only one video or sound clip. To add more slides to your message, select Options > Insert n ew > Slide . To change the order of slides in your message , select Opti ons > Move . 6. To preview a multimedia message before sending it , select Optio ns > Preview . 7. Select Options > Send . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 62
To delete an obj ect from a multimedia message, select Options > Remove . To set the sending options for the current multimedia message, s elect Opti ons > Sending options . Receive and reply to multimedia messages Important: Exercise caution wh en opening messages. Messages may contain maliciou s software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. Tip: If you receive multimedia messages that contain objects unsupported by your device, you cannot open them. Try to send these objects to another device such as a computer, and open them there. 1. To reply to a multimedia mess age, open the message, and select Options > Reply . 2. Select Options and To sender to reply to th e sender with a multimedia message, Via text message to reply wit h a text messag e, Via audio message to reply with a n audio message, or Via e-mail to reply with an e-mail message. 3. Enter the text of the message, and select Op tions > Send . Create pres entations Creating multimedia presentations is not possible if the MMS creation mode setting is s et to Restricted . To change the setting, sele ct Messaging > Options > Settings > Multimedia message > MMS creati on mode > Free . 1. To create a presentation, select New message > Multimedia me ssage . 2. In the To field, enter a recipient's number or e-mail address, or press the scr oll key to add a recipient from Contacts. If y ou enter mor e than one num ber or e-mail address, separ ate them with a semicolon. 3. Select Options > Create present ation and a presentation template. A templa te may define which media objects you can include in the presentation, where they appear, and which e ffects are displayed between images and slides. 4. Scroll to the text area and enter the text. 5. To insert images, sound, video, or notes in your presentation, scroll to the co rresponding object area, and select Optio ns > Insert . 6. To add slides, select Insert > New slide . To select the background colo ur for the presentation and background images for di fferent slides, select Options > Background settings . To set effects between images or slides, select Options > Effect settings . To preview the presentation, select Options > Preview . Multimedia presentations may on ly be viewed in compatible devices that support prese ntations. They may a ppear different in different devices. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 63
View presentations To view a presentation, open the multimedia message from the Inbox folder. Scroll to the presentation, and press the scroll key. To pause the presentation, press either selection key. To resume playing the prese ntation, select Opt ions > Continue . If the text or images are too la rge to fit on the display, select Options > Activate scro lling , and scr oll to see the entire presentation. To find phone numbers and e-ma il or web addresses in the presentation, select Options > Find . You ma y use these numbers and addres ses to make calls, send mess ages, or create bookmarks, for example. View and save multimedia attachments To view multimedia messages as complete presentations, open the message, and select Options > Pl ay presentation . Tip: To view or play a multimedia object in a multimedia message, select View image , Play sound clip , or Play vide o clip . To view the name and size of an at tachment, open the message, a nd select Options > Objects . To save a multimedia object, select Optio ns > Objects , the object, and Options > Save . Forward a multimedia message Open Inbox, scroll to a multimed ia notification, and press the scroll key. To send the message to a compat ible device without r etrieving it t o your device, select Opti ons > Forward . If the server does not support multimedia message forwarding, this option is not available. 1. In the To field, enter a recipient's number or e-mail address, or press the scr oll key to add a recipient from Contacts. If y ou enter mor e than one num ber or e-mail address, separ ate them with a semicolon. 2. Edit the message, if desired, and select Options > Send . Tip: To edit the delivery settings of the message, select Options > Sending options . Send a sound clip 1. To compose an au dio messa ge, select New message > Audio message . 2. In the To field, enter a recipient's number or e-mail address, or press the scr oll key to add a recipient from Contacts. If y ou enter mor e than one num ber or e-mail address, separ ate them with a semicolon. 3. Select Options > Insert sound clip , and select whether to record a sound clip or select one from Gallery. 4. Select Options > Send . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 64
Sending options for multimedia messages Select New message > Multimedia message > Options > Sending option s and from the following options: ⢠Receive report â Select Yes if you want to receive a notification when the me ssage has been successfully delivered to the recipient. Receiving a delivery report of a multimedia message that has been sent to an e-mail address may not be possible. ⢠Message validity â Select how long the messaging centre tries to send the mess age. If the recipient of a message cannot be reached with in the validity period, the message is removed from the multimedia messaging centre. The net work must support this feature. Maximum time is the maximu m amount of time allowed by th e network. ⢠Priority â Set th e sending priority t o High , Normal , or Low . Instant messaging Select Menu > Communic. > IM . Instant messa ging (IM) (netwo rk service) allows you to converse with other people using instant messages and join discussion forums (IM groups) with specific topics. Various service providers maintain IM servers that you can log in to after you register to an IM service. Service providers may differ in their support of features. If IM is not available from your service provider, it may not appear in the menu of your device. Contact your service provider for more information about signing up for IM services and cost s of services . For more information on IM settings, contact your service provider. You may receive the settings in a special text message from the service provider that offers the IM service. If not, enter the settings manually. Other instant messaging solution s, such as WindowsLive and Yahoo, may be available in Download. Define IM settings To define the IM application settings, select Opti ons > Settings > Pre ferences . You can, for example, set your screen name and IM alert tones . To converse with an IM user or users, and to view and edit your IM contacts, you must log into an instant messagin g server. To add an IM server, select Options > Settings > Servers . For the correct settings, contact your service provider. To set the server as the one to which your device automatically lo gs in, select Options > Settings > Default server . To define how your device connects to the IM server, select Options > Settings > IM login typ e . To establish a connection between your device and the default server automatically, select Automati c . To automate the connection only when in your home network, select Auto in home netw. To connect to the se rv er when you open the IM application, select On app. start-up . To connect to the server manually, select Manual and log into the server in the IM é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 65
main view by selecting Opt ions > Log in . Enter your user ID and password at the prompt. You can obtain t he user name, password, and other se ttings to log i n from your service provider when you register for the service. Start a conversation Open Conver sations . To search for IM users and user IDs, select IM contacts > Options > New IM contact > Search . You can search by User's name , User ID , Phone number , and E-mail address . To view a conversation, select a participant. To continue the conversa tion, enter your message, and select Options > Send . To return to the conversations list without closing the conversation, select Back . To close the conversation, select Options > End conversation . To start a new conv ersation, select Options > Ne w conversation . You can start a new convers ation with a contact while you are in side an active conversation. However, you cannot have two acti ve conversatio ns with the sa me contact. To insert an image to an ins tant message, select Options > Send image , and se lect the image you w ant to send. To save a conversation p articipant to your IM contacts, select Options > Add to IM contacts . To save a conversation, while in the conversation vi ew, select Options > Record chat . The conversation is saved as a text file that can be opened and vi ewed in the Notes application. IM groups Open IM groups . IM gro ups is available only if you are logged into an IM server, and the server supports IM groups. To create an IM group, select Options > Create new group . To join an IM group or to continue a group conversation, scroll to the group, and press the scroll key. Enter a message, and select Option s > Send . To join an IM group that is no t on the list, but for which you know the group ID, select Opti ons > Join new group . To leave the IM group, select Options > Leave IM group . To search for IM groups and group IDs, select IM groups > Options > Search . You can search by Group name , Topic , and Members (user ID) . To add an IM user to the group, select Options > Add member . Select a user from your IM contacts or enter the contact ID. To remove a member from the IM group, select Options > Remove . To provide members with editin g rights to th e group, select Options > Add editor . Se lect a user from your IM contacts or enter the ID of the user. IM users with editing rights can edit group settings and invite other users to join the group or ban them from the group. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 66
To remove editing rights from a group member, select Options > Remove . To prevent IM users from joining the group, select Optio ns > Add to banned list . Select a user from your IM contacts or enter the ID of the user. To allow a banned user to join the group , select Opti ons > Remove . Block users Select IM contact s > Optio ns > Blocking opti ons > View blocked list . To find a blocked IM user, enter the first letters of the user's name. Matc hing names a ppear in a lis t. To allow receiving messages fr om a blocked IM user, select Options > Unblock . To prevent receiving messages from other IM users, select Options > Block new contacts . Select the IM user from your IM contacts, or enter the user ID. IM application settings Select Options > Settings > Preferences and define the following settings: ⢠Use scre en name â Change the name th at identifies you in IM groups. ⢠Show my availability â Show your online status to all other IM users or your IM contacts only, or hide y our online status. ⢠Allow messages from â Select to receive instant m e s s a g e s f r o m a l l o t h e r I M u s e r s , y o u r I M c o n t a c t s o n l y , o r not to receive messages at all. ⢠Allow invi tations from â Select to receive invitations to IM groups from all IM users, your IM contacts only, or not to receive invitations at all. ⢠Msg. scrolling speed â To adjust the speed at which new messages are d isplayed, scroll left or right. ⢠Sort IM contacts â List your IM contacts alphabetically or by their online status. ⢠Availability reloading â T o u pd ate th e o nli ne st at us of your IM contacts automa tically, select Automatic . ⢠Offline contacts â Select if IM contacts with an offline status are shown in t he IM contacts list. ⢠Own message colour â Select the colour o f the instant messages y ou send. ⢠Received msg colour â Select the colour of the instant messages you receive. ⢠Show date / time i nfo â View the receiving or sending time of each messag e in an IM conversation. ⢠IM alert tone â Select the tone that is played when you receive a new instant message. Special message types Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging . You can receive special messages that contain data, such as operator logos, ringing tones, bookmarks, or internet access or e-mail account settings. To save the contents of these messages, select Options > Save . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 67
Service messages Service messages are sent to your device by service providers. Service messages may contai n notifications such as news headlines, services, o r links throug h which the message content can be downloaded. To define the service message sett ings, select Options > Settings > Servic e message . To download th e service or mess age content, select Options > Download message . To view information about the sender, web address, expiration date, and other de tails of the mes sage before downloading it, select Options > Message details . Send service commands You can send a service reque st message (also known a s a USSD command) to your service provid er and request activation for certain network services. Contact your service provider for the service request text. To send a service reques t message, select Options > Service command . Enter the service request text and select Options > Send . Cell broadcast Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Cell broadcast . With the cell broadcast network service, you can receiv e messages on various topics fr om your service provider, such as weather or traffic conditions in a particular region. For available topics and relevant topic numbers, contact your service provider. Cell broadcas t messages cannot be received when the device is in the remote SIM mode. A packet data (GPRS) connection ma y prevent cell broadcast reception. Cell broadcast messages cannot be received in UMTS (3G) networks. To receive cell broadc ast messages, you may need to set the cell broadcast reception on. Select Options > Settings > Reception > On . To view messages related t o a topic, select the topic. To receive messages related to a topic, select Options > Subscribe . Tip: You can set important topics as hot topics. While the device is in the standby mode, you are notified when you receive a message related to a hot topic. Select a topic, and select Options > Hotmark . To add, edit, or delete topics, select Options > Topic . Messaging settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings . Fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or with a red asterisk. Your device may recognise the SIM card provider and configure the correct text message, multimedia message, é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 68
and GPRS settings automa tically. If not, contact you r service provider for the correct settings, order the settings from your service provider in a configuration message, or use the Settings wizard a pplication. Text message settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > Text message . Select from the following: ⢠Message centres â View the available message centres for your device, or create a new one. ⢠Message centre in use â Select a messag e centre to send the message. ⢠Character encoding â Select Red uced support to use automatic character conv ersion to another encoding system when available. ⢠Receive report â Selec t Yes if you want the network to send you delivery reports on your messages (net work service). ⢠Message validity â Sele ct how long the message centre resends yo ur message if th e first attemp t fails (networ k service). If the recipient ca nnot be reached within the validity period, the message is deleted from the message centre . ⢠Message sent as â Convert the message to anot her format, suc h as Text , Fax , Pa ging , or E-mai l . Change th is option only if you are sure th at your messag e centre is able to convert text messages into these other formats. Contact your service provider. ⢠Preferre d connect ion â Select the preferred method of connection when sending text messages from your device. ⢠Reply via same centre â S elect whethe r you want the reply message to be sent using the same text message centre number (net work service). Multimedia message settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > Multime dia message . Select from the following: ⢠Image size â Select Sm all or Large to scale images in multimedia messages. Select Original to maintain the original image size. ⢠MMS creation mode â Select Restricted to have your device prevent you from including content in multimedia messages that may not be supported by the network or the receiving device. To receive warnings about including such content, select Guided . To create a multimedia message with no restrictions on attachment typ e, select Free . If you select Re stricted , creating m ultimedia presentations is not possible. ⢠Access point in use â Select the default access point to connect to the multimedia messa ge centre. You may not be able to change the default ac cess point if it is preset in your device by your service provider. ⢠Multimed ia retrieval â S elect Always autom atic to receive multimedia messages always automatically , Auto in home netw. to receive notification of a new multimedia message that you can retrieve from the message centre (for exampl e, when you are travelling abroad and are outside your home network), Manual to retrieve multimed ia messages from the me ssage centre é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 69
manually, or Off to prevent r eceipt of any mult imedia messages. ⢠Allow anon. msgs. â Select whether you want to receive messages from unknow n senders. ⢠Receive adverts â Select whether you want to receive messages defined as advertisements. ⢠Recei ve repo rt â Select Yes to have the status of the sent message to be shown in the log (network service). Receiving a delivery report of a multimedia mess age that has been sent to an e-mail address may not be possible. ⢠Deny report sending â Select Yes to not send delivery reports from your device for received multimedia messages. ⢠Message validity â Select how long the messaging centre tries to send the mess age (network service). If the recipient of a message cann ot be reached within the validity period, the message is removed from the multimedia messaging centre. Maximum time is the maximum amount of time allowed by the network. E-mail account settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > E-mail . If you try to edit mailbox setti ngs but have not set up an e- mail account, the mailbox gu ide opens and helps you set up your e-mail ac count. If you have defined a mailbox, scroll to it, and press the scroll key to edit the settings. The settings available for ed iting may vary. Some settings may be preset by your service provider. Connection settings To define the connection setting s, se lect an e-mail account and Options > Edit > Connection se ttings . To edit the settings for the e-mail you receive, select Incoming e-mail . To edit the settings for the e-mail you send, select Outgoing e-mail . User settings To define the user settings for an e-mail account, select the account, select Options > Edit > User settings , and define the following settings: ⢠My name â Enter a name to appear before your e-mail address when you send e-mail. ⢠Reply-to â Select whether you want replies to be redirected to a different address. Select On , and enter the e-mail address to which you want to direct the replies. You can only enter one address to which replies are directed. ⢠Delete e-mails from â Select whether you wa nt to delete the e-mail messages on ly from the device or from both the device and the server. Select Always ask if you want to confirm from where the e-mail should be deleted every time you delete an e-mail. ⢠Send message â Select to send the e-mail imme diately or when a connection is available. ⢠Send copy to self â Select whether you want to sa ve a copy of the e-mail to your remote mailbox and t o the address defined in My e-mail address in the Outgoing e- mail settings. ⢠Include sign ature â Select whether you want to attach a signature to your e-mail messages. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 70
⢠New e-mail alerts â Select whether you want to be notified of a new received e-mail messa ge with a tone and a note. Retrieval settings To define the retrieva l setting s, select the e-mail account, select Op tions > Edit > Retrieval sett ings , and define the following settings: ⢠E-mail to retrieve â Select whether you want to retrieve only the e-mail header inform ation such as sender, subject and date, e-mail, or e-mail wi th atta chments. This setting is for POP3 mailboxes only. ⢠Retrieval amount â Select the number of e-mail messages you want to retrieve from the remote server to your mailbox. ⢠IMAP4 folder p ath â Define the folder path for folders to be subscribed. This settin g is for IMAP4 mailboxes only. ⢠Folder subs criptions â Subscribe to ot her folders in the remote ma ilbox and retr ieve content from those folders. This setting is for IMAP4 mailboxes only. Automatic retrieval settings To define the automati c retrieval settings for an e-ma il account, select the account and Options > Edit > Automatic retri eval , and define the following settings: ⢠E-mail retrieval â S e l e c t Enabled to retrieve new e-ma il messages au tomatically fro m your remote mailbo x, or Only in home net w. to retrieve new e-mail messages automatically from your remo te mailbox only when you are in your home network and not, for example, travelling. ⢠E-mail notifications â Receive notifications on received e-mail. Service mess age settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > Se rvice message . To receive service messages from service providers, select Service mess ages > On . To select how to download services and service message content, select Download messages > Automatically or Manually . If you select Auto matically , you may still need to confirm some d ownloads since not all serv ices can be downloaded automatically. Cell broadcast settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > Ce ll broadcast . To receive cell broadcast m essages, select Reception > On . To select the langua ges in which you want to receive cell broadcast messages, select Language . To display new topics in th e ce ll broadcast topics list, select Topic detection > On . Other settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > Ot her . Select from the following: ⢠Save sent mess ages â Select whether to store sent messages in the Sent folder. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 71
⢠Number of s aved msgs . â Enter the number of sent messages to save. When the limit is reached, the oldest message is deleted. ⢠Memory in use â Select wher e to save your messag es. You can save messages to th e memory card only if a memory card is inserted. ⢠Folder vie w â Define how you want the mess ages in Inbox to be shown. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 72
Phone To make and receive calls, the device must be switched on, the device must have a valid SI M card installed, and you must be located in the service area of a cellular network. To make or receive a net call, your device must be connected to a net call service. To connect to a net call service, your device must be in the coverage of a connection ne twork, such as a WLAN access point. Voice calls Note: The actual invoic e for ca lls and services from your service provider may vary, de pending on network features, rounding off for billing, taxes, and so forth. Answer a call To answer a call, press the ca ll key. To reject a call, press the end key. To mute the ringing tone inst ead of answering a call, select Silence . When you have an active call a nd the call waiting function (network service) is activated, press the call key to answer a new incoming call. The first ca ll is put on hold. To end the active call, press the end key. Make a call To make a call, enter the ph one number, including the area code, and press the call key. Tip: For international calls, add the character that replaces the international access code, and enter the country code, area code (omit the leading 0, if necessary), and phone number. To end the call or cancel the call attempt, pres s the end key. To make a call using the saved cont acts, press the conta cts key. Enter the first letters o f the name, scroll to the name, and press the call key. See "Nokia Contacts for Eseries" , p. 32 . To make a call using the log, pr ess the call key to view up to 20 numbers that you last called or attempted to call. Scroll to the desired number or name, and press the call key. See "Log" , p. 82 . To adjust the volume of an acti ve call, use the volume keys. To switch from a voice ca ll to a video call, select Options > Switch to video call . T he device ends the voice call and makes a video call to the recipient. Make a conference call 1. To make a conference call, enter a participant's phone number, and press the call key. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 73
2. When the participant an swers, select Options > New call . 3. When you have made a phone call to all the participants, select Options > Conference to merge the calls into a conference call. To mute the microphone of your device during the call, select Options > Mute . To drop a participant from the conference call, scroll to the participant, and select Op tions > Con ference > Drop participant . To discuss priv ately with a conf erence call participant, scroll to the participant , and select Options > Conference > Private . Video calls T o b e a b l e t o m a k e a v i d e o c a l l , y o u n e e d t o b e i n t h e c o v e r a g e of a UMTS network. For availability of and subscription to video call services, contact your network operator or service provider. While talking, you can see a real-time, two-way video between you and the reci pient of the call, if the recipient has a compatible mo bile phone. The v ideo image capture d by the camer a in your d evice i s shown to the vi deo call recipient. A video call ca n only be made between two parties . Make a video call To make a video call, enter th e phone number or select the recipient of the call from Contacts, and select Options > Call > Video call . When the video call starts, th e camera of the device is activated. If the camera is alread y in use, video sending is disabled. If the reci pient of the call does not want to send a video back to you, a still image is shown instead. You can define the still image in Menu > Tools > Settings > Ph one > Call > Im age in v ideo call . To disable the sending of aud io, video, or video and audio, select Option s > Disable > Sendin g audio , Sending video , or Sending aud. & vid eo . To use the loudspeaker for receiving audio, select Options > Activate loud speaker . To mute the loudspeaker and use the earpiece, select Options > Activate handset . To swap the places of images, select Op tions > Change image order . To zoom the image on the display, select Options > Zoom in or Zoom out . To end the video call and make a new voice call to the same recipient, select Options > Switch to voice ca ll . Share a video Use Video sharing (network servic e) to send live video or a video clip from your mobile device to another compatible mobile device during a voice call. To use this feature, the device must be within the coverage of a UMTS network. 1. Make a phone call to the selected recipient. You can start sharing a video once the phon e call is established and your device has been registered to the SIP server. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 74
2. To send live video or a video clip from your device, select Options > Share vide o > Live or Cli p . To prev iew the clip, select Options > Play . 3. Select the recipient from Cont acts, or enter the recipien t's SIP address manually to send an invitation to the recipient. Shar ing begins au tomatically when the recipient accepts the video sharing. 4. To end sharing the video, se lect Stop . The voice call continues normally. Receive a video sharing invitation When you receive a video sharing invitation, a message is displayed showing the caller's name or SIP address. To accept the invitation and begin the sharing se ssion, select Accept . To reject the invitation, select Reject . The voice call continues normally. Net calls Select Menu > Communic. > Intern et tel. . Your device supports voice calls over the internet (net calls). Your device attempts emergenc y calls primarily over cellular networks. If an emergency call using cellular networks is not successful, your device attempts a n emergency call through your net call provider. Due to the established nature of cellular telephony, you should use cellular networks for emergency calls, if possible. If you have cellular network coverage available, make sure that your cellular phone is switched on and ready to make calls before you attem pt an emergency call. The capability for an emergency call using internet telephony depends on th e availabilit y of a WLAN an d your net call provider's impl ementation of emergency call capabilities. Contact your ne t call provider to check the internet telephony emer gency call capability. With the n et call servic e (netwo rk service), yo u can make and receive calls over the intern et using the VoIP (voice over internet protocol) technology. Net calls can be establish ed between computers, between mobile phones, and between a VoIP device and a traditional te lephone. To make or receive a net call, your device must be within WLAN coverage, for example. The availability of the net call service may vary according to your country or area. Create a net call profile Before you can make net calls, you need to create a net call profile. 1. Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > SIP settings > Options > New SIP profil e , and enter the required information. To make the login to the net call service automa tic, select Regis tration > Al ways on . Contact your net call provider for the correct settings. 2. Select Back until you return to the Connecti on settings main view. 3. Select Internet tel . > Optio ns > New profile . Enter a name for the profile, and se lect the SIP profile you just created. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 75
To set the created profile to be used automati cally when connecting to the net call service, select Menu > Communic. > Intern et tel. > Preferred profile . To login to the net call service manually, select Registration > When needed in the SIP settings when creating a net call profile. To make secure net calls, ask yo ur service provider for secure net call settings. Th e proxy serv er selected for the net call profile must support se cure net calls. A secure net call is indicated with . Connect to the net call service Select Menu > Communic. > Intern et tel. . To make or receive a net call, your device must be connected to a net call service. If you have selected automati c login, your device automati cally connects t o the net call servi ce. If you login to the service manually, select an available n etwork from the list and Select . The list of networks is re freshed automatically every 15 seconds. To refresh the list manually, select Options > Refresh . Use this option if your WLAN is not shown on the list. To select a net call service for outgoing calls if the device is connected to more than one service, select Optio ns > Change service . To configure new services, select Opt ions > Co nfigure service . This option is shown only if there are services that have not been config ured. To save the netw ork to whi ch you are currently connec ted, select Option s > Save network . The saved networks are marked with a star on the list o f networks . To connect to a net call service using a hidden WLAN, select Options > Use hidden n etwork . To end the connection to a net call service, select Options > Disconnect fr om service . Make net calls You can make a net call from all applications where you can make a regular voice call. For example in Contacts, scroll to the desired contac t, and select Cal l > Internet call . To make a net call in the home screen, enter the SIP address, and press the call key. To make a net call to an address th at does not start with a digit, press any number key when the device is in the standby mode, then press # for a few seconds to clear the display and to switch the device from the number mode to the letter mode. Enter the address, and press the call key. To set net call as the preferre d call type for outgoing calls, select Menu > Communic. > Internet tel. > Options > Settings > Default call type > Internet call . When your device is connected to a net ca ll service, all calls are made as net calls. Net call service settings Select Options > Settings , scroll to the sett ings of the desired service, and press t he scroll key. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 76
To login automati cally to th e net call service, select Login type > Automatic . If you use the automatic log in type for WLANs, the device periodica lly scans for WLANs, which increases the demand on ba ttery power and reduces the battery life. To login manually to the net call service, select Login type > Manual . To view the networks you have saved for the ne t call service and the networks detected by the ne t call service, select Saved conn. networks . To define the service-sp ecific settings, select Edit service settings . This o ption is only avai lable if a service-specific software plug-in has been inst alled in the device. Speed dialling Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Phone > Call > Spee d dialling > On . Speed dialling allows you to make a call by pressing and holding a number key when in the home screen. To assign a number key to a phone nu mber, select Menu > Communic. > Speed dial . Scroll to the number key (2 - 9) on the display, and select Options > Assign . Select the desired number from Contacts. To delete the phone number assi gned to a number key, scroll to the speed dialling key, and select Options > Remove . To modify a phone number assi gned to a number key, scroll to the speed dialling key, and select Options > Change . Call divert Select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > Phone > Call divert . Divert incoming calls to your voice mailbox or to another phone number. For details, co ntact your service provider. Select to divert voice, data, or fax calls, and select from the following options: ⢠All voice calls , All da ta calls , or All fax calls â Divert all incoming voice, data, or fax calls. ⢠If busy â Divert incoming calls when you ha ve an active call. ⢠If not answered â Divert incoming calls after your device rings for a specified period of time. Select the time you let the device ring before diverting the call in the Delay time: list. ⢠If out of reach â Divert calls when the device is switched off or out of network coverage. ⢠If not available â Activate the last three settings at the same time. This option diverts calls if your device is busy, not answered, or out of reach. To divert calls to your voice mailbox, select a call type and a diverting option, then select Options > Activate > To voice mailbox . To divert calls to another ph one number, select a call type and a diverting option, then select Opti ons > Activat e > To other number . Enter a number in the Number: field, or select Find to retrieve a number saved in Contacts . To check the current diverting s tatus, scroll to the diverting option, and select Options > Check status . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 77
To stop diverting calls, scroll to the diverting option, and select Options > Cancel . Call barring Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Phone > Call barring . You can bar the calls that can be made or received with the device (network service). To change the settings, you need the barring password from your service provider. Call barring affects all call types. To bar calls, select from the following: ⢠Outgoin g calls â Prevent making voice calls with your devic e. ⢠Incoming calls â Prevent incoming calls. ⢠International calls â Prevent calling to foreign countries or regions. ⢠Incoming calls when abroad â Prevent incoming calls when outside your home country. ⢠International calls except to h ome country â Prevent calls to foreign countries or re gions, but allow calls to your home country. To check the status of voice call barrings, select the barring option and Option s > Check stat us . To stop all voice call barrings , select a barring option and Options > Cancel all barrings . To change the password us ed fo r barring voice, fax, and data calls, select Option s > Edit barring password . Enter th e current code, then the new code twice. The barring password must be four digits long. For details, contact your service provider. Bar net calls Select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > Phone > Call barring > Internet call barring . To reject net calls from anonymous callers, select Anonymous call barring > On . Send DTMF tones You can send dual tone multi-frequency (D TMF) tones during an active call to control your voice mailbox or other automated phone services. Send a DTMF tone sequence 1. Make a call, and wait un til the other end answers. 2. Select Options > Send DTMF . 3. Enter the DTMF tone sequence, or select a predefined sequence. Attach a DTMF tone sequ ence to a contact card 1. Select Menu > Communic. > Contacts . Open a c ontact, and select Options > Edit > Options > Add de tail > DTMF . 2. Enter the tone sequence. To inse rt a pause of about 2 seconds before or between DTMF tones, enter p . To set the device to send the DTMF tones only after you select Send DTMF during a call, enter w . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 78
3. Select Done . Voice mail Select Menu > Communic. > Call mailbox . When you open the Voice mail application for t he first ti me, you are asked to enter the number of your voice mailbox. To call your voice mail, select Options > Call voice mailbox . If you have configured net call settings to your device and have an internet call mailbox, select Internet call mailbox > Optio ns > Call internet call mbx. to call it. To call your voice mail when in the home screen, press and hold 1 ; or press 1 and then the call key. If you have defined an internet call mailbox, select whether you want to call your voice mail or internet call mailbox. To change the voice mailbox nu mber, select the mailbox and Options > Change number . To change the int ernet call mailbox address, select the mailbox and Options > Change address . Voice aid Select Menu > Tools > Voice aid . The Voice aid application reads text on the display, allowing you to use the basic fu nctions of your device without looking at the display. To hear the entries in your contac ts list, select Contacts . Do not use this option if you ha ve more than 500 cont acts. To hear information on your missed and received calls, dialled numbers, and frequent calls, select Recent calls . To listen to your v oice messages, select Voice mailbox . To dial a telephone number, select Dialler . To use voice commands to ma ke a phone call, select Voice commands . To have your r eceived messag es read al oud, se lect Message reader . To hear the current time, select Clock . To hear the current date, scroll down. If the Voice aid application is open when a calendar alarm is due, the application reads the calendar alarm cont ent aloud. To hear more options, select Opti ons . Voice commands Select Menu > Tools > Voice comm. . Use voice commands to make p hone calls and launch applications, profiles, or ot her functions on the device. The device creates a voice tag fo r the entries in Contacts and for the functions designated in the Voice commands application. When a voice co mmand is spoken, the device compares the spoken words to the voice tag in the device. Voice commands are not dependent on a speakerâÂÂs voice; however, the voice recognition in the device adapts to the main userâÂÂs voice to reco gnise voice commands better. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 79
Make a call A voice tag for a contact is the name or nickname that is saved on the contact in Conta cts. Note: Using voice tags may be difficult in a noisy environment or during an emer gency, so you should not rely solely upon voice dialing in all circumstances. To listen to a voice tag, open a contact, and select Options > Play voice tag . 1. To make a call using a voice command, press and hold the voice key. 2. When you hear the tone or see the visual display, clearly speak the name save d on the contac t. 3. The device plays a synth esised voice tag for the recognised contact in the se lected device language, and displays the name and num ber. After a timeout of 1.5 seconds, the device dials the number. If the recognised contact was not correct, select Next to view a list of other matches or Quit to cancel dialling. If several numbers are saved under t he contac t, the dev ice selects the default number, if it h as been set. Otherwise, the device selects the first available number of the following fields: Mobile , Mobile (home) , Mobile (business) , Te lephone , Tel. (home) , and Tel. (business) . Launch an application The device creates voice tags fo r the applications liste d in the Voice commands application. To launch an ap plication using a voice command, p ress and hold the voice key, and clea rly speak the name of the application. If the recognised application was not correct, select Next to view a list of other matches or Quit to cancel. To add more applications to the li st, select Options > New application . To change the voice command of an application, select Options > Change command , and enter the new command. Change profiles The device creates a voice tag for each profile. To set on a profile using a voice command, press and hold the voice key, and say the name of the profile. To change the voice command, select Profiles > Options > Change command . Voice command settings To switch off the syn thesise r that plays recognised voice commands in the selected device language, select Options > Settings > Synthesiser > Off . To reset voice recognition learni ng when the main user of the device has changed, select Remove voice adapts. . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 80
Push to talk Select Menu > Communic. > PTT . Push to talk (PTT) (n etwork se rvice) provides direct voice communication connected with the push of a key. With PTT, you can use y our device as a w alkie-talk ie. You can use PTT to have a conversat ion with one person or with a group of people, or join a channel. A channel is like a chat room: you can call the channel to s ee if anyone is online. The channel call does not alert the other users; the users just join the channel and start sp eaking with each other. In PTT communication, one person talks while the other users listen through the built-i n loudspeaker. Users take turns responding to each other. Beca use only one user can talk at a time, the ma ximum duration of a speech tu rn is limited. For details of the speech turn duration for your network, contact your service provider. PTT settings Select Options > Settings and select User setti ngs to define your preferences for PTT, or Connection settings to change the connection details. Conta ct your service provider for the correct settings. Tip: You may al so receive the settings in a message from the provider of the PTT service. Log in to PTT service If you have set Application start-up on in User s ettings , PTT automatically logs in to the service when started. If not, you must log in manually. To log in to the PTT service manually, select Opti ons > Log in to PTT . When the Ringing type setting of your device is set to Beep once or Silent , or there is an ongoin g phone call, you cannot make or receive PTT calls. Make a PTT call To make a PTT call, select Option s > Contacts , select one or several contacts from the list, and press the voice key. Remember to hold the device in front of you during the call so you can see the display. Th e display informs you when it is your turn to speak. Speak towards th e microphone, and do not cover the loudspeaker with your hands. Pres s and hold the voice key the entire time yo u are talking. When you have finished talking, release the key. To end the PTT call, press the end key. When you receive a PTT call, pr ess the call key to answer the call or the end key to dismiss the call. Created PTT calls Select Options > PTT log > Created PTT , and a call. To make a PTT call to a contact, select Options > Talk 1 to 1 . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 81
To send a request to a contact to call y ou, select Options > Send callback request . To crea te a conta ct, sele ct Options > Save to Contacts . Manage PTT contacts To view, add, modify, delete, or call contacts, select Options > Contacts . A list of names from the Contacts application is displayed with informat ion about their login status. To call a selected contact, select Opt ions > Talk 1 to 1 . To make a group call, sele ct several con tacts and Options > Talk to many . To send the contact a request to call you, select Options > Send callback request . To answer a callback request, select Show to open the callback request. To make a PTT call to the sender, press the voice ke y. Create a PTT channel To create a channe l, selec t Options > New channel > Create new . To join a channel, select the channel you wa nt to talk to, and press the voice key. To invite a user to a channel, se lect Options > Send invitation . To view the currently active users of a channel, select Options > Active membe rs . When you log in to PTT, you are automatically connected to the channels that were acti ve when the application was last closed. Exit PTT To exi t P T T, s el ec t Opti ons > Exit . Select Yes to log out and close the service. Select No if you want to keep the application active in the backgro und. Log Select Menu > Log . Log stores information about the communication history of the device. The device registers missed and r eceived calls only if the network supports these func tions, the device is switched on and within the network service area. Call and data registers To view recently missed, rece ived, and dialled calls, select Recent calls . Tip: To open Dialled numbe rs when in the home screen, press the call key. To view the approximate durat ion of calls to and from your device, select Call duration . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 82
To view the amount of data t ransferred during packe t data connections, select Packet d ata . Monitor all communications To monitor all voice calls, text messages, or data connections registered by the device, open the general log tab. To view detailed information about a communication event, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. Tip: Subevents, such as a te xt message sent in more than one par t and packet da ta connections, are logged as one communication event. Connections to your mailbox, multimedia mess aging centre, or web pages are shown as packet data connections. To add the phone number fr om a communication event to Contacts, select Options > Save to Co ntacts , and se lect to create a new contact or to add the phone n umber to an existing c ontact. To copy the number, for example to paste it to a text message, select Options > Copy number . To view a single type of communication event or communication events with one other party, select Options > Filter , and select the desired filter. To erase the contents of the lo g, recent calls register, and messaging delivery reports permanently, select Options > Clear log . Call and send messages from Log To call back a caller, select Recent calls and open Missed calls , Received calls , or Dialled numbers . Select the caller, and Options > Call . To reply to a caller with a mess age, select Recent calls and open Missed calls , Received calls , or Dialled numbers . Select the caller, and select Options > Create message . You can send text messages and multimedia messages. Log settings To set the time for keeping all communication events in the log, select Options > Settings > Log durati on , and the time. If you select No l og , all log contents are permanently deleted. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 83
Travelling Need directions? Looking for a restaurant? Your Eseries device has the tools to get you where you want to be. About GPS and satellite signals The Global Positioning System (GPS) is a worldwide radio navigation system tha t includes 24 satellites and their ground stati ons that monitor the op eration of the satellites. Your device has an internal GPS receiver. A GPS terminal receives low- power radio signals from the satellites and measures the travel time of t he signals. From the travel time, the GPS receiver can calculate its location to the accuracy of metres. The Global Positioning System (GPS) is operated by the government of the United States, which is solely responsible for its accuracy and maintenanc e. The accuracy of location data can be affected by adju stments to GPS satellites made by the United States government and is subject to change with the United States Departmen t of Defense civil GPS policy and the Federal Radionavigation Plan. Accuracy can also be affected by poor satellite geom etry. Availability and quality of GPS signals may be affected by your location, bui ldings, natural obstacles, and weat her conditions. GPS signals may not be available inside buildi ngs or underground and may be impaired by materials such as concrete and metal. GPS should not be used for precise location measurement, and you should never rely solely on location data fr om the GPS receiver and cellular rad io networks for positioning or navigation. The trip meter ha s limited accu racy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and quality of GPS signals. To enable or disable different positioni ng methods, such as Bluetooth GPS, select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Po sitioning > Posit ioning methods . About satellite signals If your device cannot find th e satellite signal, consider the following: ⢠If you are indoors, go outdoo rs to receive a better signal. ⢠If the numeric keypad slide is closed, open it. ⢠If you are outdoors, move to a more open space. ⢠Ensure that your hand does not cover the GPS antenna of your device. ⢠If the weather conditions are bad, the sign al strength may be affected. ⢠Establishing a GPS connection may take from a couple of seconds to severa l minutes. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 84
Satellite status To check how many satellites you r device has found, and whether your device is receiv ing satellite signals , select Menu > GPS > GPS data > Position > Options > Satellite stat us . If your device has found satellites, a bar for each satellite is sh own in the satellite info view. The longer the bar, the stronger the satellite signal. When your device has received enough data from the satellite sig nal, the bar turns black. Positioning settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Positioning . To use a specific positioning me thod to detect the location of your device, select Positioning methods . To select a position ing server, select Position ing server . Maps Maps overview Select Menu > GPS > Maps . Welcome to Maps. Maps shows you w hat is nearby, helps you plan your route, and guides you where you want to go. ⢠Find cities, streets, and services. ⢠Find your way with turn-by-turn directions. ⢠Synchronise yo ur favourite locations and routes between your mobile device and the Ovi Maps internet service. Note: Downloading content su ch as maps, satellite images, voice files, guides or traffic information may involve transmission of large amounts of data (network service). Some services may not be ava ilable in all countries, and may be provided only in selected languages. The services may be network dependent. For more information, contact your network service provider. Almost all digital cartography is inaccurate and incomplete to some extent. Never rely sole ly on the cartography that you download for use in this device. Content such as satellite images, g uides, weather and traffic information and related servic es are generated by third parties independent of Nokia. The content m ay be inaccurate and incomplete to some extent and is subj ect to availability. Never rely solely on the afor ementioned content and related services. My position View your location and the map See your current location on the map, and browse maps of different cities and countries. Select Menu > GPS > Maps and My pos ition . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 85
When the GPS connec tion is active, marks your current or last known location on the map . If the icon's colours are faint, no GPS signal is av ailable. If only cell ID based positioning is available, a red halo around the positioning icon indicates the general area you might be in. The accuracy of the estimate increases in densely populated area s. Move on the map â Use the scro ll key. By default, the map is oriented north. View your current or last known location â Press 0 . Zoom in or out â Press * or # . If you browse to an area not covere d by maps that are s tored on your device and you ha ve an active data connection, new maps are automatically downloade d. Map coverage varies by country and region. Map view 1 â Selected location 2 â Indicator area 3 â Point of interest (for ex ample, a railway station or a museum) 4 â Information area Change the look of the map View the map in different modes, to easily identify where you are. Select Menu > GPS > Maps and My pos ition . Press 1 , and select from the following: ⢠Map â In the standard map view, details such as location names or motorway numbers, are easy to read. ⢠Satellit e â For a detailed view, use satellite images. ⢠Terrain â View at a gla nce th e ground type, for example, when you are travelling off-road. Change between 2D and 3D views â Press 3 . Download and update maps To avoid mobile data transfer costs, download the latest maps and voice guidance files to your computer using the Nokia Ovi Suite application, and then transfer and save them to your device. To download and install Nokia Ovi Suite on your compatible computer, go to www.ovi.com. Tip: Save new maps to your device before a journey, so you can browse the m aps without an intern et connection when tr avelling abroad. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 86
To make sure your device does not use an internet connection, in the main menu, select Option s > Settings > Internet > Connection > Offline . About positioning methods Maps displays your location on the map using GPS, A-GPS, or cell ID based positioning. The Global Positioning System (GPS) is a satellite-based navigation system used for calc ulating your location. Assisted GPS (A-GPS) is a network service that sends you GPS data, improving the speed and accuracy of the positioning. When you use Maps for the first time, you are prompted to define an internet access poin t to download map information or use A-GPS. indicates the availability of the sat ellite signals. One bar is one satellite. When the device is searching for satellite signals, the bar is yellow. Whe n there is enough data available to calculate your lo cation, the bar turns green. The more green bars, the more reli able the location calculation. The Global Positioning System (GPS) is operated by the government of the United States, which is solely responsible for its accuracy and maintenanc e. The accuracy of location data can be affected by adju stments to GPS satellites made by the United States government and is subject to change with the United States Departmen t of Defense civil GPS policy and the Federal Radionavigation Plan. Accuracy can also be affected by poor satellite geom etry. Availability and quality of GPS signals may be affected by your location, bui ldings, natural obstacles, and weat her conditions. GPS signals may not be available inside buildi ngs or underground and may be impaired by materials such as concrete and metal. GPS should not be used for precise location measurement, and you should never rely solely on location data fr om the GPS receiver and cellular rad io networks for positioning or navigation. The trip meter ha s limited accu racy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and quality of GPS signals. With cell ID based positioning, the position is determined through the antenna tower your mobile device is currently connected to. Depending on the available po sitioning method, the accuracy of positioning may vary from a few metres to s everal kilometres. Find places Find a location Maps helps you find specific locat ions and types of business you are looking for. Select Menu > GPS > Maps and Find places . 1. Enter search terms, such as a street addre ss or postcode. To clear the search field, select Clear . 2. Select Go . 3. In the list of proposed matches, go to the desired item. To display the location on the map, select Map . To view the other locations of the search result list on the map, scroll up and down with the scroll key. Return to the list of prop osed match es â Select List . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 87
Search for different types of nearby places â Selec t Browse categories and a category, such as shopping, accommodation, or tran sport. If no search result s are found, ensure the spelling of your search terms is correct . Problems with your internet connection may also affect re sults when searching online. To avoid data transfer costs, you can also get se arch results without an active int ernet connection, if you ha ve maps of the searched area stored on your device. View location details View more information about a specific location or place, such as a hotel or r estaurant, if a vailable. Select Menu > GPS > Maps and My position . View the detail s of a place â Select a place, press the scroll key, and select Show details . Manage places and routes Save places and routes Save addresses , places of interest, and routes, so they can be quickly used later. Select Menu > GPS > Maps . Save a place 1. Select My position . 2. Go to the location. To search for an a ddress or place, select Search . 3. Press the sc roll key. 4. Select Save place . Save a route 1. Select My positio n . 2. Go to the location. To search for an address or place, select Search . 3. To add another route point, press the scroll key, and sele ct Add to route . 4. Select Add new route point and the appropriate option. 5. Select Show route > Options > Save route . View your saved places and routes â Select Favourites > Places or Routes . View and organise places or routes Use your Favourites to quickly access the places and routes you have saved. Group the places and routes in to a collection, for example, when planning a trip. Select Menu > GPS > Maps and Favourites . View a saved place on the map 1. Select Places . 2. Go to the place. 3. Select Map . To return to the list of saved places, select List . Create a collect ion â Select Create new collection , an d enter a collection name. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 88
Add a saved place to a collection 1. Select Places and the pla ce. 2. Select Organise collections . 3. Select New collection or an existing collection. If you need to delete places or routes, or add a route to a collection, go to the Ovi Maps internet service at www.ovi.com. Send places to your friends When you want to share place information with your friends, send these details directly to their devices. Select Menu > GPS > Maps and My position Send a place to your fr iend's compatible device â Select a location, press the sc roll key, and select Send . Synchronise your Favourites Plan a trip on your computer at the Ovi Maps website, synchronise the saved places , routes, and collections with your mobile device, and access the plan on the go. To synchronise places, routes , or collections between your mobile device and the Ovi Maps internet service, you need a Nokia account. I f you do not have one, in the ma in view, select Options > Account > Nokia account > Create new account . Synchronise saved places, route s, and collections â Select Favourites > Synchronise with Ovi . If you do not have a Nokia account, you are p rompted to create one. Set the device to synchronise Favourites automa tically â Select Op tions > Settings > Synchronisation > Change > At start-up and shut-d. . Synchronising requires an acti ve internet connection, an d may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service providerâÂÂs network. Contact your service provider for information abou t data transmission charge s. To use the Ovi Maps internet service, go to www.ovi.com. Drive and Walk Get voice guidance Voice guid ance, if available fo r your language, helps you find your way to a destination, leaving you free to enjoy the journey. Select Menu > GPS > Maps and Drive or Walk . When you use drive or walk navi gation for the first time, you are asked to select the langua ge of the voice guidance, and download the appropri ate files. If you select a language that in cludes street names, also the street names are said aloud. Voice guidance may not be available for your language. Change the voice guidance language â I n t h e m a i n v i e w , select Option s > Sett ings > Navigation > Drive guidance or Walk guidance and the appropriate option. Repeat the voi ce guidance for car navig ation â In the navigation view, select Options > Repeat . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 89
Adjust the v olume of the v oice guidance for car navigation â In the navigation view, select Options > Volume . Drive to your destination When you need turn-by-turn directions while driving, Maps helps you get to your destination. Select Menu > GPS > Maps and Driv e . Drive to a destination â Select Se t destinati on and the appropriate opti on. Drive to your home â Select Drive home . When yo u selec t Drive home or Walk hom e for the first time, you are prompted to define your home location. To later change the home locati on, do the following: 1. In the main view, select Options > Se ttings > Navigation > Home Loc ation > Change > Redefine . 2. Select the appropriate option. Tip: To drive without a s et destinat ion, select Map . Your location is displayed on the centre of the map as you move. Change views during navigation â Press the scroll key, and select 2D view , 3D view , Arrow view , or Route overview . Obey all local laws. Always keep your ha nds free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safety. Navigation view 1 â Route 2 â Your location and direction 3 â Compass 4 â Information bar (speed, distance, time) Get traffic and safety information Enhance your driving experience with real-time information about traffic events, lane a ssistance, and speed limit warnings, if available for your country or region. Select Menu > GPS > Maps and Drive . View traffic events on th e map â During drive navigation, select Option s > Traffic info . The events are displayed as triangles and lines. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 90
Update traffic information â Select Options > Traffic info > Update traffic info . When planning a route, you can set the device to avoid tra ffic events, such as tra ffic jams or roadworks. Avoid traffi c events â In the main view, select Options > Settings > Navigation > Reroute due to traffic . The location of speed cameras may be shown on your route during navigation, if this feature is enabled. Some jurisdictions prohibit or regu late the use of speed camera location data. Nokia is not respon sible for the accuracy, or the consequences of using speed camera location data. Walk to your destination When you need directions to follow a route on foot, Maps guides you over squares, an d through parks, pedestrian zones, and even shopping centres. Select Menu > GPS > Maps and Wal k . Walk to a destination â Select Set dest ination and the appropriate opti on. Walk to your home â Select Walk home . When yo u selec t Drive home or Walk hom e for the first time, you are prompted to define your home location. To later change the home locati on, do the following: 1. In the main view, select Options > Se ttings > Navigation > Home Loc ation > Change > Redefine . 2. Select the appropriate option. Tip: To walk without a set destination, s elect Map . Your location is displayed on the centre of the map as you move. Plan a route Plan your journey, and create yo ur route and view it on the map before setting off. Select Menu > GPS > Maps and My pos ition . Create a route 1. Go to your starting p oint. 2. Press the scroll key, and select Add to route . 3. To add another route point, select Add new route point and the appropriate opti on. Change the order of the route points 1. Go to a route point. 2. Press the scroll key, and select Move . 3. Go to the place where you want to move the route point to, and select OK . Edit the location of a route point â Go to the route point, press the scroll key, and select Edit and the appropriate option. View the route on the map â Select Sh ow route . Navigate to the de stination â Select Show route > Options > Start driving or Start walking . Change the settings for a route The route settings affect the navigation guidance and the way the route is di splayed on the map. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 91
1. In the route planner view, op en the Settings tab. To get to the route planner view from the navigation view, select Options > Route points or Route po int list . 2. Set the transportat ion mode to Drive or Walk . If you select Walk , one-way streets are regarded as normal streets, and walkways and ro utes through, for example, parks and shopping cen tres, can be used. 3. Select the desired option. Select the walking mode â Open the Settings tab, and select Walk > Preferred route > Streets or St raight line . Straight line is useful on off-road terrain as it indicates the walking direct ion. Use the faster or sho rter driving route â Open the Settings tab, and select Drive > Route selection > Faster route or Shorter route . Use the optimised driving route â Open the S ettings tab, and select Drive > Route selection > Optimised . The optimised driving route combines the advantag es of both t he shorter and the faster routes. You can also ch oose to allow or avoid using, for example, motorways, toll roads, or ferries. Maps shortcuts General shortc uts To zoom in or out on the map, press * or # . To return to your current location, press 0 . To change the map type, press 1 . To tilt the map, press 2 or 8 . To rotate the map, press 4 or 6 . To return the map back to the north up position, press 5 . Pedestrian navigation shortcuts To save a location, press 2 . To search for locations by categories, press 3 . To adjust the volume of the pe destrian navigation guidance, press 6 . To view the list of route points, press 7 . To adjust the map for ni ght-time usage, press 8 . To view the dashboard, press 9 . Car navigation shortc uts To adjust the map for daytime or night-time usage, press 1 . To save the current location, press 2 . To search for locations by categories, press 3 . To repeat the voice guidance, press 4 . To find a different route, press 5 . To adjust the volume of voice guidance, press 6 . To add a stopover to the route, press 7 . To view traffic information, press 8 . To view the dashboard, press 9 . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 92
GPS data Select Menu > GPS > GPS data . With GPS data, you ca n view your current location, find your way to a desired location, and track distance. Select Navigati on to view navigating i nformation to your trip de stina tion, Po sition to view positioning information about your current location, or Trip dist. to view your travelling information s u c h as t h e d i s t a n ce and duration you have travelled, and your average and max imum speeds. The application must receive positioning information from at least four satellites to be used as a travelling aid. The trip meter has limited accu racy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can al so be affected by availability and quality of GPS signals. Use GPS data To check the signal strength of the satellites that provide the positioning informat ion necessary for na vigation, open any of the three views and select Optio ns > Satellite status . To set a landmark or location as the destination of your trip, select Navigation > Options > Set d estination . You can also enter the destination latitude and longitude coordinates. To remove the destination set for your trip, select Navigation > Option s > Stop navigation . To save your current position as a landmark, select Navigation or Posit ion , and Options > Save posit ion . To activate the t rip meter, select Trip distance > Options > Start . To stop the trip meter, select Options > Stop . To reset all fields and start calculating the trip ag ain, select Trip distance > Op tions > Restart . To change the measuring system in use, select Opt ions > Settings > Meas urement sy stem > Metric or Imperial . To enter the altitude calibration to correct the altitude received from the positioning satellites , select Opti ons > Settings > Alti tude calibrat ion . Landmarks Select Menu > GPS > Landmarks . Landmarks are coordinates to ge ographic locations th at you can save to your device for la ter use in different location- based services. You can create landmarks using the intern al GPS receiver of your device or network (network service). Create a landmark To create a landmark, select Opti ons > New landmark . Select Curre nt position to make a network request for the latitude and longitude coordina tes of your current location, Select from map to select the location from a map, or Enter manually to fill in necessary locat ion information such as a name, category, address, la titude, longitude, and altitude. To show the landmark on the map, select Options > Show on map . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 93
Edit landmarks To edit a landmark, select Options > Edit > Options and from the following: ⢠Select categories â Organise the landmark to a grou p of similar landmarks. Select a category to modify landmark information such as a name, category, addre ss, latitude, longitude, and altitude. ⢠Retrieve curre nt position â Request and automatically fill in the geographical latitu de and longitude coordinates to make a landmark of your current location. ⢠Delete â Remove the landmark. ⢠Landma rk ico n â Change the icon of the landmark. ⢠Show on map â Show the land mark on the map. ⢠Send â Send the landmark to compatible devices. ⢠Input optio ns â Modify text input settin gs, such as the writing language. ⢠Editin g options â Edit the phone numbers and web addresses assigned to the land mark. Landmark categories You can see the landmark categories in two views: one lists categories that already conta in landmarks, and the oth er lists all the categories your device has. To view the landmarks that a category contains, scroll to the category, and press the scroll key. To create a new category, select Options > Edit categories > Options > New category . To change to which categories a la ndmark belongs, open the landmarks tab. Scroll to the landmark, and select Options > Edit > Options > Select cate gories . Select the category or categories in which you want to include the landmark and OK . Receive landmarks Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging . Open a message that contains a landmark you have received from another device. Scroll to the landmark, and press the scroll key. To save the landmark in your device, select Op tions > Save . To forward the landmark to compatible devices, select Options > Send . To show the received land mark on the map, select Opti ons > Show on map . To find out how to navig ate to the received landmark, select Options > Show route . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 94
Nokia Office Tools Nokia Office Tools su pport mobile business and enable effective communication with work teams. Active notes Select Menu > Office > Active note s . Active notes allows you to create, edit, and v iew different kinds of notes, for example, meeting memos, hobby notes, or shopping lists. You can in sert images, vi deos, and sound in the notes. You can link notes to other applications, such as Contacts, an d send notes to other s. Create and edit notes To create a note, st art writing. To edit a note, scroll to it, and p ress the scroll key. To insert images, sound clips, video, busin ess cards, web bookmarks, and files, select Options > Ins ert object . To add new item s to the note, select Options > Insert new . You can record sound and video clips, and capture images. To add boldface, italics, or underlining to your text or change the font colour, press and hold the shift key and use the scroll key to select the tex t. Then select Options > Text . To send the note, select Opt ions > Send . To link a note to a conta ct, select Optio ns > Link note to call > Add contacts . You can see the note on the display of your device when making a call to or receiving a call from the contact. Settings for Active notes Select Sett ings . To save notes to your device memory, select Memory in use > Phone memory . To save them to a memory card, select Memory in use > Memory card . To change the layout of active notes, select Change view > Grid . To view the notes as a list, select Change view > List . To see a note in the backgrou nd when making or receiving phone calls, select Show note during call > Yes . Tip: If you temporarily do not want to see the notes during phone calls, select Show note during call > No . This way you do not have t o remove the links between notes an d contact car ds. Calculator Select Menu > Office > Calculator . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 95
This calculator has limited a ccuracy and is designed for simple calculations. To make a calculation, en te r the first number of the calculation. Select a function such as add or subtr act from the function map. Enter the seco nd number of the calculation, and select = . The calculator performs operations in the order they are entered. The result of the calculation remains in the editor field and can be used as the first number of a new calculation. The device saves the result of the last calculation in its memory. Exiting the C alculator application or switching off the device does not clear the me mory. To recall the last saved result the next time you open the Calculator application, select Options > Last result . To save the numbers or resu lts of a calculation, select Options > Memory > Save . To retrieve the results of a ca lculation from the memory and use them in a calculation, select Options > Memory > Recall . File manager With File manage r, you can manage the con tents and properties of files and folder s on your device memory and memory card. You can open, create, move, copy, rename, send, and search for files and folders. Copyright protection may prevent sending some files. Open the device tab or the memory card tab. To select multiple files, sc roll to each file, and select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark . To send the selected files, select Option s > Send . To move or copy files or folders to another folder, select Options > Move to folder or Copy to fol der . Default folders such as Sound clips in Gallery cannot be moved. To search for files, select Options > Find . Enter the search text, and press the scroll key. The folders and files whose names contain the search te xt are displayed. To view information about the selected file, select Options > View details . Quickoffice About Quickoffice Select Menu > Office > Quickoffice . Quickoffice consists of Quickword for viewing M icrosoft Word documents, Quicksheet for viewing Microsoft Excel worksheets, Quickpoint fo r Microsoft PowerPoint presentations, and Quickman ag er for purchasing software. You can view Microsoft Office 2000, XP, 2003, a nd 2007 documents (DOC, XLS, an d PPT fi le formats) with Quickoffice. If you have the editor version of Quickoffice, you can also edit files. Not all file formats or features are supported. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 96
Converter Select Menu > Office > Converte r . The converter has limited accura cy, and rounding errors may occur. Convert measurements 1. Scroll to the Type field, and select Options > Conve rsion type to open a list of measur es. Select the measure to us e, and select OK . 2. Scroll to the first Unit field, and select Options > Select unit . Select the unit from which to convert, and select OK . Scroll to th e next Unit field, and select the unit to which to convert. 3. Scroll to the first Amount field, and enter the value to convert. The other Amount field changes automatically to show the converted value. Set base currency and exchange rate When you change base currency, you must enter new exchange rates because all previously set exchange rates a re cleared. Before you can make currency conversions, you must choose a base currency and add exchange rates. The rate of the base currency is always 1. The base currency determines the conversion rates of the other currencies. 1. To set the rate of exchange for the unit of currency, scroll to the Type field, and select Options > Currency rates . 2. Scroll to the currency type and enter the exchange rate you would like to set per single unit of currency. 3. To change the base currency, scroll to the currency, and select Optio ns > Set as base currency . 4. Select Done > Yes to save the ch anges. After you have inserted all the necessa ry exchange rates, you can make currency conversions. Zip manager With Zip manager, you can creat e new archive files to store compressed ZIP formatted file s; add single or multiple compressed files or directories to an archive; set, clear, or change the archiv e password for protected archives; and change settings , such as comp ression level, and file name encoding. You can store the archive files on the device mem ory or on a memory card. PDF reader Select Menu > Office > Adobe PDF . With PDF reader you can read PDF documents on the display of your device; search for text in the documents; modify settings, such as zoom level and page views; and send PDF files using e-mail. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 97
Printing You can print documents, such as files, messages, or web pages, from the device, preview a print job, define page layout options, select a printer, or print to a fi le. You may not be able to print all t ypes of document s. Print files To configure a p rinter for your devi ce, select Menu > Office > Printers > Options > Add . To set the printer as the default printer, select Options > Printing options > Printers , scroll to the printer and select Op tions > Set as default . B e f o r e y o u p r i n t , m a k e s u r e y o u r d e v i c e i s p r o p e r l y c o n n e c t e d to the printer . To print a document, select Opt ions > Printing options > Print . To print to a file, select Options > Printing options > Print > Print to file , and d etermine the lo cation for the file. To change the prin ti ng options, select Options > Printi ng options . You can select the printer you want to use, the number of copies and the rang e of pages you want to pr int. To change the page layout before printing, select Options > Printing options > Page setup . You can chan ge th e paper size and orientation, define the margins , and insert a header or a footer. The maximum len gth of the header and footer is 128 characters. To preview a file or message before you print, select Options > Printing op tions > Prev iew . Printing options Open a document, such as a file or message, and select Options > Printing op tions > Print . Define the following: ⢠Printer â Select an availabl e printer from the list. ⢠Print â Select All pages , Ev en pages , or Odd pages as the print range. ⢠Print range â Select Al l pages in range or Defined pages as the page range. ⢠Number of copi es â Select the number of copies to print. ⢠Print to file â Print to a file, and define the location for the file. The available options ma y vary. Printer settings Select Menu > Office > Printers . To add a new printer, select Option s > Add . Define the following: ⢠Printer â Enter a name for the printer. ⢠Driver â Select a driver for the printer . ⢠Bearer â Select a bearer for the printer. ⢠Orientation â Select the orientation. ⢠Paper size â Select the paper size. ⢠Media type â Select the media type. ⢠Colour mode â Select the co lour mode. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 98
⢠Printer mode l â Select the printer model. The available options may vary. Clock Select Menu > Office > Clock . In Clock, you can view your local time and time zone information, set and edit a larms, or modify date and ti me settings. Alarm clock Open the alarm clock tab. To set an alarm, select Options > New alarm . When an alarm is active, is displayed. To switch off the alarm, select Stop , or to stop the alarm for 5 minutes, select Snooze . If the alarm time is rea ched while the device is switched off, the device switches itself on and starts sounding the ala rm tone. If you select Stop , the devic e asks whether you want to activate the device for calls. Select No to switch o ff the device or Yes to make and receive calls. Do not select Yes when wireless ph one use may cause interference or danger. To change the alarm time, select Opti ons > Reset alarm . To remove the alarm, select Op tions > Remove alarm . World clock Open the world clock tab to check the time in different cities. To add a city to the world clock view, select Option s > Add city . T o c h a n g e t h e c i t y t h at d e te r m i ne s t he ti m e a n d d a t e i n y ou r device, select Options > Set as current city . T he city is displayed in the Clock main vi ew, and the time in your device is changed according to the city selected. Check th at the time is correct and matches your time zone. Clock settings Select Options > Settings . To change the time or date, select Tim e or Date . To change the clock shown on the home screen, select Clock type > Analogue or Digital . To allow the mobile phone network to u pdate the time, date, and time zone information to yo ur device (network service), select Network operator time > Auto-update . To change the alarm tone, select Clock alarm tone . Notes Select Menu > Office > Notes . You can create and send note s to other compatible devices, and save received plain text files (.txt format) to Notes. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 99
Write and se nd notes To write a no te, start enterin g the text. The note editor opens automatic ally. To open a note, scroll to it, a nd press the scroll key. To send a note to other co mpatible devices, select Options > Send . To synchronise or to define synchronisation settings for a note, select Options > Synchronisation . Se lect Start to initialise synchronisation or Settings to define the synchronisation settings for the note. Nokia Wireless Keyboard Wireless keyboards are availabl e as separate enhancements. To set up the Nokia Wireless Key board or other compatible wireless keyboard supporting the Bluetooth Human Interface Devices (HID) profile for us e with your device, use the Wireless keyboard application. 1. Activate Bluetoo th connectivi ty on your device: select Menu > Connectivity > Bluetooth > Bluetooth > On . Make sure that you have set My phone's visibility > Shown to all . 2. Switch on the keyboard. 3. Select Menu > Office > Wlss. keybd. . 4. To start searchi ng for devices with B luetooth connectivity, select Options > Find keyboard . 5. Select the keyboard from th e list, and press the s croll key to start the connection. 6. To pair the keyboard with your device, enter a passcode of your choice (1 to 9 digits) on the device a nd the same passcode on your keyboard. 7. If you are asked for a keyboard layout, select it from a list on your device. When the name of th e keyboard appears, it s status changes to Keyboard connected , and the indicator of your keyboard blinks slowly; the keyboard is ready for use. For details on the operation and maintenance of your keyboard, see its user guide. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 100
Connectivity Your device offers several options to connect to the internet, a corporate intranet, or to another device or computer. Fast downloading High-speed downlink packet a ccess (HSDPA, also called 3.5G, indicated by ) is a network service in UMTS networks and provides high-speed data do wnloads. When HSD PA support in the device is activated and t he device is connected to a UMTS network that supports HS DPA, downloading data su ch as messages, e -mail, and browser pa ges through the cellular network may be faster. An active HSDPA connection is indicated by . The icon may vary between regions. To activate or deactivate HSDPA, select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Packe t data > High speed packet access . Some cellular networks do not allo w incoming voice calls when HSDPA is active, in which case you need to deactivate HSDPA to receiv e calls. Contact your network operator for details. For availability and subscription to data connection services, contact your service provider. HSDPA only affects the downloa d speed; sending data to the network, such as messages and e-mail, is not affected. PC connections You can use your m obile device with a variety of compatible PC connectivity and data co mmunicati ons applications. With Nokia Ovi Suite you can, for example, transfer files and images between your device an d a compatible computer. To use Ovi Suite with USB connection mode, select PC Suite . For more information about Ov i Suite, see the support area at www.ovi.com. Data cable To avoid damaging the memory card, do not remove th e data cable in the middle of a data transfer. Transfer data between your device and a PC 1. Insert a memory card to your device, and connect the device to a compat ible PC with the USB da ta cable. 2. When the device asks which mode is used, select Mass storage . In this mod e, you can s ee your devi ce as a removable hard drive in your computer. 3. Close the connection from the computer ( for example, from an Unplug or Eject Hard ware wizard in Wi ndows) to avoid damaging the memory ca rd. To use Nokia Ovi Suite with your device, install Nokia Ovi Suite on your PC, connect the data ca ble, and select PC Suite . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 101
To use your device to connect your PC to the web, connect the data cable, and select Connect PC to web . To synchronise the music in your device with Ovi Player, install the Ovi Player software on your PC , connect the data cable, and select Media transfer . To change the USB mode you n ormally use with the dat a cable, select Menu > Connecti vity > US B > USB connection mode and the desired option. To set the device to ask for the mode each time you connect the USB data cable to the device, select Menu > Connectivity > USB > Ask on connection > Ye s . Infrared Do not point the infrared ( IR) beam at anyone's eye or allow it to interfere with other IR de vices. This device is a Class 1 laser product. Use infrared to connect two devices and trans fer data between them. With infrared, you can transfer data such as business cards, calendar notes, and media files with a compatible device. 1. Ensure that the infrared po rts of the devices face each other. The positioning of th e devices is more important than the angle or distance. 2. Select Menu > Connec tivity > Infrared to switch on infrared on your device. 3. Switch on infrared on the other device and wait a few seconds until the infrared connection is established. 4. Locate the desired file in an application or File manager, and select Options > Send > Via infrared . If the data transfer is not starte d within 1 min ute after the activation of the infrared port, the connection is cancelled and must be started again. All items received through infrared are placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging. Positioning the devices away from each other breaks the connection, but the infrared light beam remains active on your device until it deactivat es. Bluetooth Select Menu > Connectivity > Bluetooth . About Bluetooth Bluetooth technology in your device enables wireless connections between electronic devices within a range of 10 metres (33 feet). A Bluetooth co nnection can be used to send images, videos, text, business cards, calendar notes, or to connect wireless ly to devices that use Blueto oth technology. Since devices using Bluetooth technology communica te using radio waves, your device and the other devices do not need to be in direct line-of- sight. The two devices only need to be within a maximum of 1 0 metres of each other, although the connection can be subject to interference from obstructions such as walls or other electronic devices. Several Bluetooth connecti ons can be active at a time . For example, if your device is connected to a headset, you can é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 102
also transfer files to another compatible dev ice at the same time. This device is compliant with Bluetooth Specification 2.0 EDR supporting the following pr ofiles: Dial-Up Networking, Object Push, File Transfer, Han dsfree, Headset, Ba sic Imaging, Remote SIM Access, Stereo Audio, Generic Audio/Video Distribution, Audio/Video Remote Control, and Advanced Audio Distribution. To ensure interoperability between other devices supporting Bluetooth t echnology, use Nokia approved accessories for th is model. Check with the manufacturers of other de vices to determine their compatibility wi th this device. Features using Bluetooth techno logy increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life. Send and receive data with Bluetooth 1. When you activate Blu etooth for the first time, you are asked to give a name to your device. Give your device a unique name to make it easy to recognise if there are several Bluetooth devices nearby . 2. Select Bluetoot h > On . 3. Select My phone's visibility > Shown to all or Define period . If you select Define period , you need to define the time during which your dev ice is visible to ot hers. Your device and the name you entered can now be seen by other users with devices us ing Bluetooth technology. 4. Open the application where th e item you want to send is stored. 5. Select the item and Options > Send > Via Bluetooth . The device searches for ot her devices using Bluetooth technology within range and lists them. Tip: If you have sent da ta using Bluetooth before, a list of the previous search results is displayed. To search for more Bluetooth devices, select More devices . 6. Select the device with which you want to connect. If t he other de vice re quire s pa iring before data can be transmitted, you ar e asked to enter a passcode. When the connection ha s been established, Sending data is shown. The Sent folder in the Messag ing application does not store messages sent using B luetooth connectivity. To receive data using Bluetooth, select Bluetooth > On and My phone's visibility > Shown to all to receive data from a non-paired device or Hidden to receive data from a paired device only. When you rece ive data through Bluetooth, depending on the settings of an active profile, a tone sounds , and you are as ked if you want to accept the message in which the data is included. If you a ccept, the message is placed in the Inbox folder in the Messaging application. Tip: You can access the files in the device o r on the memory card using a compatible accessory that supports the File Transfer Profile Client service (for example, a lapt op computer). A Bluetooth connection is disc onnected automatica lly after sending or receiving data. On ly Nokia PC Suite and som e enhancements such as headse ts may maintain a connection even if not actively used. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 103
Pair devices Open the paired devices tab. Before pairing, decide on your own passcode (1-16 digits), and agree with the user of th e other device to use the same code. Devices that do not have a user interface have a fixed passcode. Y ou need th e passco de o n l y w he n y o u c o nn e c t t h e devices for the first time. After pairing, it is possible to authorise the connection. Pa iring and authorising the connection makes connecting quicker and easi er, as you do not have to accept the connec tion between paired devices every time you establish a connection. The passcode for remote SIM a ccess must have 16 digi ts. 1. Select Option s > New paired device . The device star ts to search for Bluet ooth devices with in range. If you ha ve sent data using B luetooth be fore, a list of the previous search results is displayed. To search for more Bluetooth devices, select More devices . 2. Select the device wi th which you wa nt to pair, an d enter the passcode. The same passcod e must be entered to the other device as well. 3. Select Yes to make the connection between your device and the other dev ice automat ic, or No to confirm the connection manually every time a connection attempt is made. After pairing, the device is saved to the paired devices page. To give a nickname to the paired device, select Optio ns > Assign short nam e . The nickname is only displayed in your device. To delete a pairing, select the device whose pairing you want to delete and Options > Dele te . To delete all pairings, select Options > Delete all . I f you are currently connected to a device and cancel the pairing with that device, pairing is removed immediately, and th e connection is ended. To allow a paired device to connect automati cally to your device, select Set as authorised . Connections between your device and the other device can be made with out your knowledge. No separate acce ptance or authorisation is needed. Use this status for your own devices, such as your compatible headset or comput er, or devices that belong to someone you trust. If you want to accept connection requests from the other device sepa rately every time, select Set as unauthorised . To use a Bluetooth audio enha ncement such as a Bluetooth handsfree or headset, you need to pair your device wit h the enhancement. See the enhanc ement user guide for the passcode and further instruction s. To connect to th e audio enhancement, switch on the enhancem ent. So me audio enhancements conn ect automatically to your device. Otherwise open the paired devices tab, scroll to the enhancement, and select Options > Connect to audio device . Security tips When you are not using Bluetooth connectivity, select Bluetooth > Off or My phone's visibility > Hidden . Do not pair with an unknown device. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 104
SIM access profile With the SIM access profile, you can access the SIM card of your device fr om a comp atible car kit device. This way, you do not need a separate SIM card to access SIM card data and connect to the GSM network. To use the SIM access profile, you need the following: ⢠Compatible car kit device that supp orts Bluetooth wire less technology ⢠Valid SIM card in your device When the wireless device is in the remote SIM mode, you can only use a compatible conn ected accessory, s uch as a car kit, to make or receive calls. Your wireless device will not make any calls, except to the emergency numbers programmed into your device, while in this mode. To make calls, you must first leave the remote SIM mode. If the device has been locked, ente r the lock code to unlock it first. For more information about car kit devices and compatibility with your device, see the Nokia web site and your car kit user guide. Use the SIM access p rofile 1. Select Menu > Connec tivity > Bluetooth > Remote SIM mode > On . 2. Activate Bluet ooth in the car kit. 3. Use your car kit to start a search for compatible devices. For instructions, see the us er guide of your car kit. 4. Select your device from the list of compatible devices. 5. To pair the devices, ente r the Bluetooth passcode shown on the display of the car kit to your device. Tip: If you have already accessed the S IM card from the car kit with the act ive user prof ile, the car kit searc hes automatically for a device with the SIM card. I f it finds your device, and automatic authorisation is activated, the car kit auto matically con nects to the GSM network when you switch on the car ignit ion. When you activate the remote SIM access profi le, you can use applications on your device that do not need network or SIM services. To make connections between yo ur device and the car kit without sep arate acceptance or authorisation, select Menu > Connectivity > Bluetooth , and open the paired devices tab. Scroll to the car kit, press the scroll key, and enter the Bluetooth passcode. When the device as ks to make the connection automati c, select Yes . If you select No , connection requests from this car kit must be accepted separately every time. To end the remote SIM access connecti on from your device, select Menu > Connecti vity > Bluetooth > Remote SIM mode > Off . Wireless LAN Note: U s i n g W L A N m a y b e r es t r i ct e d i n s o m e c o u n t r i e s. For example, in France, you are only allowed to use WLAN indoors. For more information, contact your local authorities. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 105
Your device can detect and co nnect to a wireless local area network (WLAN). To use a WL AN, a network must be available in the location and your devi ce must b e connected to it. WLAN connectio ns To use a WLAN, you must create an in ternet access point in a WLAN. Use the access point for a pplications that need t o connect to the internet. A WLAN connection is es tablished when you create a data co nnection using a WLAN access point. The active WLA N connec tion is ended when you end the data connection. You can also end the connection manually. You can use a W LAN during a vo ice call or when packet data connection is active. You can only be connected to one WLAN access point device at a time, but several app lications can use the same internet access point. When the device is in the Offli ne profile, you can still use a WLAN, if available. Remember to comp ly with any applicable safety requirements when es tablishin g and using a WLAN connection. If you move the device to an other location within the WLAN and out of range of a WLAN access point, the roaming functionality can automatica lly connect your device to another access point that belongs to the same WL AN. As long as you remain within range of access points that belong to the same network, your device can st ay connected to the network. Tip: To check the unique media access control (MAC) address that identifies yo ur device, for example to configure the MAC a ddress of your device to a WLAN router, enter *#62209526# in the home screen. The MAC address is displayed. See WLAN availability To have your device show WLAN availability, select Menu > Tools > Sett ings > Connec tion > Wireless LAN > Show WLAN availability . If WLAN is available, is shown on the display. Tip: You can also sc an for networks in range. WLAN wizard Select Menu > Connectivity > WLAN wiz. . The WLAN wizard helps you fi nd and connect to a wireless LAN. When you open the application, your device starts to scan for available WLANs and lists them. To update the list of available WLAN s, select Options > Refresh . To mark up WLANs in the list of found networks, select Filter WLAN networks . Th e selected networks are filtered out the next time the applic ation searches for wireless LANs. To start or continue browsing the web using the access point of the WLAN, scroll to the desired network, an d select Options > Start web browsing or Cont.web browsing . To disconnect th e active co nnection to the WLAN, select Options > Disconnect WLAN . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 106
To view the details of the WLAN, select Options > Details . To save the acce ss point of the WLAN , select Options > Define access point . Important: Always enable one of the available encryption methods to increase the security of your wireless LAN connection. Using encryp tion reduces the risk of unauthorised access to your data. Use the wizard on the home screen On the home screen, the WLAN wizard shows the statu s of your WLAN conn ections and ne twork searches. To view the available options, scroll to th e row showing the status, and press the scroll key . Depending on the status, you can start the web browser using a WLAN connection, connect to your net call service, disconnect from a WLAN, search for WLANs, or set the network scanning on or off. If WLAN scanning is off and you ar e not connected to any WLAN, WLAN scanning off is displayed on the home screen. To set scanning on and search for available WL ANs, scroll to the row showing the status, and pr ess the scroll key. To start a s earch for available WLANs, scroll to the row showing the status, press the scroll key, and select Search for WLAN . To set WLAN scanning off, scroll to the row showing the status, pres s the scroll key, and select Switch WLAN scan off . When Start we b browsing or Use for is selected, the WLAN wizard automatically creates an access point for the selected WLAN. The access point can also be used with other applications requiring WLAN connection. If you select a secured WLAN, you are asked to enter the relevant passcodes. To connect to a hidden network, you must enter the correct service set identifier (SSID). To use the found WLAN for a net call connection, scroll to the row showing the stat us, and press the s croll key. Select Use for , the desired net call service, and the WLAN to be used. Modem Select Menu > Connectivity > Modem . Together with a compa tible computer, you can use your device as a modem to connect to the web, for example. Before you can use your device as a mo dem é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 107
⢠You need an approp riate data comm unications softwa re on your computer, such as Nokia PC Suite. For more information, see the No kia PC Suite guide. ⢠You must subscribe to the appropriate network services from your service provider or internet service provider. ⢠You must have the appropriat e drivers installed on your computer. You must i nstall drivers for the ca ble connection, and you may need to install or update Bluetooth or infrared drivers. To connect the device to a compatible compu ter using infrared, press the scroll key. Ma ke sure the infrared ports of the device and computer are di rectly facing each other with no obstacles between them. To connect your device to a computer us ing Bluetooth wireless technology, initiate the connection from the computer. To activate Bluet ooth in your device, s elect Menu > Connectivi ty > Bluet ooth and select Bluet ooth > On . If you use a cable to connect your device to a computer, initiate the connection from the computer. You may not be able to use some of the other communication features when the device is used as a modem. Connection manager Select Menu > Connectivity > Co nn. mgr. . View and end active connections To see the open data connections, select Acti ve data connecti ons . To view detailed information about network connections, select a connection from the list and Options > Details . Th e type of information shown dep ends on the connection typ e. To end the selected network connection, select Options > Disconnect . To end all active network conn ections simultan eously, select Options > Disconnect all . Search for WLAN To search for WLAN s availa ble within range, select Availab le WLAN networks . The available WLANs are listed with their network mode (infrastructure or ad-hoc), signal strength, and network encryption indica tors, and whether your device has an active connection wit h the network. To view the details of a networ k, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To create an internet a ccess point for a network, select Options > Define access point . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 108
Security and data management Manage the data and software on your device, and take ca re of the security of the device and its contents. Important: Your device can only support one antivirus application. Having more than one appl ication with antivirus functionality could affect performance and operation or cause the device to stop functioning. Lock the device To prevent access to the conten ts of your device, lock the device when in home screen. Press the power key, select Lock phone , and enter your lock code. The default lock co de is 12345. To unlock, press the left selection key, enter your lock code, and press the scroll key. To change the lock code, select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Security > Phone and SIM card > Lock code . Enter the old code and then the new code twice. The new code can be 4-255 characters long. Both alphab ets and digits can be used, and both up percase and lowercase alphabet s are possible. You can also lock the device remotely by sending a text message to the device. To enable remote locking and to define the text for the message, select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Security > Phone and SIM ca rd > Allow remote l ock > Yes . Enter the remote lock message and confirm the message. Th e message must be at least 5 characters long. Memory card security Select Menu > Tools > Memory . You can protect a memory card with a password to prevent unauthorised access. To set a password, sele ct Optio ns > Set password . The password can be u p to 8 characters long and is case-sensitive . The password is stored i n your device. You do not need to enter it again while you use the memory card on the same device. If you use the memory card on another device, you a re asked for the password. Not all memory cards support password protection. To remove the memory card password, select Options > Remove pass word . When you remove the password, the data on the memory card is not protected against unauthorised use. To open a locked memory card, select Options > Unloc k memory card . Enter the password. If you cannot recall the password to unlock a locked memory card, you may reformat the card , in which case the card is unlocked and password remove d. Formatting a memory card destroys all data stored on the card. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 109
Encryption Select Menu > Tools > Encryptio n . Encrypt your device or memory ca rd to prevent outsiders from accessing your important information. Encrypt device memory or memory card To encrypt the device memory, select Phone memory . To encrypt the memory card, select Memory card and from the following: ⢠Encrypt without savi ng key â Encrypt the memory card without saving the encryption key. If you select this option, you cannot use the me mory card in other devices, and if you restore factory setti ngs, you cannot decry pt the memory card. ⢠Encrypt and save key â Encrypt the memory card and save the key manually in th e default folder. For security, store the key to a safe place outside the device. For example, you can send the key to your computer. Enter a pass phrase for the key and a name for the key file. The pass phrase should be long and complex. ⢠Encrypt with restored key â Encrypt the memory card with a key you have received. S elect the key file, and enter the pass phrase. Decrypt device memory or memory card Always remember to decrypt the device memory a nd/or the memory card before updating the device software. To decrypt the device memory, select Phone memo ry . To decrypt the memory card without destroying the encryption key, select Memory card > De crypt . To decrypt the memory card an d destroy the encryption key, select Memory card > Decrypt and turn off encrypti on . Fixed dialling Select Menu > Communic. > Contacts > Options > SIM contacts > Fixed dial contacts . With the fixed dialling service, you can restrict calls from your device to certain phone numbers. Not all SIM cards support the fixed dialling service. Contact your service provider for more information. 1. To restrict calls from your device, select Op tions > New SIM contact and enter the contact name and phone number to the list of numbers to which calls are allowed, or select Add from Cont acts to copy the conta ct from Contacts. To restrict calls by a country p refix, enter the country prefix in the list of numbers. All phone numbers to which calls are allowed must start with this country prefix. 2. Select Options > Activate f ixed dialling . You need your PIN2 code to activ ate and deactivate fixed di alling or edit é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 110
your fixed dialling contacts. Contact your service provider if you do not have the code. To cancel the service, select Options > Deactivate fixed dialling . Tip: To send text mess ages to the SIM con tacts while the fixed dialling service is active, you need to add the text message centre number to the fixed dialling list. Certificate manager Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Ge neral > Security > Certific ate manage ment . Digital certificates are used to verify the origins of software but do not guarantee safety. Th ere are four different types of certificates: authority certific ates, personal certificates, trusted site certificates, and devi ce certificates. During a secure connection, a server may send a server certificate to your device. Upon receipt, it is ch ecked through an authority certificate stored in your device. You receive notification if the identity of the server is no t authentic or i f you do no t have the correct certificate in your device. You can download a certificate from a web site, or receive a certificate as a message. Certif icates s hould be used when you connect to an online b ank or a remote server to transfer confidential information. They should also be used if you want to reduce the risk of viru ses or other malicious software, and to check the authenticity of software when you download and install software to your device. Tip: When you add a new certificat e, check its authenticity. View certificate details You can only be sure of the co rrect identity of a server when the signature and the validit y period of a server certificate have been checked. To view certificate details, open a certificate folder, and select a certificate and Options > Certific ate details . One of the following notes may appear: ⢠Certificate n ot trusted â You have not set any application to use the certi ficate. You may want to change the trust settings. ⢠Expire d certific ate â The period of validity has ended for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate n ot valid yet â The period of validity has not yet begun for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate corrupted â The certificate cannot be used. Contact the certificate issuer. Certificate trust settings Trusting a cert ificate means that you au thorise it to verify web pages, e-mail servers, software packages, and other data. Only trusted certific ates ca n be used to verify services and software. Important: Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote co nnections and software installation considerably smaller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer an y protection by itself; the certificate manager must co ntain correct, authentic, or é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 111
trusted certificates for increa sed secur ity to be available. Certificates have a restricted li fetime. If "Expired certificate" or "Certificate not valid yet" is shown, even if the certificate should be valid, chec k that the curren t date and tim e in your device are correct. Before changing any cert ificate settings, you must make sure that you really trust the own er of the certificate an d that the certificate really belong s to th e listed owner. To change the trus t settings, select a certificate and Options > Trust sett ings . Select an application field and press the scroll key to select Yes or No . You cannot cha nge the trust settings of a personal certificate. Depending on the certificate, a list of applications that can use the certificate is displayed: ⢠Symbian installatio n â New Symbian operating system application. ⢠Internet â E-mail and graphics. ⢠App. installat ion â New Java⢠application. ⢠Online certif. check â Online certificate status protocol. Security modules Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Ge neral > Security > Security module . View and edit security modules To view or edit a security mo dule, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To view detailed information about a security module, select Options > Security details . To edit the PIN codes for the security module, select Module PIN to edit the PIN code for the security module or Signing PIN to edit the PIN code for digital signatures. You may not be able to change these co des for all security modules. The key store contains the cont ents of the security module. To delete the key store , select Key store , select the desired key store, and Options > Delete . Y ou may no t be able to delete the key store of all security modules. Back up data It is recommended to back up device memory regularly t o the memory card or a compatible computer. To back up information from the device memory to a memory card, select Menu > Tools > Memory > Options > Back up phone memory . To restore information from the memory card to the device memory, select Menu > Tools > Memory > Options > Restore from card . You can also connect your device to a compatible computer and use Nokia PC Suit e to bac k up data. Application manager Select Menu > Installation s > App. mgr. . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 112
You can install two types of ap plications and so ftwar e on your device: ⢠Applications and soft ware spec ifically intended for your device or compatible with the Symbian operating system. These software ins tallation files have the extension .sis or .si sx. ⢠Java ME⢠applications comp atible with the Symbia n operating system. The Java a pplication installation file extensions are .jad or .jar. Installation files ma y be transferred to your device from a compatible comput er, downloaded during browsing, or sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, or with Bluetooth. During the installation, the devi ce checks the integrity of the package to be installed. The device shows information about the checks being carried out, and you are given options to continue or cancel the installation. If you install applications that require a network connection, note that the power consumption of your device may increase when you us e these applications. Tip: When browsing web pages, you can download an installation file and install it immediately. Note, however, that the connection runs in the background during the installation. Install applications Important: Only install and use applications and other software from trusted sources, such a s applications that are Symbian Signed or hav e passed the Java Verified⢠testing. To download and install soft ware from the web, select Download apps. . Select the application and Op tions > Install . To view the details of an installed software package, select the application and Opt ions > View details . To view the installation log, select Optio ns > View log . A list shows what software has be en installed and removed, and the date of the ins tallation or removal. If you encounter problems with the device after installing a software pa ckage, use this list to find out which software package may be the cause of the problem. The info rmation in this list may also help you pinpoint problems that are caused by software packages that are incomp atible with each other. To remove software, se lect Options > Remove . If you remove software, you can only reinstall it by using the original software package file, or by restoring a full backup that contains the removed software p ackage. If you remove a softwar e package, you m ay no longer be able to open files created with th at software. If another software package depends on the software packa ge that you removed, the other so ftware pa ckage ma y stop wo rking. Re fer to the documentation of the installed software package for details. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 113
Installation settings To modify the installation s ettings, select Options > Settings and from the following: ⢠Software instal lation â Select to install signed applications only or all applications. ⢠Online certificate check â T o check the validity of certificates when an applicat ion is installed, select On . If validity cannot be verified, you are asked if you want to continue installa tion. ⢠Default web address â The vali dity of a certificate is checked from the default addres s if the certificate does not include its own web address. To change the default address, select Default web addre ss , and enter the new address. Java security settings To specify security sett ings for a Java applicat ion, select Options > Settings . You can define which functions the Java application can access. The value that you ca n set for each functionality depends on the pro tection doma in of the software package. ⢠Access point â Select an access p oint that the application may use when making network connections. ⢠Network acc ess â Allow the application to create a data connection to the network. ⢠Messaging â Allow the app lication to send messages. ⢠Application auto-start â Allow the app lication to st art automatica lly. ⢠Connectivity â Allow the applica tion to activate a data connection, such as a Bluetooth connection . ⢠Multimed ia â Allow the application to use the multimedia features of your device. ⢠Read user data â Allow the applicat ion to read your calendar entries, contacts, or any other personal data. ⢠Edit u ser data â Allow the application to add personal data, such as entries to Contacts. ⢠Positioni ng â Allow the application to use the location data in your device. ⢠Landmarks â Allow the application to use the la ndmarks in your device. You can define how you are prom pted to confirm the Ja va application's access to the device functions. Select one of the following values: ⢠Ask every time â Require the Java a pplication to ask for your confirmation each time it uses the functionality. ⢠Ask first time â Require the Java application to ask for initial confirmation to use the functionality. ⢠Always allowed â Allow the Java applicati on to use the functionality without your confirmation. The securit y settings help protect your device ag ainst harmful Java applications that m ay use the functions of your device without your permis sion. Only select Always allowed if you know the supplier and trustworthiness of the application. ⢠Not allowed â Prevent the Java ap plication from using the functionality. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 114
Activation keys Select Menu > Tools > Actv. keys . Some media files, such as imag es, music, or video clips, are protected by digital usage rig hts. The activat ion keys for such files may allow or restrict their usage. For example, with some activation keys you may listen to a music tra ck only a limited number of ti mes. During one playba ck session you may rewind, fast-forward, or pause th e track, but once you stop it, you have used on e of the instances allowed. Use activation keys Digital rights manag ement (DRM) protected content comes with an ass ociated activ ation key th at defines your rights to use the content. If your device has OMA DRM-protected cont ent, to back up both the activation keys a nd the content, use the backup feature of Nokia Ovi Suite. If your device has WMDRM-protected c ontent, both the activation keys and the cont ent will be lost if the device memory is formatted. Y ou may also lose the activation keys and the content if the files on you r device get corrupted. Losing the activati on keys or the content may limi t your ability to use the sa me content on your device agai n. For more information, contact your service provider. Some activat ion keys ma y be connected to a speci fic SIM card, and the protected content can be accessed only if the SIM card is inserted in the device. To view your activation keys by type, select Valid keys , Invalid keys , or Not in use . To view the key details, select Options > Key details . The following details are displayed for each media file: ⢠Status â The status is Acti vation key is val id , Activation key expire d , or Activation key not yet valid . ⢠Content se nding â Allowed means that you can send the file to another device. Not allowed means that you cannot send the file to another device. ⢠Content in phone â Yes means that the file is in the device and the path of the file is displayed. No means that the related file is not currently in the device. To activate a key, go to the Activation keys main view, and select Invalid keys > Option s > Get act ivation key . Establish a network connect ion at the prompt, and you are directed to a web site where yo u can purchase rights to the media. To remove file rights, open the valid keys tab or the keys not in use tab, scroll to the desired file, and select Option s > Delete . If there are several rights related to the same media file, all the rights are deleted. The group key view displays all of the files related to a group right. If you have downloaded multiple media files with the same rights, they are all displa yed in this view. You can open the group view from either the va lid keys or invalid keys tabs. To access these files, open the group rights folder. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 115
Data synchronisation Select Menu > Tools > Sync . With Sync, you can sy nchronise your contacts, calenda r entries, or notes with corre sponding applications on a compatible computer or remote internet server. Your synchronisation settings are saved in a synchronisation profile. The Sync application uses SyncML technology fo r remote synchronisation. For information on SyncML compatibility, contact the supplier of th e applications with which you want to synchroni se your device. You may rec eive the sy nchronis ation settings as a message from your service provider. Th e available applications you ca n synchronise may vary. C ontact yo ur service provider for more information. Create a synchr o nisation profile There is a Nokia PC Suite sync hronisation profile available in your device. You d o not need to edit it if you synch ronise your device with a computer usin g Nokia PC Suite. To create a new profile, select Options > New sync profile and as sign a name fo r the profile, select the applications to synchronise with the profile, and specify the needed connection settings. Contact your service provider for details. Select app lications to synchronise 1. To select the applications to synchronise with a synchronisation profile, select Optio ns > Edit sync profile > Applications . 2. Select the desired application, and select Include in sync > Yes . 3. Specify the Remote data base and Synchronisat ion type setting s. Synchronisation connection settings To define the connection settings of a new profile, select Options > New sync prof ile > Connection settings and define the following settings: ⢠Server ve rsion â Select the SyncM L version you can use with the remote server. ⢠Server ID â Enter the server ID of the remote server. This setting is only available if you select 1.2 a s the SyncML version. ⢠Data bearer â Select the data bearer to connect to the remote server duri ng synchronisation. ⢠Access point â Select the a ccess point to use for the synchronisation connection, or create a new access point. You can also choose to be as ked for the access point every time you start synchronising. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 116
⢠Host address â Enter the web address of the server that contains the database wit h which you w ant to sync hronise your device. ⢠Port â Enter the port num ber of the remote database server. ⢠User nam e â Enter your user name t o identify your device to the server. ⢠Password â E n t e r y o u r p a s s w o r d t o i d e n t i f y yo u r d ev ic e to the server. ⢠Allow sync request s â To allow synchronisation to start from the remote database server, select Yes . ⢠Accept all sync requests â To have your device ask for your confirmation before accepting synchronisation from the server, select No . ⢠Network aut henticati on â To authenticate your device to the network before synchronisation, select Yes . Enter your network user name and network password. Mobile VPN Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > VPN . The Nokia mobile virtual privat e network (VPN) client creates a secure connection to compatible corporate intranet and services, such as e- mail. Your device connects from a mobile network, through the intern et, to a corporate VP N gateway that acts as a front door to the compatible corp orate network. VPN client uses IP Security (IPSec) technology . IPSec is a framework of open standards for supporting secure exchange of data over IP networks. VPN policies define the method used by the VPN client and a VPN gateway to au thenticate each oth er, and the encryption algorithms that they use to he lp protect the confidenti ality of data. Contact your company's IT department for a VPN policy. To install and configure the VPN client, certificates, and policies, contact the IT administrator of your organisation. Manage VPN Select VPN management , and from the following: ⢠VPN policies â Install, view, and update VPN policies. ⢠VPN policy servers â Edit the connection settings of VPN policy servers from wh ich yo u can install and update VPN policies. A policy server refers to a Nokia Security Service Manager (NSSM), which is not necessarily required. ⢠VPN log â View the lo g for your VPN policy installations, updates and synchronisations, and other VPN connections. Create VPN access points An access point is where your phone connects to the network. To use e-mail and multimedia services or to browse web pages you must first define inte rnet access points for these servic es. VPN ac cess p oints pair VPN p olicie s with re gular internet access points to create secure connections. Your service provider may preset some or all acces s points for your device, and you may not be ab le to create, edit, or remove them. Contact your company's IT department for the correct settings. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 117
Open a destination, select a VPN access point, sele ct Edit , and define the following: ⢠Connection name â Enter a name for the VPN access point. ⢠VPN policy â Select the VPN policy to combine with the internet access point. ⢠Internet access po int â Select the internet access point with which to combine the VPN policy to crea te secure connections for data transfer. ⢠Proxy server addres s â Enter the proxy server address of the priva te network. ⢠Proxy port numb er â Enter the proxy port number. Use a VPN connection in an application You may have to prove your identity when you log on to the enterprise network. Contact your company's IT department for the credentials. To use a VPN connection in an application, the applicati on must be associated wit h a VPN access p oint. Tip: You can configure the application's connection setting to Always ask , in which case you select the VPN access point from a list of connections when a connection is established. 1. In the application in which you want to create a VPN connection, select a VPN acces s point as the access point. 2. If you are using legacy authentication, enter your VPN user name and passcode or password. I f the SecurID token has become out of synchronis ation with the clock of the ACE/Server, enter the next pass code. If you are using certificate-based authenticat ion, you may h ave to enter the key store password. Barcode reader Select Menu > Tools > Barcode . Use the Barcode reader applicat ion to decode barcodes. The codes may contain in formation such as URL links, e -mail addresses, phone numbers, and busin ess cards. T he Barcode reader does not support 1D codes. The Barco de reader uses the camera in your device to scan codes. To scan a code, select Scan code . After a valid code is detected in the viewfinder, the decode d information appears on the dis pl ay . To sc an a co de th at i s lo cated at some distance from your device, deactivate the close-up mode by selecting Options > Deactiv. close-up mode . To save the scanned data, select Options > Save . The data is saved in the BCR file format. To save scanned data to Contacts, s elect Options > Add to Contacts or Save busines s card , depending on the data you are saving. If the data you scann ed includes a mobile phone number or an e-mail addres s, you can call or send a m essage to the number or send an e-ma il to the addres s by selecting Options > Call or Opti ons > Creat e message: . If the dat a you scanned includes a URL link, you can open it by selectin g Options > Open link . To view previously saved, decoded information, select Saved data in the main view. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 118
Settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings . You can define a nd modify various setti ngs of your device. Modifying these settings affects the operation of your devi ce across sever al applications. Some settings may be preset fo r the device or sent to you in a special messag e by your se rvice provider. You may not be able to change such settings. Select the setting you want t o edit to do the following: ⢠Switch between two values , such as on or off. ⢠Select a value from a list. ⢠Open a text editor to enter a value. ⢠Open a slider to decrease or increase the value by scrolling left or right. General settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General . Select from the following: ⢠Personalisation â Change the display settings and personalise the device. ⢠Date and time â Change the date and time. ⢠Slide handling â Change the slide settings. ⢠Enhancemen t â Define the settings for your enhancements. ⢠Security â Define the s ecurity settings. ⢠Factory settings â R estore the original settings of the device. ⢠Positioni ng â Define the positioning method and server for GPS-based appl ications. Personalisation settings Select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > General > Personalisation . Display settings To turn the automatic display rotation on or off, select Display > Display ro tation . To select whet her you wa nt the image to change to full screen in the landscape mode, select Display > Turn to full v iew . To define the level of light that the device needs before switching on the backlight, select Display > Light sensor . To change the text size, select Display > Fo nt size . To adjust the length of time th e display can be left idle before the screen saver is activat ed, select Display > Power saver time-out . To select a welcome note or logo for the display, select Display > Welcome note / logo . You can either choose the default welcome note, enter your own text, or select an image. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 119
To set how quickly th e display dims after t he last keypre ss, select Display > Light time- out . Standby mode settings To select whether to use the home screen, select Home screen > Home scre en . To change the home screen mode setti ngs, select Home screen > Mode se ttings . To assign shortcuts for the device key s, select Home screen > Key shortcuts . These shortcuts are not available in the home screen. Tone settings To select a ringing tone for voice calls, select Tones > Ringing tone . To select a ringing tone for video calls, select Tones > Video call tone . To set the ringing type, select Tones > Ringing typ e . You can also set the device to sound a ringing t one that is a combination of the spoken name of the caller and the selected ringing tone, when someone from your contacts list calls you. Select Tones > Say caller's name . To set the volume level of the ringing tone, select Tones > Ringing volume . To set the v arious alert tones, select To nes > Message al ert tone , E-mail alert tone , Calendar alarm tone , or Clock alarm tone . To set the device to vibrate when you receive a call, select Tones > Vibrating alert . To set the volume level of the device keypad tones, select Tones > Keyp ad tones . To set the warning tones on or off, select Tones > Warning tones . To select whether you want the alarms and incomin g calls to be silenced when you turn the device face down, select Turn to silence . To select whether you want the alarms and incomin g calls to be silenced when you tap the device twice, s elect Tap to silence . Language settings To set the language used on the device display, se lect Langua ge > Pho ne langu age . To select the langua ge in which you write notes and messages, select Language > Writing language . To select whether to use the predic tive text i nput, selec t Langua ge > Pr edictive te xt . Notification light When you receive a message or miss a call, the scroll key starts blinking to indicate the even t. To set the length of time you want the scroll key to blink, select Notification light > Blink light for . To select of which events you want to be notified, select Notification light > Notified even ts . é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 120
Settings for One-touch keys Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > One-touch keys . To select which application an d task is opened when you press a One-touch key, select the key and Options > Open . To restore the preset appl ications and tasks, select Restore defaults . Date and time settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Date and time . To set the current date and time, select Date and Time . To define your time zone, select Time zone . To update the time, date, an d time zone information automatic ally (network ser vice), select Network operato r time > Auto-update . To select whether to us e the 12-hour or 24-hour clo ck system and with which symbol to sepa rate hours and min utes, select Time format and Time separator . To determine the date format and separator, select Date format and Date separat or . To define the clock type, s elect Clock type > Analogue or Digital . To select the tone for the alarm clock, s elect Clock alarm tone . To determine the week days that are work days for you, select Workdays . Slide settings Select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > General > Slide handling . To select whether you want to answer a call by opening the slide, select Openi ng the s lide . To select whether you want to end a call by closing the slide, select Closing the slide . To select whether you want to lock the keypad when you close the slide, select Keyguard activation . Enhancement settings Select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > General > Enhancement . Common enhancement settings With most enhancements, you ca n do the following: To determine which profile is activated when you attach an enhancement to your device, select the enhancement and Default profile . To let the device an swer phon e calls automatically after 5 seconds when an enhancem ent is atta ched, select Automatic answer > On . If the ringing type is set to Beep once or Silent in the selected profile, the automatic answer is disabled. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 121
To illuminate the device w hile it is attached to an enhancement, select Lights > On . E-mail key settings To select which mailbox to open with the e-mail key, select E-mail key settings > E-mail key , and press the scroll key. Security settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Security . Define the following security settings: ⢠Phone and SIM card â Ad just the security settings for your device and SIM card. ⢠Certificate management â Manage your security certificates. ⢠Security module â Manage your security module. Avoid using codes that are similar to emergency numbers to prevent accidental dialling of the emergency number. Codes are shown as asterisks. When you change a code, enter the current code, then the new code twice. Device and SIM card security To change the PIN code, select Phone an d SIM card > PIN code . The new code must be 4 to 8 digits long. The PIN code protects your SIM card against unauthorised use and is provided with the SIM card. A f ter three consecutive incorrect PIN code entries, the code is bloc ked, and you need to use the PUK code to unblock it before you can use the SIM card again. To set the key pad to lock auto matically after a defin ed period, select Phone and SIM card > Keypad autolock period . To set a time-out after whic h th e device is automa tically locked and can be used only if the correct lock code is entered, select Pho ne and SIM card > Phone autolock pe riod . Enter a number for the time-out in minutes, or select None to set off the autolock period. When the device is locked, you can still answer incoming calls, and calls may still be possible to the official emergency nu mber programmed into your device. To set a new lock code, select Phone and SIM car d > Lock code . The preset lock code is 12345. Enter the current code and then the new code twice. The new code can be 4-255 characters long. Both alph abets and digits can be used, and both uppercase and lowercase alphabets are possible. The device notifies you if the lock code is not properly format ted. Restore original settings To restore the original device settings, select Factory settings . To do this , you need yo ur device lock c ode. After resetting, the device may take a longer time to p ower on. Documents, contact information, calendar entries, and files are unaffected. Telephone settings Select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > Phone . Select from the following: ⢠Call â Define general call settings. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 122
⢠Call divert â Define your call divert settings. See "Call divert" , p. 77 . ⢠Call barring â Define your call barring set tings. See "Call barring" , p. 78 . ⢠Network â Adjust the network settings. Call settings To display your phone n umber to the person you are calling, select Call > Send my caller ID > Yes . To let the network determine whether your ca ller ID is sent, select Set by network . To display your net call addres s to the person you are calling using a net call, select Call > Send my internet call ID > Yes . To be notified of a new incoming call while you have a call in progress, se lect Call > Call waitin g > Options > Activate . To check if the function is ac tive on the network, select Options > Check status . To select whether net calls alert or not, select Call > Internet call alert . You are notified of missed net calls with a notification. To set the default call type, select Call > Default call type and select Vo ice cal l if you make a GSM calls, or Intern et call if you make net calls. To send a text message automa tically to the person who is calling you informing why y ou cannot answ er the incoming call, select Call > Reject call with SMS > Yes . To set the tex t for the message, se lect Call > Message text . To set off the contact search on the home scree n, select Call > Contact search > Off . Network settings Select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > Phone > Network . To select the network mode, select Network mode and Dual mode , UMTS , o r GSM . In the dual mode, the device switches automatically between networks. Tip: UMTS enables faster data tran sfer, but may increase the demand on ba ttery power and reduce the battery life. In regions close to both GSM and UMTS networks, selecting Dual mode may cause constant jumping between the two networks, which also increases the demand on batte ry power. To select the operator, select Operato r selection and Manual to choose from available networks, or Automatic to have the device select t he network autom atically. To set t he dev ice to indica te whe n it is used in Micr o Cell ular Network (MCN), select Cell info display > On . Connection settings Select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > Connection . Select from the following: ⢠Bluetooth â Edit the Bluetooth settings. See "Send and receive data with Bluetooth" , p. 103 . ⢠USB â Edit th e data cable setti ngs. See "Data cable" , p. 10 1 . é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 123
⢠Access points â Set up new or edit existi ng access points. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to create, edit, or remove them. ⢠Packet d ata â Determine when pa cket data connections are used, and enter the access point if you use your device as a modem for a computer. ⢠Wireless LAN â Determine if the device displays an indicator when a WLAN is available, and how often the device searches for networks. ⢠SIP settings â View or create session initiation protocol (SIP) profiles. ⢠Internet tel . â Define settings for net calls. ⢠Configurations â Vi ew and delete trusted servers from which your device may receive configuration settings. ⢠APN control â Restrict packet data connections. See "Restrict packet data" , p. 128 . This option is only available when a USIM card that supports this feature is inserted. Access points Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points . An internet access point is a collection of settings, which define how the device creates a data connection t o the network. To use e-mail and mult imedia services or to browse web pages, you must first defi ne access points for these services. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to create, edit, or remove them. To create a new access point, select Options > New access point o r s e l e c t a n e x i s t i n g a c c e s s point fr om the list and then Options > Duplicate access point to use the acc ess point as a basis for the new one . Packet data (GPRS) settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Packet data . Your device supports packet da ta connections, su ch as GPRS in the GSM network. When you are using your device in GSM and UMTS networks, it is poss ible to have multiple data connections active at the same time; access points can share a data connection, and data co nnections remain active, for example, during voice calls. See "Connection manager" , p. 108 . To define the packet data settings, select Packet data connecti on and select When available to register the device to the packet data network w hen you switch the device on in a supported network, or When ne eded to establish a packet data connect ion only when an application or action requires it. Select Access point and enter the access point name provided by your service provider to use the device as a packet data modem to your com puter. To use a high-speed data co nnection, select High s peed packet access > Enabled . These settings affect all ac cess points for packet data connections. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 124
WLAN settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Wireless LAN . To have an indicator displa yed when there is a WLAN available in your curre nt location, select Show WLAN availability > Yes . To select the interval for your device to scan for availa ble WLANs and update the indicator, select Scan for networks . This setting is not ava ilable unless you select Show WLAN availability > Yes . Advanced WLAN settings Select Options > Advanced settings . The advanced WLAN settings are no rmally defined autom atically, and changin g them is not recommended. To edit the settings manually, select Automatic configuration > Disabled , and define the following: ⢠Long re try lim it â Enter the ma ximum number of transmission attempts if the device does not receive a receiving acknowledgement signal from the network. ⢠Short retry limit â Enter the maximum number of transmission attempts if the device does not receive a clear-to-send signal from the n etwork. ⢠RTS threshold â Select the data packet size at which the WLAN access point device issu es a request to send before sending the packet. ⢠TX power level â Select the power level of your device when sending data. ⢠Radio meas urements â Enable or disable the radio measurements. ⢠Power saving â Select whether to use the WLAN power saving mechanism to save the power in t he device battery. Using the power saving mech anism enhances the battery performance but may weaken WLAN interoperability. To restore all settings to their original values, select Options > Restore default s . WLAN security settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points > Option s > Ne w access point , or select an access point and Options > Edit . In the access point setting s, select WLAN security mode and the desired mode. WEP security settings Select WEP as the WLAN security mode. The wired equivalent privacy (WEP) encryption method encrypts data before it is transmitted. Access to the network is denied to users who do not have the required WEP keys. When the WEP security mode is in use, and your device receives a data packet not en crypted with the WEP keys, the data is discarded. In an ad-hoc network, all devices must use the sa me WEP key. Select WLAN securi ty settings and from the following: ⢠WEP key in use â Select the desired WEP key. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 125
⢠Authenticati on type â Select Open or Shared . ⢠WEP key settings â Edit the settings for t he WEP key. WEP key settings In an ad-hoc network, all devices must use the same WEP key. Select WLAN securit y settings > WEP key settings and from the following: ⢠WEP encryption â Select the desired WEP encryption key length. ⢠WEP key format â Select whether you want to enter the WEP key data in ASCII or Hexadecimal format. ⢠WEP key â Enter the WEP key data. 802.1x security settings Select 802.1x as the W LAN security mode. 802.1x authenticates and authorises devices to access a wireless network, and prevents access if the authorisation process fails. Select WLAN securit y settings and from the fo llowing: ⢠WPA/WPA2 â Sel ect EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) or Pre-shared key (a secret key used for device identification). ⢠EAP plug-in settings â I f you selected WPA/WP A2 > EAP , select which EAP pl ug-ins defined in you r device to use with the access point . ⢠Pre-shared key â I f you selected WPA/WP A2 > Pre- shared key , enter the shared private key that identifies your device to the WLAN to which y ou connect. WPA security settings Select WPA/WP A2 as the WLAN security mode. Select WLAN securi ty settings and from the following: ⢠WPA/WP A2 â Select EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) or Pre-shared key (a secret key used for device identification). ⢠EAP plug-in settings â If you select W PA/WPA2 > EAP , select which EAP plug-ins defined in your device t o use with the access point. ⢠Pre-shared key â I f you select WPA/WPA2 > Pre- shared key , enter the shared private key that identifies your device to the WLAN to which you connect. ⢠WPA2 onl y mode â To allow both TKIP and AES (Advanced Encryption Stan dard) encryption, select Off . To allow AES only, select On Wireless LAN plugins Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points . The EAP (extensible authentica tion protocol) plug-ins are used in wireless networks to authenticate wireless devices and authentication serv ers, and the different EAP plug-ins make possible the use of va rious EAP methods (network service). You can view the EAP plug-ins currently installed in your device (network service). é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 126
EAP plug-ins 1. To define the EAP plug-in settin gs, select Options > New access point and define an access point that uses WL AN as a data bearer. 2. Select 802.1x or WPA/WPA2 as the security mode. 3. Select WLAN secu rity settings > WPA/WPA2 > EAP > EAP plug-in setti ngs . Use EAP plug-ins To use an EAP plug-in wh en you connect to a WLAN us ing the access point, select th e desired plug-in and Options > Enable . The EAP plug-ins enabled for use with this a ccess point have a check mar k next to them . To not use a plug-in , select Options > Disable . To edit the EAP plug-in s ettings, select Op tions > Edit . To change the priority of th e EAP plug-in s ettings, s elect Options > Raise priorit y to attempt to use the plug- in before other plug-ins when con necting to the network w ith the access point, or Optio ns > Lower priority to use this plug-in for network auth entication after attemptin g to use other plug-ins . See the device help for more information on EAP plugins. Session initiation protocol (SIP) settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > SIP settings . Session initiation protocols (SIP) are used for creating, modifying, and terminating ce rtain types of communication sessions with one or more part icipants (network service). Typical communication session s a re video sharing an d net calls. SIP profiles include setti ngs for these ses sions. The SIP profile used by default fo r a communication session is underlined. To create a SIP profile, select Options > New SIP profile > Use default profil e or Use existin g profile . To select the SIP profile you want to use by default for communication sessions, select Options > Defaul t profile . Edit SIP profiles Select Options > Edit , and select from the following: ⢠Profile name â Enter a name for the SIP profile. ⢠Service profi le â Select IETF or Nokia 3GPP . ⢠Default access point â Select the access point to use for the internet connection. ⢠Public user name â Enter your user name received from your service provider. ⢠Use compression â Select if compression is used. ⢠Registration â Select the registration mode. ⢠Use security â Select if security negotiation is used. ⢠Proxy server â Enter the proxy server settings for this SIP profile. ⢠Registrar server â Enter the registration server settings for this SIP profile. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 127
Edit SIP proxy servers Select Options > New SIP prof ile or Edit > Proxy server . Proxy servers are intermediate servers between a browsing service and its users used by some service providers. These servers may provide additional security a nd speed up access to the servic e. Select from the following: ⢠Proxy server addres s â Enter the host name or IP address of the proxy server in use. ⢠Realm â Enter the proxy server realm. ⢠User nam e and Passwor d â Enter your user name and password for the proxy server. ⢠Allow loose routing â Select if loose routing is allowed. ⢠Transport type â Select UDP , Auto , or TCP . ⢠Port â Enter the port number of the proxy server. Edit registration servers Select Options > New SIP profile or Edit > Registrar server . Select from the following: ⢠Registrar server address â Enter the host name or IP address of the registrar server in use. ⢠Realm â Enter the registrar server realm. ⢠User nam e and Passwor d â Enter your user name and password for the registrar server. ⢠Transport type â Select UDP , Auto , or TCP . ⢠Port â Enter the port number of the registrar server. Net call settings Select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > Connection > Internet tel. . To create a new net call profile, select Options > New profile . To edit an existing profile, select Options > Edit . Configuration settings Select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > Connection > Configurations . You can receive messages from your service provider or company information manag ement containing configuration settings for trusted servers. Th ese settings are automatically saved in the Co nfigurations folder. You may receive configuration settings fo r access points, multimedia, or e-mail services, and synchron isation settings from trusted servers. To delete configurations for a trusted serve r, select Options > Delete . The configuration settings for other applications provided by this server are also deleted. Restrict packet data Select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > Connection > APN control . With the access point control se rvice, you can restrict packet data connections from your de vice to certain access points é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 128
only. Your SIM card may not support the access point control service. Contact your serv ice provider for more information. To restrict the packet data connections from your device, select Op tions > Activate restrictions . You need your P IN2 code to activate and deactivate acces s point control or to edit the packet data ac cess points on the co ntrol list. To add access points that can be used for pa cket data connections to the control list, select Options > Add name manually . To enable connections to an operator-provided access point, create an empty access point. To remove acces s points from the list, select Option s > Remove . Application settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Applicat ions . Select an application from the list to adjust its settings. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 129
Shortcuts Here are some of the available keyboard shortcuts in your device. Shortcuts can m ake th e use of the applications more efficient. General shortcuts Power key Press and hold to switch your device on and off. Press once to switch between profiles. Home screen Call key Open the call log. 0 Press and hold to open your home p age in the web browser. # Press and hold to switch between the Silent and General profiles. 1 Press and hold to call your voice mailbox. Number key (2âÂÂ9) T o activate speed dialling, select Menu > Tools > Settings > Phone > Call > Speed dialling > On . Web * Zoom in the page. # Zoom out the page. 2 Open the search dialog. 8 View the page overview. 9 Open the dialog for entering a new web address. 0 Open the bookmarks folder. Image viewer Call key Send the image. 0 Zoom out. 5 Zoom in. 4 Scroll left in the zoomed image. 6 Scroll right in the zoomed image. 2 Scroll up in the zoomed image. 8 Scroll down in the zoomed image. 3 Rotate clockwise. 1 Rotate anticlockwi se. * Switch between the fu ll screen size and normal view. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 130
Glossary Glossary 3G 3rd generation mobile communications. A digital system for mo bile communi cations which aims at glo bal use and provides increased bandwidth. 3G lets a mobile device user access a wide variety of services, such as multimedia. Ad-hoc operating mode A WLAN network mode where two or more devices connect to each other using WLAN directly without a WLAN access point. Cookies Cookies are little pieces of information, given by the server to you, to store information about your vis its to a web site. When you accept cookies, the server is able to evaluate your use of the web s ite, what you are interested in, w hat you want to read, and so on. DNS Domain name serv ice. An internet service that trans lates domain names such as www.nokia.com into IP addresses such as 192.100.124.195 . Domain names are easier to remember but this translation is needed because the internet is based on IP addresses. DTMF tones Dual-tone multifrequen cy tones. The DTMF system is used by touch-tone telephones. DTMF assigns a specific freque ncy, or tone, t o e a c h k e y s o t h a t i t can easily be identified by a microprocess or. DTMF tones allo w you to communicate with voice mailboxes, computerised teleph ony systems, and so on. EAP Extensible authentica tion p rotocol. EAP plug-ins are used in wireless networks to authenticate wireless devices and authentication se rvers. EGPRS Enhanced GPRS. EGPRS is similar to GPRS, but it enables fast er connection. For availability and da ta transfer speed, contact your service provider. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 131
GPRS General packet radio se rvice. GPRS enables wireless access for mobile phones to data networks (network service). GPRS uses packet data technology where information is sent in short bursts of data over the mobile network. The benefit of sending data in packets is that the network is occupied only when sending or receiving data. As GPRS uses the network efficiently, it allows for quick da ta conn ection s etup and fast data transmiss ion speeds. You must subscribe to the GPRS service. For availability and su bscription to GP RS, contact your service provider. During a voice call, yo u cannot establish a GPRS connection, and any existing GPRS connection is put on hold unless the network supports du al transfer mode. GPS Global positioning system. GPS is a worldwide radio navigat ion system. HSDPA High-speed downlink packet access. HSDPA brings high-speed data delivery to 3G terminals, ensuring that users requiring effective multimedia capabilities benefit from data rates previously un available because of limitations in the radio access network. HTTP Hypertext t ransfer protocol. A document transfer protocol used in the web. HTTPS HTTP over a secure connection. IMAP4 Internet mail access p rotocol, version 4. A protocol used for accessing your remote mailbox. Internet access point An access point is where your device connects to a network. To use e-mail and multimedia services or to connect to the internet and browse web pages, you must first define internet access points for these services. Infrastructure operating mode A WLAN network mode where devices are connected to WLAN using a WL AN access point . PIN Personal identity number. The PIN code protects your device from unaut horised use. The PIN code is supplied with the SIM card. If the PIN cod e request is selected, the code is required each time the device is switched on. The PIN code must be 4 to 8 digits long. PIN2 The PIN2 code is supplied with some SIM cards. The PIN2 code is required to access certain function s supported by the SIM card. The length of the PIN2 code is 4 to 8 digits. POP3 Post office protocol, version 3. A common mail protocol that can be used for accessing your remote mailbox. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 132
PUK and PUK2 Personal Unblocking Key. PUK and PUK2 codes are required to change a blocked PI N code or PIN2 code, respectively. The length of the code is 8 digits. SIP Session Initiation Protocol. SIP is used for creating, modifying, and termin ating certain types of communication sessions with one or more participants. SSID Service set identifier. SSID is the name that identifies the specific WLAN. Streaming Streaming audio and video files means playing them directly from the web without downloading them first to your device. UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunications System. UM TS is a 3G mobile communication system. B esides voice and data, UMTS enables audio and video delivery to wireless devices. When you use your devi ce in GSM and UMTS networks, multiple data connections can be active at the same time, an d access points can share a data connection. I n the UMTS network, data connections remain active during voice calls. You can, for example, browse the web faster than previously possible while simultan eously speaking on the phone. UPIN PIN code used in UMTS network. UPUK UPIN Unblocking Key. UPUK code is requ ired to change a blocked UPIN code or PIN2 code. The length of the code is 8 digits. USIM SIM card used in UMTS network. USSD command A service request, such as request to activate an application or configure various settings remotely , that y ou can s end to yo ur operator or service provider with your device. VoIP Voice over IP technology. VoIP is a set of protocols that facilitate phone calls over an IP network, such as th e internet. VPN Virtu al private network. VPN creates a secure connection to compatible corporate intranet and services, such as e-ma il. WAP Wireless application protocol. WAP is an international stan dard for wireless communication. WEP Wired equivalent p rivacy. WEP is an encryption method that encryp ts data before it is transmitted in WLAN. WLAN Wireless local area network. WPA Wi-Fi Protected Access. Security me thod for WLAN. WPA2 Wi-Fi Protected Access 2. Security meth od for WLAN. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 133
Troubleshooting To see frequent ly asked questions about your device, visit the product support pages at the Nokia web site. Q: What is my lock, PIN, or PUK code? A: The default lock code is 12345 . If you forget or lose the lock code, contact your device dealer. If you forget or lose a PIN or PUK code, or if you ha ve not received such a code, contact your network service provider. Q: How do I clo se an application that is no t responding? A: Press and hold the home key. Scroll to the application, an d press the backspace key to close the application. Q: Why do images look smudg y? A: Ensure that the camera len s protection windows are clean. Q: Why do missing, discoloured, or bright dots appear on the screen every time I switch on my device? A: This is a characteristic of th is type of display. Some displays may contain pixels or dots tha t remain on or off. This is normal, not a fa ult. Q: Why canâÂÂt I find my friendâÂÂs device while using Bluetooth connectivity? A: Check that both devices are compat ible, have activated Bluetooth connectivity, and are not in the hidden mode. Check also that the distance between t he two devices is not over 10 metres (33 feet) and that there are no walls or other obstructions between the devices. Q: Why canâÂÂt I en d a Bluetooth connectio n? A: If another device is connecte d to your device, you can end the connection using the other device or by deactivating Bluetooth connectivity. Select Menu > Connectivi ty > Bluetooth > Bluetoot h > Off . Q: Why can't I se e a WLAN access point even though I know I'm within its range? A: Check that the Offline profile is not in use in your device. The WLAN access point may use a hidden service set identifier (SSID). You can on ly access networks that use a hidden SSID if you know the correct SSID, and have created a WLAN access point for the network on your Nokia device Check that the WLAN access p oint is not on channels 12-1 3, as they cannot be associat ed with. Q: How do I sw itch WLAN off on my Nok ia device? A: The WLAN on your Nokia device s witches off when you are not trying to con nect, not connected to anoth er access point, or not scanning for availabl e networks. To further reduce battery consumption, you can sp ecify that your Nokia device does not scan, or scans less often, for avai lable networks in the background. WLAN switches off in between background scans. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 134
To stop the background scans, select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Wi reless LAN > Sho w WLAN availability > Never . You can still manually scan for available WLAN networks and con nect to WLAN net works as usual. To increase the background scan interval, select Show WLAN availability > Yes , and define the interva l in Scan for networks . Q: Why can't I browse th e web even though the WLAN connection is working and the IP settings are correct? A: Check that you have define d the HTTP/ HTTPS prox y settings correctly in the advanc ed settings of your WLAN access point. Q: How do I check the si gnal quality of my WL AN connection ? Select Menu > Connectivity > Conn. mgr. > Active data connections > Options > Detail s . If the signal quality is weak or moderate, you may encounter connection problems. Try again closer to the a ccess point. Q: Why do I have prob lems with the security mode? A: Check that you have configured th e security mode correctly, and that it is the same that the network uses. T o check the security mode the network uses, select Menu > Connectivity > Conn. mgr. > Active data co nnecti ons > Options > Details . Check also the following: you ha ve the correct WPA mode (preshared key or EAP), you ha ve disabled all EAP typ es that are not needed, and all the EAP type settings are correct (passwords, user names, certificates). Q: Why canâÂÂt I select a con tact for my message? A: The contact card does not have a phone number, an address, or an e- mail address. Select Menu > Communic. > Contacts , and edit the contact card. Q: The note Retrieving message is shown briefly. What is happening? A: The device is trying to re trieve a mult imedia message from the multimedia messaging centre . This note is shown if you have selected Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > Multimed ia message > Multimedia retrieval > Always a utomatic . Check that the settings for multimedia messag ing are defined correctly and that there are no mistakes in phone numbers or addresses. See "Multimedi a message settings", p. 69 . Q: How can I end the data connection when the device starts a data connection again and again? A: The device may be trying to retrieve a multimedia message from the multimedia message ce ntre. To stop the device from making a data connection, select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > Multim edia message > Multimedia re trieval > Manual to ha ve the multimedia messaging centre sa ve messages to be retrieved later, or Off to ignore all incoming multimedia m essages. If you select Manual , you receive a notification when there is a new multimedia message that you ca n retrieve in the multimedia message ce ntre. If you s elect Off , the device does not make any network connection s related to multimedia messaging. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 135
To set the device to use a pa cket data connection only if you start an applicati on or action that needs it, se lect Menu > Tools > Sett ings > Connection > Packet data > Packet data connection > When needed . If this does not help, s witch th e device off, and switch it on again. Q: How do I save battery p ower? A: Many features in your de vice increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life time. To save battery power, do the following: ⢠Switch off Bluetooth when you do not need it. ⢠Stop the back ground scans fo r WLAN. Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connec tion > Wireless LAN > Show WLAN av ailability > Never . You can still manually scan for available WLAN networks and conn ect to WLAN networks as usual. ⢠Set the device to use a packet data connection only if you start an application or action that needs it. Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Conn ection > Packet data > Packet data connection > When needed . ⢠Prevent the device from automatically downloadin g new maps in the Maps application. Select Menu > GPS > Maps and Options > Settings > Internet > Connection > Offline . ⢠Change the time-out after which the backlig ht is switched off. Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Display > Light time-out . ⢠Close the applications you do not use. Press and hold the home key. Scroll to the application, and press the backspace key to c lose the application. Product and safety information Enhancements Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and accessories approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The use of any other types may invalida te any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. In pa rticular, use of unapproved chargers or batteries may pres ent a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard. For availability of approved accessories, please check with your dealer. When you disconnect the power cord of any accessory, grasp and pull the plug , not the cord. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 136
Battery Battery and charger information Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. Th e battery intended for use with this device is BL- 4U. Nokia may make additional battery models av ailable for this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from the following chargers: AC-5. The exact charger model number may vary depending on the type of plug. The plug variant is identified by one of the following: E, EB, X, AR, U, A, C, K, or UB. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times, but it will eventually wear out. When th e talk and standby times are noticeably shorter tha n normal, replace the battery. Use only N okia approved batteries, an d recharge your battery on ly with Nokia ap proved chargers desig nated for this device. If a battery is being used for the first time or if the battery has not been us ed for a prolonge d period, it may be nec essary to connect the charger, then disconn ect and reconnect it to begin charging the ba ttery. If the battery is complet ely discharged, it may take severa l minutes before t he charging indicator appears on the displa y or before any calls can be made. Safe removal. Always switch th e device off and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. Proper charg ing. Unp lug the ch arger from the electrical plug and the device when not in use. Do not leave a fully charged battery connected to a charge r, since overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left un used, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time . Avoid extreme temperatures. Always try to keep the battery between 15ðC and 25ðC (59ðF and 77ðF). Extreme temperatures reduce the capacity and lifetime of the ba ttery. A device with a hot or cold battery ma y not work temporarily. Battery performance is particularly limited in temperatures well below freezing. Do not short-circuit. Accident al short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connection of the positive ( ) and negative (-) terminals of the battery. (These look like metal strips on the battery.) This might happ en, fo r example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the connecting obje ct. Disposal. Do not dispose of batt eries in a fire as they m ay explode. Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. Leak. Do not dismantle, cut, open, crush, bend, puncture, or shred cells or batteries . In the event of a battery leak, prevent battery liquid contact with skin or eyes. If this happens, flush the affected areas immediately with water, or seek medical help. Damage. Do not modify, remanu facture, attempt to insert foreign objects into the battery, or immerse or expose it to water or other liquids. Batt eries may explode if damaged. Correct use. Use the battery on ly for its intended purpose. Improper battery use may result in a fire, explosion, or other hazard. If the device or battery is dropped, especially on a é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 137
hard surface, and you believe the battery has been damaged, take it to a service centre for inspection before continuing to use it. Never use any ch arger or battery that is damaged. Keep your battery out of the reach of small children. Nokia battery authentication guidelines Always use original Nokia batteries for your safety. To check that you are get ting an origin al Nokia battery, pu rchase it from a Nokia authorised service centre or dealer, and inspect the hologram label using the following steps: Authenticate hologram 1. When you look at the hologram on the label, you should see the Nokia connecting hands s ymbol from one angle and the Noki a Original Enhancements logo when looking from another angle. 2. When you angle the hologram left, right, down and up , you should see 1, 2, 3 and 4 dots on each side respectively. Successful completion of the steps is not a total assurance of the au thenticity of the battery. If you cannot confirm authenticity or if you have any reason to believe that your Nokia battery with the hologram on the label is not an authentic Nokia battery, you should refrain from using it, and take it to the nearest N okia authorised service centre or dealer for assistance. To find out more about origin al Nokia batt eries, see www.nokia.com/battery. Taking care of your device Your device is a product of su perior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The following suggestions will help you protect your warranty coverage. ⢠Keep the device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that w ill corrode electronic circuits. If your device does get wet, remove the battery, and allow the device to dry completely before replacing it. ⢠Do not use or store the device in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving parts and electronic components can be damaged. ⢠Do not store the device in high or cold temperature. High temperatures can shorten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plast ics. When the device warms to its normal temperature from a cold temperature, moisture can fo rm inside the device and damage electronic circuit boards. ⢠Do not attempt to open the dev ice other than as instructed in this guide. ⢠Do not drop, knock, or shake the device. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards and fine mechanics. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 138
⢠Do not use ha rsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the device . Only use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clean the surface of the device. ⢠Do not paint the device. Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operation. ⢠Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauth orised antennas, modifications, or attachments could da mage the device and may violate regulations governing radio devices. ⢠Use chargers indoors. ⢠Backup all data you want to keep, su ch as contacts and calendar notes. ⢠To reset the devi ce from time to time for op timum performance, power off the device and remove the battery . These suggestions a pply equally to your device, battery, charger, or any accessory. Recycle Always return your used elec tronic products, batteries, and packaging materials to dedicated collection points. This w ay you help prevent uncontrolled waste disposal and promote the recycling of materials. Check product environmental information and how to recycle your Nokia products at www.nokia.com/werecycle, or nokia.mobi/ werecycle. The crossed-out wheeled-bin symbol on your product, battery, literature, or pa ck aging reminds you that all electrical and electronic products, batteries, and accumulators must be taken to s eparate collection a t the end of their working life. Th is requirement applies in the European Union. D o not dispose of these produ cts as unsorted municipal waste. For more environmental information, see the product Eco-Declarations at www.nokia.com/envi ronment. Additional safety information Small children Your device and its accessories are not toys. They may contain small parts. Keep them out of the reach of small children. Operating environment This device meets RF exposure guidelines in the normal use position at the ear or at leas t 2.2 centimetres (7/8 inch) away from the body. Any carry case, belt clip, or holder for body- worn operation should not cont ain metal and should position the device the above-stated dis tance from your body. To send data files or messages requires a quality connection to the network. Data files or mess ages may be delayed until such a connection is available. Follow the separation distance instructions until the tran smission is completed. Parts of the device are magnetic. Meta llic materials may be attracted to the device. Do no t place credit cards or other magnetic st orage media near th e device, because information stored on them may be erased. é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 139
Medical devices Operation of radio transmitting equipm ent, including wireless phones, may interf ere with the function of inadequately protected medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine whether they are adequately shielded from external RF energy. Switch off your devi ce when regulations p osted instruct you to do so. Hospitals or h ealth care facilities may use equipment sensitive to external RF energy. Implanted medical devic es Manufacturers of medical devices recommend a minimum separation of 15.3 centimetres (6 inches) between a wireless device and an implanted medica l device, such as a pacemaker or implanted cardioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential interference with the medical device. Persons who have such devices should: ⢠Always keep the wireless device more than 15.3 centimetres (6 inches) from the medical device. ⢠Not carry the wireless devi ce in a breast pocket. ⢠Hold the wireless device to the ear opposite the medical devic e. ⢠Turn the wireless device off if there is any reason to suspect that interference is taking p lace. ⢠Follow the manufacturer dire ctions for the implanted medical device. If you have any questions about u sing your wireless device with an implanted medical device, consult you r health care provider. Hearing aids Some digital wireless devices may interfere with some hearing aids. Vehicles RF signals may affect improper ly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injection, electronic antilock braking, electronic speed control, an d air bag systems. For more information, check with the manu facturer of your vehicle or its equipment. Only qualified personnel should service the device or install the device in a vehicle. Fau lty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate yo ur warranty. Check regularly that all wireless device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or exp los ive materials in the same compartment as the device, its p arts, or accessories. Remember that air bags inflate wi th g reat force. Do not place your device or accessories in the air bag deployment area. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an airc raft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft and may be illegal. Potentially explosive environments Switch off your device in any ar ea with a potentially explos ive atmosphere. Obey all posted instructions. Sparks in such é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 140
areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or death. Switch off the device at refuelling points such as near gas pumps at service s tations. Observe rest rictions in fuel depots, s torage, and dis tribution areas; chemical plants; or where blasting operations ar e in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They includ e areas where you would be advised to turn off your vehi cl e engine, below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facilities and where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust, or met al powders. You should che ck with the m anufactur ers of vehicles using liquefied petr oleum gas (such as propane or butane) to determine if this device can be safely used in their vicini ty. Emergency calls Important: This device operates using radio signals, wireless networks, landline ne tworks, and user-pro grammed functions. If your device suppo rts voice calls over the internet (internet calls), a ctivate both t he internet call s and the cellular phone. The device ma y attempt to make emergency calls over both the cellular networks and through your internet call provider if both ar e activated. Connection s in all conditions cannot be guaran teed. You should never rely solely on any wireless device for essential communications like medical emergencies. To make an emergency call: 1. If the device is not on, switch it on. Check for adequate signal strength. De pending on your device, you may also need to complete the following: ⢠Insert a SIM card if your device uses one. ⢠Remove certain call restrict ions you ha ve activated in your device. ⢠Change your profile from Offline or Flight profile to an active profile. 2. Press the end key as many ti mes as needed to clear the display and ready the device for calls. 3. Enter the official emergency number for your present location. Emergency numbe rs vary by location. 4. Press the call key. When making an em ergency call, give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireless device may be the only means of communication at the scene of a n accident. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. Certification information (SAR) This mobile d evice meets guidelines f or exposure to radio waves. Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed not to exceed the limi ts for exposure to radio waves recommended by international guidelines. These guidelines were developed by the indepe ndent scientific organisation ICNIRP and include safe ty margins designed to assu re the protection of all persons, re gardless of age and health. The exposure guidelines for mo bile devices employ a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the IC NIRP guid elines is 2. 0 watt s/ kilogram (W/kg) average d over 10 grams of tissue. Tes ts for SAR are conducted us ing standard operating p ositions with é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 141
the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The actual SAR level of an operating device can be belo w the maximu m value because the device is designed to use only the power required to reach the network. Tha t amount ch anges dep ending on a number of factors such as how close you are to a network base station. The highest SAR value under the ICNIRP guidelines for use of the device at the ear is 1.37 W/kg. Use of device accessories may re sult in different SAR values. SAR values may vary dependin g on nat ional reporting and testing requirements and the network band. Additional SAR information may be provided under product information at www.nokia.com. é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 142
Index Symbols/Numbers 3-D ringing tones 37 802.1x security settin gs 126 A access points creating 124 VPN 117 activation keys 115 Active n otes 95 settings 95 alarm clock 99 alert ton es 120 altitude calibrat ion 93 animated screen saver 36 antennas 18 application set tings 129 application s common actions 22 installing 113 modifying installations 114 attachments e-mail 59 multimedia messages 64 sound cl ips 64 audio files details 46 sending 46 autolock period 122 B background image 36 backing up data 112 barcodes 118 battery charge level 23 charging 16 inserting 15 blogs 51 Blueto oth authorising devices 104 pairing 104 passcode 104 receiving data 103 security 104 sending data 103 bookmarks 51 browsing intranet 52 offline 51 web 50 C cable 101 cache emptying 51 Calculator 95 Calendar settings 31 calendar entries creating 31 viewing 31 calendar key 30 calendar views changing 30 call barring 78 net calls 78 call divert 77 caller ID 123 calls answering 73 barring net calls 78 call waiting 123 caller ID 123 conference call 73 fixed dialling 110 making 73 making a call from Log 83 making a net call 76 muting the ringing ton e 73 net call alert 123 PTT 81 rejecting 73 é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 143
rejecting with text message 123 selecting type 12 3 settings 123 speed dialling 77 voice commands 80 voice dialling 80 voice ma il 79 camera capturing images 38 image settings 39 playing videos 3 9 scenes 38 sequence mode 39 toolbar 38 video clips 39 video set tings 40 viewing images 39 car kit remote SIM access 105 cell broadcast 68 settings 71 certificates details 111 settings 111 charging the battery 16 Clock alarms 99 settings 99 world clock 99 computer connections 101 See also data connections conference calls 73 configuration messages 128 connection methods Bluetooth 103 data cable 101 infrared 102 modem 107 connections ending 108 GPRS settings 52, 53 PC connection 54 WLAN settings 53 connectors 12 contact groups adding ringing tones 3 3 creating 32 making conference calls 32 contacts adding 32 adding ringing tones 3 3 searching 32 settings 33 contacts directories managing 33 contacts key 30 converting currencies 97 measurements 97 currency conversions 97 D data connections PC connectivity 101 date settings 121 decrypting device memory and memory card 110 destination removing 93 setting 93 Device manager 9 display changing the look 36 indicators 23 settings 119 display rotati on 13 settings 119 DTMF tones 78 E e-mail 58 automatic retrieval settings 71 connecting to mailbox 59 connection settings 70 creating folders 60 deleting 60 POP or IMAP 58 replying 59 retrieval settings 71 sending 60 setting up 58 user settings 70 writing 60 e-mail key 30 e-mail key se ttings 122 EAP plug-in se ttings 127 é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 144
using an EAP plug-in 127 encrypting device memory and memory card 110 ending internet connections 51 network connections 108 enhancements remote SIM access 105 settings 121 equaliser 43 F feeds 51 File manage r 9 6 files downloading 44 flash files 46 sending 96 fixed dialling 110 free memory 25 G Gallery 44 GPRS access point settings 52 advanced access point settings 53 settings 124 H headset connecting 17 home key 29 home screen 28 settings 36, 120 switching 29 HSDPA (high-sp eed downlink pa cket access) 101 I IM application settings 67 blocking users 67 groups 66 settings 65 starting a conversa tion 66 images adding to contacts 45 display background 45 rotating 45 sending 45 sharing online 43 zooming 45 indicators 23 infrared 102 inserting battery 15 memory card 16 SIM card 15 installation log 113 installing applications 113 internet 50 ending connections 51 internet calls 7 6 Internet radio listening 48 saving stations 49 searching 48 settings 49 intranet browsing 52 J jad files 113 jar files 113 Java applications 113, 114 K key store 112 keyguard 14 keypad lock settings 122 locking 14 tones 120 keys 12 activation keys 115 shortcuts 120 WEP keys 126 é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 145
L landmarks categories 94 creating 93 editing 94 receiving 9 4 sending 94 language changing 27 settings 120 lock code 109, 122 locking device 109 device autolock 122 keypad 14, 122 Log 82 adding numbers to Contacts 83 deleting 83 making a call 83 sending messag es 83 settings 83 transfer log 22 logos welcome logo 119 M Mail for Exchange 58 mailboxes connecting 59 creating 58 making a call 73 Maps 85 browsing 85 changing views 86 display elements 86, 90 downloading maps 86 driving routes 90 Favourites 88 finding locations 87 navigating 90, 91 organising p laces 88 organising rou tes 88 planning routes 91 positioning 87 saving places 88 saving routes 88 sending places 89 shortcuts 92 synchronising 8 9 traffic information 90 viewing location details 88 voice guidance 89 walking routes 91 measurements converting 97 measuring syst em changing 93 memory 25 memory card backing up data 112 formatting 25 inserting 16 locking 109 microSD 25 passwords 109 setting password 25, 96 unlocking 25 menu 20 message reader 56 selecting voice 56 messages 55 call rejection messages 123 cell broadcast settings 71 configuration messages 128 other settings 71 sending sound clips 64 service messages 68 text message settin gs 69 Messaging folders 55, 56 microSDHC 25 modem 5 4, 107 multimedia messages attachments 64 creating 62 creating presentations 63 forwarding 64 receiving 63 replying to 63 sending 62 sending options 65 settings 69 multitasking 33 Music player Music Store 42 playing 42 playlists 42 é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 146
Music Store 42 N net calls 76 alert settings 123 barring 78 connecting 76 making a call 76 profiles 7 5, 128 settings 128 network settings 123 Nokia Ovi Player 4 3 Nokia support information 9 Notes 100 notification light 120 O One-touch keys 12 1 operator selecting 123 original settings 122 Ovi Store 33 Ovi Suite 27 P packet data access point settings 52 advanced access point settings 53 restricting 128 settings 124 pairing devices 104 passcode 104 passwords memory card password 25, 96 PDF reader 97 personalisatio n 36 changing lan guage 120 display 119 home screen 120 tones 120 picture messages forwarding 62 viewing 61 PIN code changing 122 playing messages 56 recordings 4 4 video and audio 45 podcasting 40 directories 41 searching 41 settings 41 position ing settings 85 predictive text input 26, 120 presentati ons 63 printer set tings 98 printing 98 profiles creating 35 customising 35 net call profile 7 5, 128 selecting ringing tones 35 PTT contacts 82 created calls 81 creating a channel 82 exiting 82 logging in 81 making a call 81 settings 81 R radio listening to 47 saved stations 48 settings 48 viewing visual content 47 RealPlayer playing media clips 45 sending files 46 settings 46 viewing clip details 46 recorder playing recordings 44 recording a sound clip 44 settings 44 recording sound clips 4 4 remote configurat ion 9 remote lock 109 remote synchronisation 116 restoring origi nal settings 122 é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 147
ringing tones 120 3-D 37 contacts and contact g roups 33 in profiles 35 vibrating alert 120 S satellite si gnal strength 93 saving current position 93 files 22 settings 22 screen saver 36, 119 scroll key lights 14 search modes switching 32 searching available WLANs 108 security Bluetooth 104 device and SIM card 122 Java application 114 memory card 109 security module 112 sending files 22, 96 using Bluetooth 103 videos 74 service commands 68 service messages 68 settings 71 session initi ation protoc ol See SIP settings Active notes 9 5 advanced WLAN 125 application installations 114 applications 129 Calendar 31 calls 123 camera 39 cell broadcast 71 certificate 111 clock 99 contacts 33 date 121 display 119 e-mail connection 7 0 e-mail key 122 e-mail retrieval 71 e-mail user 70 EAP plug-ins 127 enhancements 121 GPRS 52, 5 3, 124 home screen 120 IM 65 Internet radio 49 Java application security 114 keypad lock 122 language 120 Log 83 multimedia messages 69 net call 128 network 123 packet data 124 podcasting 41 positioning 85 print er 98 PTT 81 radio 48 RealPlayer 46 recorder 44 restoring 122 service messages 71 SIP 127 slide 121 text messages 69 time 121 tones 120 voice commands 80 web 5 1 WEP security 125 WLAN 12 5 WLAN access point 53, 54 WLAN security 125 Settings w izard 19 shortcuts 92, 13 0 keys 120 signal strength 23 silencing alarms and incoming calls 1 3, 120 SIM access profile 105 SIM card inserting 15 text messages 61 SIP creating profiles 127 editing profiles 127 é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 148
editing proxy servers 128 editing registration servers 128 settings 127 sis files 113 sisx files 113 slide opening and closing 14 settings 121 software packages installation settings 114 installing 113 software upda tes 10 sound clips recording 4 4 sending 64 Speech 56 speed di alling 77 standby mode settings 120 support 9 switching device on and off 19 Symbian applications 113 synchronisati on 22 settings 116 synchronisation profiles 116 synchronisin g applications 116 T tabs 22 text changing size 119 letter mode 26 number mode 26 predictive input 26 traditional input 26 text mess ages messages on SIM card 61 sending 60 sending options 6 1 settings 69 writing 60 themes changing 36 downloading 37 time settings 121 tones 120 settings 120 toolbar camera 38 traditional te xt input 26 Transfer log 22 transferring d ata 22 transferring mu sic 43 trip destinatio n 93 trip meter 93 troublesho oting 134 U updates 10 UPIN cod e changing 122 USB data c able 101 V vibrating alert 1 20 video playing 39 video calls making a call 74 switching to voice call 74 video clips details 46 playing 45 sending 46 video sharin g 7 4 receiving invitations 75 virtual private network access points 117 use in applications 118 Voice aid 7 9 voice commands changing profiles 80 launching an application 80 settings 80 voice mail calling 79 changing number 79 voice over IP 76 VoIP 76 volume 25 VPN access points 117 use in applications 118 é 2010 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 149
W wallpaper 45 warning tones 120 Web connection security 5 0 web settings 51 weblogs 51 Welcome applicati on 19 welcome note 119 WEP keys 126 security settin gs 125 wireless keyb oard 100 WLAN 802.1x security settings 126 access point settings 53 access points 106 advanced access point settings 54 advanced settings 125 availability 106 MAC address 10 6, 125 searching for networks 108 security settin gs 125 settings 125 WEP keys 126 WPA security set tings 126 WLAN wizard 106 world clock 9 9 WPA security sett ings 126 writing language 27 Z Zip manager 97 é 2010 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 150